Home

IBM SG24-4817-00 User's Manual

1. Command Access Mode Comments User Displays all available commands parameters for next entering BOOT Maintenance CLEAR ATM_ESI Administrator CLEAR COMMUNITY Administrator CLEAR CONFIGURATION Maintenance CLEAR LAN_EMUL Administrator CONFIGURATION_SERVER CLEAR LOGICAL_LINK Administrator CLEAR PVC Administrator DOWNLOAD INBAND Administrator DOWNLOAD OUT_OF_BAND Maintenance DUMP TRS Administrator MAINTAIN Administrator PING User RESET ATM_SUBSYSTEM Administrator For the module installed in the expansion unit REVERT Administrator SAVE Administrator SET ALERT Administrator SET CLOCK Administrator SET COMMUNITY Administrator SET DEVICE Administrator CONFIGURATION_SERVER SET LAN_EMUL SERVER Administrator SET LOGICAL_LINK Administrator SET MODULE Administrator SET PVC Administrator SET STATIC_ROUTE Administrator SET TERMINAL Administrator SET TFTP FILE_TYPE Administrator SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS Administrator Appendix A 8285 ATM Control Point Commands 177 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 38 Page 2 of 2 IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ATM Command List Command Access Mode Comments SET TFTP TARGET_MODULE Administrator SET TRACE Administrator SHOW ATM_ESI User SHOW CLOCK User SHOW COMMUNITY User SHOW ERRORS Maintenance SHOW FLASH Maintenance SHOW
2. Console Figure 23 Local LAN to ATM Server Bridging Figure 24 on page 60 shows an example of using the ATM LAN bridge as a means of bridging three Ethernet LANs together while providing all users including the ATM25 users with access to both a LAN server and to an ATM attached server for very demanding applications Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 59 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ATM Server Upto 12 ATM25 LAN WorkStations WorkStation Ethernet Half Full Duplex Shared Dedicated on any port Figure 24 Local LAN Bridging and ATM Server Access 4 7 2 2 Campus LAN Interconnect and ATM Server Access Figure 25 on page 61 shows an example of using the ATM LAN bridge as a means of bridging four LANs together with four LANs remotely interconnecting them with a high speed ATM backbone while providing all users including the ATM25 users with access to an ATM attached server for very demanding applications Note All LANs configured on a specific module must be of the same type Ethernet or token ring Moreover the workstations connected to that port will only be able to communicate directly with other devices supporting that same kind of LAN type whether natively via another ATM LAN bridge or via LAN emulation This
3. Figure 40 Multi Switch CIP Network Physical View 128 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8285 2 Control Point CIP Client momo P S CIP Client ATM CIP Campus Network o oo e mp d e a 8285 1 Control Point CIP Client ALLELES EE RERE IEEE EL ERLE ESI SEES LEED ARP Server TFIP Server Figure 41 Multi Switch CIP Network Logical View The necessary parameters for our second switch are listed below in Table 33 Please note that the ACN is the same indicating that both switches are in the same cluster and will therefore communicate using SSI protocols Table 33 Necessary Parameters for 8285 2 Parameter Value Comments IP address 9 100 86 151 Subnet mask FF FF FF CO Must be entered in dotted hexadecimal Default 9 100 86 130 gateway ATM prefix 3999999999999900009999 First 11 bytes of address Must match 8285 1 ACN 01 12th byte Must match 8285 1 ATM hub 02 13th byte Must be unique number within cluster ATM ESI 999999999902 6 byte MAC address ATM selector 00 Has significance only to local workstation ARP server 08005A99029F 6 byte MAC address ESI ARP server 00 Must explicitly match the ARP selector server s value We configure the second switch just
4. ocPowerControl 1 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 265 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ocPowerModeOperStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER fault tolerant 1 not fault tolerant 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current operational status of hub power fault tolerant mode ocPowerControl 2 ocPower0OverheatPowerDownMode OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER enable 1 disable 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current desired state of hub overheat automatic power down mode The value enable 1 causes slots containing IBM 8260 modules to be automatically power disabled during a hub overheat condition The value disable 2 causes no action to be taken when a hub overheat condition occurs ocPowerControl 3 Hub backplane power ocPowerOutputTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OcPowerOutputEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A table that contains information about the hub power budget This table is indexed by voltage line type each of which is supplied by the operational power supplies ocPower 2 ocPowerOutputEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OcPowerOutputEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A list of information about the hub power budget INDEX ocPowerOutputType ocPowerOutputTable 1 OcPowerOutputEntry SEQUENCE ocPowerOutputType INTEGE
5. atmPvc 3 atmPvcEpEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmPvcEpEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of atmPvcEpTable One entry is automatically created by the agent when a PVC is created in the PVC Table No additional entry can be created in this table if the Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 249 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only PVC is defined as point to point in the PVC table INDEX atmPvcEpIndex atmPvcEpIdentifier atmPvcEpParty atmPvcEpTable 1 AtmPvcEpEntry SEQUENCE atmPvcEpIndex INTEGER atmPvcEpIdentifier INTEGER atmPvcEpParty INTEGER atmPvcEpRowStatus RowStatus atmPvcEpStatusCause INTEGER atmPvcEpRemAddress NetPrefix atmPvcEpRemIndex INTEGER atmPvcEpRemVpi INTEGER atmPvcEpRemVci INTEGER atmPvcEpLastActive DateAndTime atmPvcEpQ2931Cause INTEGER atmPvcEpFai lures Counter atmPvcEpIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifIndex value of the ATM interface used by this PVC atmPvcEpEntry 1 atmPvcEpIdentifier OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A value used to uniquely identify this PVC on this interface This is the same identifier as the one used in the atmPvcTable to identify the PVC that this end point belongs to atmPvcEpEntry 2 atmPvcEpParty OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS manda
6. Utopia 1 ATM Carrier 1 or 2 slot Module PSM functional enhancements In addition to the new PSMs support the following functional enhancements are provided to the PSM LAN Emulation trap support Ability to display ATM attached devices Ability to backup and restore configuration Ability to display SVCs Ability to manage SVC log files New control point code support New ATM module support The following ATM modules MIBs are newly supported ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module MSS Server Module Release 1 5 LAN Emulation Automatic discovery of LAN Emulation entities such as servers clients proxy or non proxy ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Dynamic display of LAN Emulation topology such as administrative domains ELANs lists of clients and related servers Configuration of LANE entities and services such as domains policies LANE clients and servers ELAN status reflected in an ATM device s color state ELAN fault management ELAN security for preventing unauthorized station to connect a given ELAN group Central point for accessing servers error log LECS BUS LES Drag and drop operations for add remove change on configuration Use of templates to ease the ELAN management Templates are predefined automated scenarios that hid
7. The Team That Wrote This Redbook xii This redbook was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working for the Systems Management and Networking ITSO Center Raleigh This project was designed and managed by Georges Tardy LAN Campus Specialist at the Systems Management and Networking ITSO Center Raleigh working in La Gaude France He joined IBM in 1965 and was previously a hardware development engineer of campus hub products at La Gaude Laboratory France The authors of this document are Marc Fleuette is a Senior Networking Technical Specialist from the IBM North American Sales and Services organization He has been with IBM for nine years in both marketing and technical positions including two years as Technical Internetworking Marketing Specialist He currently provides pre sales technical support for IBM s family of campus internetworking products including hubs routers and switches for both ATM and traditional LANs He has a B S in Industrial Engineering and a B A in History English both from Lehigh University in Bethlehem PA USA ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Tadashi Murayama is an Advisory Networking I T Specialist in IBM Japan He has been with IBM Japan for 11 years in the Field Support Organization and has been in charge of the networking products such as the CCU NCP and the LAN products He holds a degree in LL B
8. 8 4 2 Prerequisites This section lists the recommended hardware and software requirements for the installation and operation of Nways Manager for Windows This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Hardware Requirements Minimum 80486 DX processor at a minimum 33 MHz SVGA high resolution workstation monitor support An SVGA adapter is required only if SVGA support is not built into the motherboard 16 MB RAM 24 MB for large networks 156 MB free hard disk 240 MB recommended which includes 8 MB free hard disk for NETMANAGE NEWT V4 6 125 MB free hard disk for NetView for Windows V2 1 25 MB free hard disk for Nways Manager for Windows V2 and 14 MB for V1 Network interface card with NDIS or ODI support CD ROM drive 3 5 inch diskette drive Mouse supported by Microsoft Windows Software Requirements e e DOS 5 0 or later MIcrosoft Windows 3 1 or later NDIS or ODI device driver for the Network interface card 8 4 3 Using Nways Manager for Windows with IBM 8285 Please refer to Campus ATM Network Management Guidelines SG24 5006 for network management using the latest software 170 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Appendix A 8285 ATM Control Point Commands This appendix describes the various functions and features that are supported by the 8285 Control Point A 1 Command Line Interface To be able to configu
9. Required Power ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module 25 0 1 2 ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module 1 2 ATM 155Mbps I O Cards MMF SMF UTP STP STP ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module 2 5 ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module 2 5 Video Distribution Module ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module 35 0 1 2 ATM 1 slot Carrier Module 17 5 0 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 20 Page 2 of 2 Power Budget of the 8285 Expansion Chassis 6 1 3 ATM Ports and Device Watts 5V Watts 12V ATM 2 Slot Carrier Module 17 5 ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 12 0 ATM WAN Module ATM WAN I O Cards E3 DS3 0C 3 STM 1 7 9 IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server 42 0 1 0 2 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module 67 5 3 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module Token Ring 4 Port UTP STP 11 0 UPES 2 Port Fiber 8 0 1 Port ATM155 25 0 T Port RMON 2 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module 58 5 3 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module 58 5 Ethernet 4 Port 10Base T 5 5 UPOS 3 Port 10Base FL 1 Port 100Base Tx 5 7 1 Port 100Base Fx 6 0 1 Port ATM155 25 0 Cabling With its expansion the IBM 8285 offers several physical kind of port connections to handle twisted pair fibers and coaxial lines The physical specification of each type of port are as follows e UTP FTP STP Ports Physical Interface RJ 45 25 Mbps Cabling S
10. This table contains basic information for each active Switched Virtual Connection SVC atmQ2931 3 atmSvcEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmSvcEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of atmSvcTable Each entry uniquely defines two end points of an SVC In the case of a multicast SVC each entry is defined by the association of the root and one party INDEX atmSvcInterfaceIndex atmSvcSiVpi atmSvcSiVci atmSvcCal1Reference atmSvcEndPointReference atmSvcTable 1 AtmSvcEntry SEQUENCE atmSvcInterfaceIndex INTEGER atmSvcSiVpi INTEGER atmSvcSiVci INTEGER atmSvcCal1Reference INTEGER atmSvcEndPointReference INTEGER Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 233 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only atmSvcCal 1 ingNumber AtmAddress atmSvcCal edNumber AtmAddress atmSvcClear INTEGER atmSvcCreationTime DateAndTime atmSvcVpi INTEGER atmSvcVci INTEGER atmSvcInterfaceIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifIndex value of the ATM interface used by this svc atmSvcEntry 1 atmSvcSiVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vpi value which with the Vci value specified in atmSvcSiVci defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmSvcEntry 2
11. You can choose the type of view from the following e Star e Row Column e List You can go to the other node management options described below by selecting an option from the pull down list of ATM Node 8 3 4 2 Profile The profile panel shown in Figure 52 on page 161 allows you to modify the following e Contact Person e Administratively assigned Name e Location ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Figure 52 IBM 8285 Node Profile Panel 8 3 4 3 Configuration The configuration panel shown in Figure 53 on page 162 can be used to e Display configuration information e Lock and unlock selected ATM nodes This is done to ensure that the operator cannot unintentionally disable the port for exchanging network management information between the NCM A and the switch e List the interfaces on the selected ATM node e From the services option in the menu bar you can select any of two items File Transfer Trace and Dump System Trace TRS Trace System Dump TRS Dump Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 161 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Figure 53 IBM 8285 Node Configuration Panel 8 3 4 4 Fault The fault panel allows you to display the events received from the IP address of the selected IBM 8285 162 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8 3 4 5 Device 8285
12. network to network interface network node interface network service access point non reserved bandwidth optical carrier level n open data link interface originator identifier open systems interconnection open shortest path first personal computer Peak Cell Rate peripheral component interconnect pulse code modulation PDH PDU PG PGI PGL PIM PNNI PSM PT PTSP PVC PVP QoS RB RIP RISC RMON SAAL SAAT SAP SAR SDH SDLC SDU SFE SNA SNAP SNMP SONET SRB SRF SSCOP SSCS SSI STM STP svc 292 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only plesiochronous digital hierarchy protocol data unit peer group peer group identifier peer group leader product independent module private network node interface product specific module payload type PNNI topology state packet permanent virtual circuit permanent virtual path quality of service reserved bandwidth routing information protocol reduced instruction set computer cycles remote monitor signaling ATM adaptation layer source address association table service access point segmentation and reassembly synchronous digital hierarchy synchronous data link control service data unit specific front end Systems Network Architecture subnetwork access protocol simple network management protocol synchronous optical network single route broadcast specif
13. 0 17 3 2 Switching Fabric 0 0 00 ee ee 22 3 2 1 Switching in the IBM 8285 2 0 2 2 02 22 3 2 2 Switching Scenarios 2 00000 25 3 3 Control Point Codes 0 0002 28 3 3 1 Control Point Levels 2 00 02 0 0 0 048 29 3 3 2 Control Point V1 2 ced d e p aee oia e 000 000 0000 20020000 30 3 3 3 Control Point Vis eee oo ke tn ks ae Pe ek Bt ee os A ee eS 30 3 3 4 Control Point V1 4 2 02 000 000000000200 200 20 31 3 4 ATM Backplane Expansion Unit Connection 33 3 5 LAN Emulation Server Functions 0 33 Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 35 4 1 Modules Currently Available for the 8285 ATM Subsystem 35 4 2 Some Common Elements among the 8285 Modules 36 4 2 1 Maximum Capacity 0 000002 0p ee 36 4 2 2 Variable VPC VCC Value Ranges 04 36 4 3 ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module 38 4 3 1 Sample Scenarios 0 0000 pe 38 4 4 ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module and ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module 0 2 02 200 42 4 4 1 Differences between the 2 and 3 Port ATM Modules 43 4 4 2 ATM 155 Mbps Media Module Traffic Management 43 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 iii iv This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 43 Sample Scenarios 0 0 0000 pe 43 4 5
14. A list of inventory information related to a module indexed with respect to slot and subslot location numbers ocInvMods 1 ocInvModEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OcInvModEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Values to describe a module inventory items INDEX ocInvModSlotIndex ocInvModSubSlotIndex ocInvModTable 1 OcInvModEntry SEQUENCE ocInvModS1ot Index INTEGER ocInvModSubS1 ot Index INTEGER ocInvModModel DisplayString ocInvModSerialNo DisplayString ocInvModHWVer DisplayString ocInvModSWVer DisplayString ocInvModSWBootVer DisplayString ocInvModMfr DisplayString ocInvModMfrDate DisplayString ocInvModNotePad DisplayString ocInvModSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The slot number where this Module is located ocInvModEntry 1 ocInvModSubSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The subslot number where this Module is located It is associated with a slot number Motherboards are always located in subslot one e g lt slot gt 1 However daughter cards can reside on any subslot within the range 2 8 e g lt slot gt lt 2 8 gt ocInvModEntry 2 ocInvModModel OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS r
15. ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 247 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION The end point where the PVC is created is identified as the primary or root end point the other end point is the identified as the secondary or leaf end point DEFVAL primaryRoot atmPvcEntry 5 atmPvcVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65536 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VPI value assigned to this PVC at the origin A value of 65536 means that no value has been specified by the operator If no value has been specified the VPI value is then automatically allocated by the agent when activating the PVC DEFVAL 65536 atmPvcEntry 6 atmPvcVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65536 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VCI value assigned to this PVC at the origin For VP type PVC this value is not applicable and is set to 0 A value of 65536 means that no value has been specified by the operator If no value has been specified the VCI value is then automatically allocated by the agent when activating the PVC DEFVAL 65536 atmPvcEntry 7 atmPvcBackwardQos OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unspecified 0 class A 1 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The QOS requested for this PVC to the originator DEFVAL unspecified atmPvcEntry 8 atmPvcForwardQos OBJECT TYPE
16. ATM cells are connection oriented which means that they are not responsible for identifying a destination or determining the best route In fact the only routing information necessary is the current hop information which the next switch uses in its forwarding decision And since all cells for a given session follow the same path no provision is necessary for out of sequence arrival Thus unlike traditional LAN packets sequencing numbers are not required and addressing at the MAC and network layers is eliminated for native ATM applications The result is more data less overhead and simpler hardware based switching Copyright IBM Corp 1996 1 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 1 1 2 ATM Connections ATM being session oriented requires that a path through the network be determined and maintained for the duration of the session This path is comprised of virtual channel links switch to switch connections which are linked together to form a virtual channel connection VCC end to end connection which are aggregated into virtual paths VP Just like a virtual channel VC a virtual path can be a virtual path link switch to switch connection or a virtual path connection VPC end to end connection More importantly a virtual path can be switched to a new route to avoid congestion or a failure without affecting or individually processing the VCs it contains Connections through the network can be either fixed
17. Configuration considerations Configuration Program connectivity requirements 64 functions 62 Installation 185 installation process 63 overview 62 running 63 with OS 2 Japan 190 General considerations association between IP and MAC address 62 features 57 filters 57 192 migrating to Release 2 191 OS 2 device driver levels 191 problems with older adapter code 191 SNMP access 58 interfaces 58 Microcode considerations 8285 software level 191 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Bridge Module 4 Port TR Ethernet continued Microcode considerations continued Operational Software Versions 184 Recovering from Corrupted FLASH code 185 Sources of Microcode 184 power requirements 94 sample scenario LAN ATM campus bridging 60 sample scenario LAN ATM server bridging 59 sample scenario LAN LAN server bridging 59 Troubleshooting 62 192 193 C Cabling console cables 186 Classical IP ATM address 131 data flows 6 overview 6 Commands SET PVC 53 G glossary 285 IBM MSS Server Module 5 IISP 101 104 implementation constraints 42 Interfaces supported ATM ATM 25 6 Mbps on 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module 12 Port 38 DS3 on ATM WAN module 67 E3 on ATM WAN module 67 OC 3c on ATM WAN module 67 SONET implementation constraints 42 on LAN switch ATM UFC 76 STM 1 on ATM WAN module 67 TAXI 100 Mbps on 4 port module 46 L LAN Emulation and the Bridge Module 61 overview 5 signalling 5 LAN
18. RI RO 2 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module 5208 16 4 2 3 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module 5308 24 8 4 Table 9 Page 1 of 2 A Comparison of 8285 Ethernet LAN Switch Modules Module Feature Maximum Number of Ports 10Base T 10Base F 100BaseT 100BaseF ATM 155 2 slot 8271 ATM LAN 20 Switch Module 6 2 2 Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM 2 Modules 75 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 9 Page 2 of 2 A Comparison of 8285 Ethernet LAN Switch Modules Module Feature Maximum Number of Ports 10Base F 100BaseT 4 10Base T 3 slot 8271 ATM LAN 28 Switch Module 100BaseF 4 ATM 155 4 12 4 9 1 1 ATM UFC I O Feature There are 2 ATM UFCs available one ATM 1 port UFC for the Ethernet LAN switches and one ATM 1 port UFC for the token ring LAN switches ATM 155 Mbps UFC The ATM Multimode Fiber UFC achieves the ATM to LAN connection by providing an ATM Forum compliant LAN emulation proxy client LEC It features the following e Supports a single ATM 155 Mbps multimode fiber interface with SC connectors e Supports SONET STS 38c framing e Supports both UNI 3 0 and UNI 3 1 in accordance with ATM Forum specifications e Supports switched virtual connections SVCs only and does not support permanent virtual connections PVCs e Supports best effort Unspecified QoS variable bit rate VBR and continuous bit rate CBR connections in
19. This is a simple straightforward product but with limited functions It is best suited for small ATM networks such as for the management of stand alone ATM workgroup switches The main difference to the others are ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e Very limited management function support for IBM 8260 ATM subsystem For example it does not recognize any ATM modules and can display only a few characteristics of these modules e Limited management function support for ATM logical resources For example it does not allow connection tracking 8 3 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX 8 3 1 Overview The following sections describe the information about Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX especially for the IBM 8285 management Nway Campus Manager ATM for AIX which is referred to as NCM A in this book is a program that runs under NetView for AIX It combines the former ATM Campus Manager for AIX ATMC with the new PSMs It allows seamless navigation between ATMC functions and graphic ATM device management applications This package integrates ATM device management and the display of ATM connections that were not previously available on individual application products For instance the product specific views of IBM ATM products such as IBM 8285 8281 and 8282 are shown in an ATM topology submap It can be coupled with Nways Campus Manager LAN for AIX to prov
20. UART 1 3 1 IBM DOS TCP IP SLIP Connection Setup IBM TCP IP with CSD 2 1 1 4 MUST be already installed on the workstation This version or later of IBM TCP is required Use the TCP IP CUSTOM application to set and enable the COM port as a SLIP interface with the following configuration IP Address 1 2 3 6 Destination Address 1 2 3 5 Modem speed 19200 bps Port COM Note is the number of the COM port to be used Because communications may be over a SLIP connection running with Microsoft Windows statements MUST be added to the SYSTEM INI file to prevent Windows from taking over the COM ports Add the following 3 statements to the 386Enh stanza of SYSTEM INI for each COM COM port which is to be used by SLIP 386Enh Com AutoAssign 0 Com Base 0 Com Irq 1 Note is the number of the COM port to be disabled AFTER YOU MAKE THESE CHANGES YOU MUST RESTART WINDOWS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Appendix D Hints and Tips for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 187 188 1 r i This soft copy for use by IBM employees only xk Test your SLIP connection by making sure you can ping the bridge ping 1 2 3 5 KEX kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Note You must start TCP IP with tcpstart command before starting Windows 2 Chameleon TCP IP SLIP Connection Setup After Chameleon TCP IP is installed use the CUSTOM applic
21. Utilization ATM Port Latency in microseconds normal 57 us 155 Mbps 41 us high 25 Mbps 61 us 155 Mbps 44 us high 40 us ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 6 2 1 2 ATM Bandwidth Capacity The ATM bandwidth should be considered in a large network especially for reserved bandwidth connections such as the connections between switches This section describes the ATM bandwidth capacity of the 8285 switch and its components Total Bandwidth The total bandwidth available for each IBM 8285 Base Unit and ATM module in the expansion unit is 212 Mbps FDX This is because although the switch on a chip supports up to 256 Mbps for each module the switch uses 64 byte cells internally to transport 53 byte ATM cells Therefore the maximum external throughput per module is 256 Mbps x 53 64 or 212 bytes Total Reserved Bandwidth The total reserved bandwidth available for each IBM 8285 base unit and for each ATM module in the expansion unit is 85 percent of the total bandwidth available and is 180 Mbps when the total bandwidth is 212 Mbps In addition the maximum reserved bandwidth for an ATM port is 85 percent of the physical port speed For example it becomes 85 Mbps for a 100 Mbps port and 131 Mbps for a 155 Mbps port Table 23 shows the summary of the IBM 8285 ATM bandwidth capacity Table 23 Bandwidth Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switc
22. advanced peer to peer networking all routes explorer address resolution protocol American National Standard Code for Information Interchange asynchronous transfer mode attachment unit interface Broadband ISDN boot protocol IP bytes per second bits per second basic rate interface broadcast and unknown server call admission control common ATM datamover common ATM processor constant bit rate Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee now ITU T circuit emulation classical IP cell loss priority common part convergence sublayer cyclic redundancy check carrier sense multiple access with collision detection destination address association table discard eligibility data exchange interface error correction code Copyright IBM Corp 1996 EFCI ELID EMC ETSI FCS FDDI FPGA FTP Gbps GFC HDLC HDTV HEC IBM IEEE IETF ISP ILMI INARP IP IPX ISA ISDN ISO ITSO ITU T KB Kbps LAA Explicit Forward Congestion Control emulated LAN identifier electromagnetic compatibility European Telecommunication Standards Institute frame check sequence fiber distributed data interface field programmable gate array file transfer protocol gigabits per second generic flow control high level data link control high definition tele video header error check Internati
23. optionalFeatureEntry 3 optionalFeatureNumberOfPorts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of ports present on this feature card optionalFeatureEntry 4 optionalFeatureDescription OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A textual description of this optional feature This description is blank when no description is available optionalFeatureEntry 5 Cross Connect Table connections OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 4 VCL Cross Connect Table vcXConnectTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF VcXConnectEntry ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains the cross connections set up in the switch for all existing VCL based PVCs and SVCs connections 1 vcXConnectEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX VcXConnectEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of vcXConnectTable INDEX vcXInIndex vcXInVpi vceXInVci vcXOut Index vcXOutVpi vcXOutVci vcXConnectTable 1 VcXConnectEntry SEQUENCE vcXInIndex INTEGER vcXInVpi INTEGER vcXInVci INTEGER vcXOut Index INTEGER vcXOutVpi INTEGER vcXOutVci INTEGER vcXType INTEGER vcXDirection INTEGER vcXInIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read
24. 1 clear 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This variable allows a network manager to clear this SVC When this SVC is cleared either by the manager using this variable or by one of the parties the entry is deleted from this table and another entry is created in the atmSvcClearTable atmSvcEntry 8 atmSvcCreationTime OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DateAndTime ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The date and time this call was placed atmSvcEntry 9 atmSvcVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VPI value used by this SVC for this interface atmSvcEntry 10 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 235 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only atmSvcVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65535 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VCI value used by this SVC for this interface atmSvcEntry 11 This table keeps track of all SVCs that have been cleared It allows to build traffic mattrix and provide more in depth statistics level on the use of the network It is optional atmSvcLogSize OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The maximum number of entries supported by this local SNMP agent When this value is exceeded the entries are wrapped atmQ2931 4 atmSvcLogLevel OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read write STAT
25. 1516 1462 4544 4490 9234 9180 18190 18136 5 2 Traffic Management The following sections provide background information about traffic management in ATM networks and how it is implemented in the 8285 Table 14 summarizes the characteristics of various traffic types Table 14 Types of Traffic CBR VBR UBR ABR Connection Mode Connection oriented Connection oriented Connection oriented Connection oriented ATM Adaptation AAL 2 AAL 3 4 5 AAL 5 Layer Quality of Service Yes No Yes Reserved Yes No No Bandwidth Traffic Types Voice Video Compressed Data Data Voice Video Chapter 5 8285 ATM Network Specifications 89 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 5 2 1 Service Classes Supported by the IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup The following quality of service QoS classes are supported by the 8285 control point Constant bit rate CBR Variable bit rate real time VBR rt This class is supported as CBR Variable bit rate non real time VBR nrt This class is supported as CBR Unspecified bit rate UBR Available bit rate ABR Table 15 provide information about the traffic management functions supported by the 8285 Table 15 Traffic Management Functions Support Traffic Management Functions Supported Connection admission control CAC Yes Usage parameter control UPC No Generic cell rate algorithm GRCA No Explicit forward congestion indicatio
26. 99010999999999990900 Ethernet LEC 00 39999999999999000099 99010999999999990900 Token Ring LEC 01 39999999999999000099 99010999999999990901 ist LES BUS 02 39999999999999000099 99010999999999990902 2nd LES BUS 03 39999999999999000099 99010999999999990903 As a result the LES and BUS on an ELAN use the same ATM address and the CIP interface address may be in conflict with one of the LANE components addresses These ATM address duplications are supported by the IBM 8285 and also by the The ATM Forum standard Note As to the ATM address sharing of LANE servers The ATM Forum standard is defined as follows An LES may share an ATM address with an ATM address with a BUS on the same ELAN An operational LES must not share an ATM address with any LANE components other than a BUS even if two LANE components are co located and share the use of a UNI In particular two LES for different ELANs must not share an ATM address LES BUS Parameters The integrated LES BUS supports Forum Compliant LAN Emulation LES BUS functions with or without an external LECS It supports all higher layer protocols of Forum Compliant LAN Emulation such as TCP IP IEEE 802 2 protocols and NetWare To configure the LES BUS use the SET LAN_EMUL SERVER command with the following parameters Server ID Specify the designated LES BUS identifier to issue the command The valid options are 1 or 2 START STOP Start or stop the
27. AHN 01 13th byte 124 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 32 Page 2 of 2 Necessary Parameters for 8285 1 Comments 6 byte MAC address Parameter Value ATM ESI 999999999901 ATM Selector 00 Has significance only to local workstation Should be set to 00 ARP Server 08005A99029F 6 byte MAC address ESI ARP Server 00 Must explicitly match the ARP Selector server s value The commands we will need are e SET DEVICE IP_ADDRESS e SET DEVICE DEFAULT_GATEWAY e SET DEVICE ARP_SERVER e SAVE ALL e SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS e SET PORT The reason why SAVE ALL precedes SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS is that the latter forces a reset of the ATM subsystem You will be warned first but if you forget to save the parameters you have just entered they will be lost only the ATM address will change Below is an annotated transcript of the commands used to configure and test our simple network Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 125 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8285 gt set device ip_address atm 9 100 86 150 FF FF FF CO fq IP address and mask set 8285 gt set device default_gateway 9 100 86 130 H Default gateway set 8285 gt set device arp_server Enter ATM address 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 01 08 00 5A 99 02 9F 00 8285 gt save all H 8285 gt set device ATM address fy Enter ATM address
28. ESI USEL C AFI 164 0 RD AREA ESI USEL IBM 8260 ATM MIB ATM sub system ATM switch ATM modules node OBJECT IDENTIFIER atmSw 1 Agent Identification agents OBJECT IDENTIFIER atmSw 2 jbm8260 OBJECT IDENTIFIER agents 1 jbm8285 OBJECT IDENTIFIER agents 2 Administrative Objects admin OBJECT IDENTIFIER atmSw 3 testType OBJECT IDENTIFIER admin 1 internalLoopback OBJECT IDENTIFIER testType 1 externalLoopback OBJECT IDENTIFIER testType 2 Node Objects base OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 1 dateTime OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DateAndTime ACCESS read write Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 197 198 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The local date and time in the ATM agent base 1 lastChange OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DateAndTime ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION The date and time of the last major change detected date and time reset agent IP address es subnet mask s default gateway changed LAN Emulation or IP ARP server address es changed system parameters name contact location changed module Changed module added removed administrative State changed isolate attached interface changed administrative State changed enabled disabled operationa
29. SYNTAX OCTET STRING SIZE 6 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The unique identifier for this agent Often this is the value of ifPhysAddress for the first interface agentsEntry 2 agentsIpAddress OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX IpAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION An IP Address that can be used to communicate to this agent Note this object s value may change as the agent switches to different sub networks agentsEntry 3 agentsMasterStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER master 1 non master 2 slave electing 3 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The mastership status of this agent agentsEntry 4 agentsMasterPriority OBJECT TYPE Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 257 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only SYNTAX INTEGER one 1 lowest two 2 three 3 four 4 five 5 six 6 seven 7 eight 8 nine 9 ten 10 highest never 11 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The mastership priority of this agent Ten is the highest and one is the lowest Never means will not be able become master MasterPriority is only used when an election occurs Mastership is not pre emptive agentsEntry 5 ocAgentsSubSlot OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The subslot index for this agent For agents not located in the IBM 8260 system
30. VARIABLES moduleSlotIndex DESCRIPTION An ATM module is no longer detected in the hub 8 lesMaxClientsReached TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node VARIABLES lesIndex DESCRIPTION The maximum number of lan emulation clients has been connected to the given lan emulation server 9 lesMaxClientsThresholdDown TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node VARIABLES lesIndex DESCRIPTION The number of operational clients of the given emulated lan is now equal to lesMaxNumberOfClients 10 This trap is sent only if the trap lesMaxClientsReached has been sent previously lesIndex is the index of the lesConfTable defined above 10 Expansion Description expansion OBJECT IDENTIFIER atmSw 4 expansionHardwareVersion OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Part Number P N and Engineering Change EC level and Plant Location for this module expansion 1 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 255 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chassis management chassis OBJECT IDENTIFIER atmSw 5 Hub Chassis Groups chassisAgents OBJECT IDENTIFIER chassis 1 conc OBJECT IDENTIFIER chassis 2 env OBJECT IDENTIFIER chassis 3 modules OBJECT IDENTIFIER chassis 4 ocPower OBJECT IDENTIFIER chassis 8 ocInventory OBJECT IDENTIFIER chassis 9 ocPowerControl OBJECT IDENTIFIER ocPower 1 ocIn
31. e RS 232 connectors for connecting an ASCII console consisting of An RS 232 straight cable A null modem interposer A gender changer 25 pin D shell Female Female e A power cord suitable for the country e The following publications 91 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and Users Guide SA33 0381 IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Safety and Service Catalog SA33 0398 IBM 8285 8260 ATM Command Reference Guide SA33 0385 6 1 1 2 Expansion Unit The expansion unit shipping group contains e An IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis with mounting brackets attached e A cable management bracket e A power cord suitable for the country e An expansion interface cable e An expansion connector wrap plug 6 1 1 3 Optional Items Optional items include the following e A 155 Mbps ATM I O Card MMF e A 155 Mbps ATM I O Card SMF e IBM 8260 8285 ATM Module s e Lobe Adapter Cables IBM ATM RJ 45 STP Adapter Cable part number 42H0544 RJ 45 UTP Converter Cable part number 10H3904 Note ordered separately All data cables including converter cables and crossover cables must be 6 1 2 Physical Specifications The following sections describe the physical specifications of the IBM 8285 92 6 1 2 1 Environmental Specifications The 8285 switch does not require any special cooling However care should be taken
32. operational aspects of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch e Chapter 2 Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch This chapter provides an overview of the major features of the IBM 8285 Base Unit and the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis This information will familiarize the reader with the overall layout and design of the 8285 switch e Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 This chapter provides a detailed view of the functions of the 8285 switch and how it performs them Included are details about the internal architecture switching mechanisms including an in depth technical description of the switching process control point codes and the capabilities of the integrated Forum Compliant LAN Emulation server e Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules This chapter provides an overview of the many modules that can be installed with the 8285 switch These modules provide performance and flexibility and enable the 8285 switch to be used in a wide variety of network configurations e Chapter 5 8285 ATM Network Specifications This chapter provides an overview of the ATM capabilities specific to the 8285 switch The overview includes discussions of which ATM features are supported what the maximum system capabilities are and how these capabilities might be implemented e Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing Copyright IBM Corp 1996 xi This soft copy for use by IBM employees on
33. point to point and point to multipoint VP cross connects In other words it gives information on the VP swapping table With this group VP cross connects can be established and removed The Virtual Channel VC Cross Connect Group This group performs the same functions as in the VP cross connect group but for the VCs The AAL5 Virtual Channel Connection Performance Statistics Group This group contains the AAL5 performance statistics of a VCC e OSPF MIB Since the TRS function uses OSPF with very few modifications to the original code the IBM 8285 ATM network supports the OSPF MIB RFC 1253 unchanged ILMI MIB This MIB is defined by The ATM Forum in the UNI specification Following is a brief description of the groups defined in these MIBs Physical Port Group This group gives information on a particular port such as the status transmission types and cable type ATM Layer Group This group has the maximum number of supported VPs and VCs on the UNI the number of VPs and VCs configured on the UNI and the number of active VP and VC bits on the interface ATM Statistics Group Here you will find the number of cells received dropped and transmitted on the UNI Virtual Path Group This group gives information on the VPs on the UNI This includes status traffic shaping policing and QoS parameters Virtual Channel Group This group performs the same functions as the virtual path group bu
34. 1 Introduction to ATM Networks 5 6 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only To avoid having to configure the LES s address at each endstation LANE provides for a Lan Emulation Configuration Server LECS which LECs can query for their proper LES address This enables backup LESs to be configured since should the primary LES fail the LECS merely has to direct connections to a backup LES without having to change any configuration in the workstation Although the 8285 ATM Control Point does not contain an LECS either or both of the internal LECs can be configured to use an external LECS such as that provided by the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server This section was intended only as an overview of LANE For a more detailed description of these functions please see BM 8260 As a Campus ATM Switch G24 5003 and ATM Campus Introduction Planning and Troubleshooting Overview GA27 4089 1 1 4 3 Classical IP CIP ATM LAN Segment TCP IP ATM Station TCP IP ATM Network ATM Station Direct VCC ETETA i ARP VCC pl f l i a0 i a ne ii ie Lf A IP ATM Time f RFC1S77 O prety gs ea RFC 1577 AALS ZS ESES AAL5 ATM y eS ATM PHY J PHY ts ig i ae eee po we SHAB SHAB08 Figure 4 ATM Classical IP using ARP Server Classical IP RFC 1577 is
35. 1 01 UNI enabled UP OKAY J Signalling Version with ILMI Flow Control Off VPI VCI range 3 1023 2 10 bits Connector gt RJ45 Media copper twisted pair Remote device is active H IX status IX oK A Port speed 25600 Kbps 8285 gt Figure 45 The Sample Console Screen to Check the Physical Connection Notes This SHOW PORT command was issued when the physical cabling has been done but the remote device is power off 2 You can get the status shown in several lines but the main status is shown in the first line The UP NO ACTIVITY means the status physical cabling is done but no physical layer activity is detected This SHOW PORT command was issued when the physical connection was up and the remote device is been ready 4 The UP OKAY means the remote device is attached to the ATM network This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The typical reasons an ATM device might be unable to make a physical connection are as follows e Cabling If a fiber cable is used check to see if the each end of the cable is connected to the appropriate connector transmit or receive And if a copper cable is used check to see that the pinouts of the cable and each end of the cable are matched especially when you use a non Forum compliant adapter or the connection is between ATM switches ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only If the pinouts are mismatched t
36. 1 Oct 96 Last Transfer Result OKAY 8285 gt show device Manufacture id 53 Part Number 58G9605 EC Level C38846 Serial Number LAGO50 Boot EEPROM version v 1 4 0 Flash EEPROM version v 1 0 0 Flash EEPROM backup version Y 1 0 0 Last Restart 13 30 25 Tue 1 Oct 96 Restart Count 93 Note Ef Check current boot and operational microcode levels H Check to see that the TFTP server is reachable El Download successful indicates a successful download Had the download been unsuccessful Download failure Error would have been the messages EJ OKAY indicates a successful download Had the download been unsuccessful Error would have been the message Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 117 118 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Now we repeat the process for the operational code and the FPGA code using the same SET TFTP FILE_TYPE SET TFTP FILE_NAME DOWNLOAD INBAND sequence as for the boot code Once you have successfully downloaded the FPGA code for the base unit that is module 1 and for each module you can use the SHOW MODULE VERBOSE command to check each module s FPGA levels as shown below 8285 gt show module 1 verbose P N 58G9605 S N LAGO50 EC level C38846 Manufacture 53 Operational FPGA version 2 Backup FPGA version C10 fq 8285 gt show module 2 verbose ATM Carrier Module Information P N 51H3862 EC level 28091 Manufacture VIME Operatio
37. 28 2 Ibs Weight fully loaded Mounting Clearances Front Back 100 mm 4 inches 300 mm 12 inches 6 1 2 3 Power Supply 12 8 kg 28 2 Ibs 19 4 kg 36 8 Ibs 100 mm 4 inches 300 mm 12 inches The IBM 8285 Base Unit has a universal power supply as does the 8285 Expansion Chassis The power supplies are currently identical although this can be expected to change in the future e General Power Specifications Table 18 shows the general power specifications of the IBM 8285 Base Unit and the 8285 Expansion Chassis Table 18 Power Supply Specifications of the 8285 Description Base Unit Expansion Unit Current Draw at 100V 3 6A 3 6A at 240V 1 9A 1 9A Surge Current 40A 40A Leakage Current 2 7mA 2 7mA Caloric Value Keal hr 44 44 BTU 174 59 174 59 Table 19 shows the anticipated power specifications of future models of the IBM 8285 Base Unit and the 8285 Expansion Chassis Table 19 Page 1 of 2 Power Supply Specifications of Future 8285 Models Description Base Unit Expansion Unit Current Draw at 100V 2A 3A at 240V 0 85A 1 25A Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 93 94 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 19 Page 2 of 2 Power Supply Specifications of Future 8285 Models Description Base Unit Expansion Unit Surge Current 40A 40A Leakage Current 3 5mA 3 5mA Caloric Value Keal hr 72 104 BTU 2
38. 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 3 3 4 Control Point V1 4 The Control Point V1 4 has been available since October 1996 as well as the V1 3 It contains the operational code V1 4 0 the boot code V1 4 0 and FPGA code 0B40 and 0C10 The FPGA code 0C10 is for the ATM 3 port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration module ATM 12 port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator module and for the 8285 Base Unit The FPGA code 0B40 is for the others This level is also called as the ATM Firmware Upgrade Kit MES 5099 and the FPGA upgrade is mandatory The boot and operational code V1 4 0 supports several functions with new FPGA codes in addition to the functions provided by V1 3 0 of those codes The FPGA codes for all available ATM modules are contained in the ATM Firmware Upgrade Kit The highlights of new and enhancement functions are as follows e Increase of Number of Connections For all ATM media modules currently announced the number of bidirectional connections is increased from 992 to 4 064 per ATM blade However the maximum number of connections per an IBM 8285 is 2 048 due to the limitation of its control point e Variable Range of VPI VCI Values Support The ITU T define the ATM cell format and the virtual path identifier VPI and virtual channel identifier VCI have 8 bits VPI value comprised between 0 and 256 and 16 bits VCI value comprised between 0 and 65536 However in actual campus network the full address range should
39. ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Configuration Window The ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Service Port Connection Windows Displayed by the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module COMIQUIATON messa n MS Gl are Soy GR Se Syd lero Ol as A Typical ATM WAN Module Configuration Relieving Token Ring Congestion with LAN Switching Module Relieving Ethernet Congestion with LAN Switching Module Sample PVC Configuration 0 2 00 0002 eee Sample PVP Configuration 2 020000 0 22a LAN Information Frame Location 004 Complex ATM Network Using ATM 8285 Logon Screen of the IBM 8285 Console Sample Screen to Check the Physical Installation Simple CIP Network Physical View Simple CIP Network Logical View 0 2 Multi Switch CIP Network Physical View Multi Switch CIP Network Logical View A Simple LANE Network Physical View vii viii 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only A Simple LANE Network Logical View 136 The Console Screen of a Simple LANE Network Configuration 138 The Sample Console Screen to Check the Physical Connection 140 The Sample Console Scre
40. ATM Workgroup Switch hereafter called the 8285 switch is an ATM switch for the workgroup environment that provides a low cost ATM solution as either a stand alone switch or as an access node to the rest of the enterprise Using your existing wiring it provides up to 25 Mbps of bandwidth to users The 8285 switch can connect users to any ATM network at speeds up to 155 Mbps and even has forum compliant LAN emulation built in to make implementation easier In addition the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch is expandable using the optional 8285 expansion chassis which enables it to take advantage of most of the many ATM modules available for the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub This provides you with ability to e Create even larger workgroups e Service more high speed devices such as servers e Provide more bandwidth in to your ATM backbone network e Connect existing token ring or Ethernet users directly to the ATM backbone e Connect to remote sites using public ATM services at speeds from 34 Mbps up to 155 Mbps e Distribute video information across your ATM network and make it accessible using standard TV monitors The following sections provide an overview of the 8285 switch 2 1 8285 Components The 8285 switch is comprised of the following components e Standard Base Unit 12 ATM 25 6 Mbps ports I O slot for optional uplink see below e Optional 155 Mbps ATM I O Card which can be installed in the
41. Emulation ATM Forum Compliant ATM address 131 LEC 104 131 133 functions 5 on the LAN switch ATM UFC 76 296 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only LAN Emulation ATM Forum Compliant continued LECS 104 135 functions 6 WKA 135 LES BUS 33 99 104 131 132 functions 5 with Bridge Module 57 LAN Emulation IBM with Bridge Module 57 MIB AtoMIB 145 IBM extensions 147 195 ILMI MIB 146 MIB II 145 OSPF MIB 146 Microcode considerations Sources of Microcode for the ATM Bridge Module 184 Modems connecting to an ATM Bridge Module 192 Modules 8285 backplane capacity 36 common attributes 36 currently available 35 not supported 94 power budget for 94 variable VPC VCC ranges 36 MPEG 2 audio compression 51 components supported 48 frame types 50 fundamentals 48 multiplexing 49 ports on VDM 48 versus M JPEG 49 51 video data rates 48 N Network Management ATM Bridge Module and 191 Nways Campus Manager ATM Bridge Module and 191 NNI 38 42 46 capacity 101 NTSC 48 Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX 148 149 152 8285 Call Logging 165 8285 Configuration 161 8285 Device 163 8285 Download 165 8285 Fault 162 8285 Monitor 165 8285 Network Monitoring 165 8285 Profile 160 8285 SLIP Configuration 165 Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX continued ATM change management 151 163 165 ATM connection tracking 151 163 ATM fault management 150 162 163 ATM network
42. F Special Notices This publication is intended to help customers and IBM technical professionals to implement ATM Networks using the IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup Switch The information in this publication is not intended as the specification of any programming interfaces that are provided by the IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup Switch documentations See the PUBLICATIONS section of the IBM Programming Announcement for IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup Switch for more information about what publications are considered to be product documentation References in this publication to IBM products programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM s product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent program that does not infringe any of IBM s intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product program or service Information in this book was developed in conjunction with use of the equipment specified and is limited in application to those specific hardware and software products and levels IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation 500 Columbus Avenue
43. Hubs and ATM SG24 4754 IBM 8260 As a Campus ATM Switch SG24 5003 Local Area Network Concepts and Products LAN Architecture SG24 4753 Campus ATM Network Management Guideline SG24 5006 G 2 Redbooks on CD ROMs Redbooks are also available on CD ROMs Order a subscription and receive updates 2 4 times a year at significant savings CD ROM Title Subscription Collection Kit Number Number System 390 Redbooks Collection SBOF 7201 SK2T 2177 Networking and Systems Management Redbooks Collection SBOF 7370 SK2T 6022 Transaction Processing and Data Management Redbook SBOF 7240 SK2T 8038 AS 400 Redbooks Collection SBOF 7270 SK2T 2849 RS 6000 Redbooks Collection HTML BkMgr SBOF 7230 SK2T 8040 RS 6000 Redbooks Collection PostScript SBOF 7205 SK2T 8041 Application Development Redbooks Collection SBOF 7290 SK2T 8037 Personal Systems Redbooks Collection SBOF 7250 SK2T 8042 G 3 Other Publications These publications are also relevant as further information sources Copyright IBM Corp 1996 IBM 8250 8260 8285 Planning and Site Preparation Guide GA33 0285 IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and Users Guide SA33 0381 IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch SAFETY and SERVICE Catalog SA33 0398 ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps Module Installation and User s Guide SA33 0324 Nways 8260 ATM 155 Mbps Flexible Concentration Module Installation and User s Guide SA33 0358 Nways 8260 ATM TR Ethernet LAN Bridge Module Installation and User
44. IBM 8285 Base Unit Multi mode Fiber MMF Single mode Fiber SMF Expansion Unit Installable 8285 8260 ATM Modules Copyright IBM Corp 1996 9 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Note Although there are two models of the 8285 switch the 8285 00B and the 8285 00P they are identical except that the latter includes 12 workstation adapters providing a total solution at a special bundled price 2 2 Base Unit The base unit is comprised of the following e Internal Features An ATM cell switching function A switch control function called the 8285 ATM Control Point e Front Panel Features Ports 12 ATM ports that support ATM 25 6 Mbps operation over standard copper wiring A slot for an optional high speed uplink to provide 155 Mbps access to either a server or to an ATM backbone LEDs System Status Port Status Connectors A connector to connect the optional expansion unit A connector to connect a standard ASCII console 2 2 1 Internal Features 10 The IBM 8285 Base Unit contains a planar which controls the 8285 switch and its external interfaces 2 2 1 1 ATM Cell Switching in the IBM 8285 Base Unit The ATM switching mechanism installed in the base only switches ATM cells between ports in the base unit This is accomplished by basically taking what would normally be the backplane output and connecting it directly to what would normally be the backp
45. IBM 8285 Base Unit 8285o0ld1 enc old Table 29 Page 1 of 2 Filenames for Module Upgrade Microcode Release 1 4 Feature Code Faceplate ID 5002 A02 MB155 Description 2 port ATM 155 Mbps Filename 1552pc40 enc 5003 A03 MB155 3 port ATM 155 Mbps 1553pc40 enc 5004 A04 FB100 MIC 5104 A04 FB100 SC 5008 VDM 4 port ATM 100 Mbps 4 port ATM 100 Mbps Video Distribution 100mc40 enc 100sc40 enc cmpga40 enc ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 29 Page 2 of 2 Filenames for Module Upgrade Microcode Release 1 4 Feature Code Description Filename Faceplate ID 5012 A12 TP25 RJ 12 port ATM 25 Mbps 25pga10 enc 5204 A04MB BRG ATM TR Enet Bridge cmpga40 enc 5302 A02 WAN ATW WAN cmpga40 enc 5012 A12 TP25 RJ 12 port ATM 25 Mbps 250ld1 enc old 6 4 3 Upgrading the Microcode m Warning Do not proceed without familiarizing yourself with the process detailed in the Installation Instructions for your specific upgrade The process has been designed to minimize the upgrade effort and to maximize network availability Use it The Installation Instructions are available from the same sources as the microcode The general steps required to upgrade your IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch are discussed below However be aware that the specific steps and sequence vary for different u
46. IBM employees only This code is also on the control point and is executed once the boot code has finished There are two copies of the code stored in the flash memory One of these copies is identified as current and is loaded into RAM during the initialization process This code is executed from RAM The second copy of the operational code allows new operational code to be loaded into the control point while the control point is running and then swapped which resets the ATM subsystem when it is less disruptive to network operations FPGA Code This code configures the various internal chips on the IBM 8285 base unit so that they perform their desired ATM functions There are two copies of the FPGA code stored in flash memory One of these copies is identified as current code The current code is loaded into the internal chips of the appropriate components during the initialization process The second copy of the FPGA code allows new FPGA code to be loaded while the IBM 8285 is operational and then swapped which resets the ATM subsystem when it is less disruptive to network operations The following sections describe the code levels that are currently shipped are announced or are available in the future 3 3 1 Control Point Levels Table 1 lists the levels of control point code that are currently available for the 8285 switch Table 1 Control Point Levels Summary of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Control Point Availa
47. LAN_EMUL User CONFIGURATION_SERVER SHOW LAN_EMUL SERVERS SHOW LOGICAL_LINK User SHOW MODULE User SHOW PORT User SHOW STATIC_ROUTE User SHOW TERMINAL User SHOW TFTP User SHOW TRACE Administrator SWAP ACTIVE Maintenance SWAP FPGA_PICOCODE Administrator SWAP MICROCODE Administrator UPLOAD Administrator USER BAUD Maintenance WRAP Administrator 178 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Appendix B Pinouts for Ports and Cables This appendix gives information on ports and cables PIN assignments B 1 Pinouts for ATM25 and Other Common Network Connectors Most networking standards have developed specifications for using shielded or unshielded twisted pair cabling with RJ 45 modular plugs to connect devices together Table 39 illustrates the differences between the following cabling specifications e ATM25 6 ATM Forum Standard IBM adapters for this standard have an orange dot with a white line across it to easily distinguish from the next two types e ATM25 6 Pre Standard Used by some early ATM devices This adapter has a green dot on it indicating that it uses standard token ring pinouts e Token Ring This adapter has a green dot on it indicating that it uses standard token ring pinouts e Ethernet 10Base T Table 39 RJ 45 Pin Assignments by Network Type Pi
48. Module and the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module meet the needs of bandwidth intensive applications with the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module offering more ports a lower price port and additional buffering to handle bursty traffic Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 45 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 5 ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module and the ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module The ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module and the ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module are single slot concentrator modules that are identical except for they have MIC and SC connectors respectively They have the following characteristics e Hot pluggable in any slot in the 8285 Expansion Chassis e Each module provides four taxi ports each capable of supporting 100 Mbps full duplex The traffic received from these ports will be multiplexed into the backplane connection between the A4 FB100 module and the switch on a chip e Support for workstation connections UNI up to 2 km from the 8285 e Support for a connection between two A4 FB100 ports SSI NNI up to 3 km 4 5 1 Sample Scenarios The 4 port 100 Mbps modules are high performance cards that are very cost effective for connecting high bandwidth users and servers into a workgroup or an ATM network In addition they can be used to provide redundant links to a backbone or server to provide higher bandwidth and improved reliability Figure 17 and Figure 1
49. Number of Connections Supported 82 5 1 4 How PVCs Are Supported 2 0 00 020000058 83 5 1 5 How to Configure PVCS aoaaa aaa 2 020048 83 5 1 6 How PVPs Are Supported a 85 5 1 7 How to Define PVPs 0 0 005 bee eee 85 5 1 8 How a VPI VCI Is Allocated to SVCs 0 86 5 1 9 How Point to Multipoint Connections Are Supported 87 5 1 10 8285 LAN Emulation Specifications 88 5 2 Traffic Management 2 000 eee a a 89 5 2 1 Service Classes Supported by the IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup 90 Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 91 6 1 Physical Planning 0 0 00 E ar E a a a ra 91 6 1 1 Packaging Sumina e e aa a oaa e Ra a a ae OE Pe eS 91 6 1 2 Physical Specifications aoaaa aa a 92 6 1 3 ATM Ports and Cabling aaa aaa a 95 6 1 4 Planning for Availability aa aaa 0 0 0 2 0040 97 6 2 Logical Planning narn eee eed ee ee oes Bee OE e Re ee 97 6 2 1 Capacity Planning 2 0 00 00 ee 97 6 2 2 Standards Compliances 000000002 Fe 103 6 3 Install o c s oa ace i ae te ee ae 4 Oe ae ee be a ek 105 6 3 1 Physical Installation 2 0 0 0 0000 105 6 3 2 8285 Console s i oed bel tis Sa meee bbe eae 105 6 3 3 ATM Concentration Module Basic Configuration Process Steps 109 6 4 Microcode Picocode Considerations 0 110 6 4 1 Reasons for Upgrading Mic
50. PSM The device view shown in Figure 54 allows you to display the physical graphic view PSM of the IBM 8285 and to manage the device and related parameters p OPES mu s es Figure 54 IBM 8285 Device View The view above shows three menu items The Tool entry is not used The next screens are organized with the same main bullets as used by the PSM and are presented as follows e Edit This allows you to modify update the TCP IP and SNMP general parameters used by the IBM 8285 device to communicate with the SNMP managers e Management This allows you to perform the actual IBM 8285 device management The following sub items are also presented Configuration This option allows you to perform IBM 8285 device configuration such as IP configuration microcode download module configuration and so on Performance Fault This option allows you to set up traps to be sent to SNMP managers when a fault situation occurs Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 163 164 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Accounting This option allows you to display and modify the MIB II system information parameters Security This option is not available for IBM 8285 e Options This allows you to edit a memo file or controlling the polling rate to update the IBM 8285 graphic view The IBM 8285 device graphic view has some hot spots where you can single click or double click to obtain a more detai
51. SHOW DEVICE and SHOW MODULE slot VERBOSE commands Items to pay attention to include the e Boot EEPROM version see item 2 in the example below e Flash EEPROM version just below the Boot EEPROM version e Operational FPGA version see item 5 in the example below 8285 gt show device fq 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Manufacture id 53 Part Number 58G9605 EC Level C38846 Serial Number LAGO50 Boot EEPROM version v 1 4 0q Flash EEPROM version v 1 4 0 Flash EEPROM backup version v 1 0 0 EJ Last Restart 09 33 50 Fri 4 Oct 96 Restart Count 3 8285 gt show module 1 verbose EJ P N 58G9605 S N LAGO50 EC level C38846 Manufacture 53 Operational FPGA version C10 fq Backup FPGA version 2 BAD LEVEL 8285 gt show module 2 verbose EJ ATM Carrier Module Information P N 51H3862 EC level E28091 Manufacture VIME Operational FPGA version B40 H Backup FPGA version B3F3 BAD LEVEL 8285 gt ping 9 100 86 130 J Starting ping hit CTRL C to stop Ping 9 100 86 130 1 packets sent 1 received Ping 9 100 86 130 2 packets sent 2 received Note E SHOW DEVICE to check microcode levels H Both the Boot and the Flash EEPROMs are at the correct level Ed The old flash microcode is now stored in the flash backup EEPROM E Check the FPGA levels using the SHOW MODULE VERBOSE command H The FPGA is at the correct level The old FPGA has been swapped to the Backup FPGA Since it is not
52. Server LES and Broadcast Unknown Server BUS e Number of LES 2 e Maximum number of client registrations per LES 128 e Maximum number of client registration for both LES 128 e Multicast trees used by LES and BUS e Each LES is using one control distribute VCC for the non proxy LECs and one control distribute VCC for the proxy LECs e Each BUS uses one multicast forward VCC for proxy and non proxy LECs 5 1 10 2 IP over ATM RFC 1577 e In band management for SNMP Telnet Ping supported Maximum transmission unit MTU size supported 944 bytes e IP over ATM client imbedded Maximum concurrent IP over ATM connections supported 64 5 1 10 3 LAN Emulation Client ATM Forum Compliant LAN Emulation e Number of LECs 2 Token Ring LAN 802 5 Ethernet LAN Ethernet 802 3 or Ethernet V2 DIX Both LEC can run concurrently e Maximum number of connections supported per LEC 30 e Maximum length of LANE information field MTU Is depending on the the maximum service data unit SDU size supported on the corresponding ELAN ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only LE LAN information Header field Figure 34 LAN Information Frame Location AAL 5 PDU __ n Header SDU Table 13 LANE Information Field Lengths SDU SIZE Maximum Length Maximum Length Maximum Length 802 3 LEC DIX LEC 802 5 LEC
53. The CAP CAD and SFE are internal components implemented on the IBM 8285 Base Unit as well as in each of the ATM modules Their functions are as follows e CAP CAD Components CAP Common ATM Processor The CAP handles the cell routing queuing scheduling and traffic management It determines what the routing header for the internal cell should be and gives the information to the CAD to build the cell CAD Common ATM Datamover Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 19 20 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The CAD function prepares the cell for transmission to the switch The CAD builds the internal cell in its RAM according to instructions given by the CAP As described in 3 1 IBM 8285 Architecture Overview on page 17 the IBM 8285 base unit is treated as a single module and all ports in the base unit share two sets of CAP CAD one set to handle the inbound cells called CAP_up and CAD_up and the other set to handle the outbound cells called CAP_down and CAD_down e SFE Specific Front End The SFE handles the ATM front end concentration and dispatch Its main role is to deliver the cell from any ATM interface to the CAD There are three sets of SFE components in the base unit an inbound outbound pair for the ATM25 ports called HS SFE_up HS SFE_down an inbound outbound pair for the ATM155 port called SFE_up SFE_down and a single bidirectional SFE used by the control point called t
54. This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 182 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Appendix D Hints and Tips for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module The ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module is treated somewhat different from most of the other modules since it requires its own configuration program and is not configurable through the 8285 console The following is a collection of useful information concerning the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module The Nways 8285 ATM LAN Bridge module is an integrated version for the 8285 switch of the stand alone 8281 ATM LAN bridge as _ a consequence the 8281 product number may still appear in the _ d 8 Nways 8285 ATM LAN Bridge module Operational Code Release 2 1 z Configurator Release 2 1 September 1996 ocumentation or in the configurator program menus of the Nways_ 285 ATM LAN Bridge Module ah FALDALAAAL AAAS ALL ID ALAD ALA T ALA AAD FA 1 Important Notices 1 1 a ee ee ey e gt 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Operational Software Versions 1 1 1 Where to Get Updates 1 1 2 What to do if operational code FLASH is corrupted Configuration Utility Program Installation TCP IP Slip Connection Setup 1 3 1 IBM DOS TCP IP 1 3 2 Chameleon TCP IP Configuration Utility Program and OS 2 with TCP IP V2 0 Configuration Utility Program and OS 2 with TCP IP V3 0 SNMP MIB Browser s Handli
55. Thornwood NY 10594 USA Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling i the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs including this one and ii the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged should contact IBM Corporation Dept 600A Mail Drop 1329 Somers NY 10589 USA Such information may be available subject to appropriate terms and conditions including in some cases payment of a fee The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed AS IS The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer responsibility and depends on the customer s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer s operational environment While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will be obtained elsewhere Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk Any performance data contained in this document was determined in a controlled environment and therefore the results that may be obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Co
56. V1 0 both IEEE 802 5 and Ethernet IEEE 802 3 LANE LES LAN Emulation Server BUS Broadcast and Unknown Server LEC LAN Emulation Client for node management The LES BUS function can interwork with an external LECS To get the LECS address all of the standardized mechanisms via ILMI using the LECS well known address WKA and the LECS PVC are supported Note The order an LEC attempts the mechanisms is also standardized by The ATM Forum and is as follows 1 Get LECS address via ILMI 2 Use the LECS well known address 3 Use the LECS PVC ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 6 3 Install The following sections describe information about the IBM 8285 installation e Physical Installation e 8285 Console 6 3 1 Physical Installation The physical installation procedure of the IBM 8285 is completely described in IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and Users Guide SA33 0381 The physical planning information described in 6 1 Physical Planning on page 91 can help your installation as well m Note It is not described in the above manual but please make sure that the expansion unit is installed directly above the base unit Otherwise if it is installed below the physical connection of the expansion unit cable may not be smooth and may also prevent you from connecting your local console 6 3 2 8285 Console Whe
57. a common identifier value virtual path connection A concatenation of virtual path links that extends between the point where the 288 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only virtual channel identifier values are assigned and the point where those values are translated or removed VPI Virtual Path Identifier The VPI VCI pair uniquely identify a specific ATM connection on a given link virtual path link The group of virtual channel links identified by a common value of the virtual path identifier between the point where the VPI value is assigned and the point where the VPI value is translated or removed virtual path switch A network element that connects VPLs It translates VPI not VCI values and is directed by control plane functions It relays the cells of the VP virtual path terminator A system that unbundles the VCs of a VP for independent processing of each VC Glossary 289 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 290 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only List of Abbreviations AAL ABR A CPSW AIX APPN ARE ARP ASCII ATM AUI B ISDN BOOTP Bps bps BRI BUS CAC CAD CAP CBR CCITT CE CIP CLP CPCS CRC CSMA CD DAAT DE DXI ECC ATM adaptation layer available bit rate ATM control point and switch advanced interactive executive
58. and pre determined or can be defined dynamically through a signalling protocol A pre determined path defined by the network operator is called a permanent virtual connection PVC while a dynamically determined temporary path is called a switched virtual connection SVC In either case a connection will be implemented only if there is adequate capacity in the network to meet the requisite end to end bandwidth and Quality of Service QoS parameters or if an existing connection can be preempted to make it possible to meet bandwidth and QoS requirements 1 1 3 ATM Addressing 2 1 8 2 2 e 1 ISDN Address Routng Area P AFI Telephone Number Domain Identifier ea SEL E 164 RD AREA Authority and NSAP Format identiner ITU T Format E 164 aia Authority and NSAP Format Identifier IEEE 802 LAN Format DCC a Code Administrativ F p End System Identifler AFI h DFI M Reserved Domain Identifier SEL Barred Authority RD AREA ESI Authority and NSAP Format Identifier OSI Format ICD Selector Figure 1 ATM Addressing Format Cell An ATM address consists of two parts a 13 byte network prefix and a 7 byte terminal identifier consisting of a 6 byte end station identifier ESI and a 1 byte selector field Further information on specific requirements for ATM addressing can be found in IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and User s Guide and in ISO 8348 CCITT X 213 Of specific
59. and time specification from SNMPv2 RFC 1443 Octets Contents Range 1 2 year 0 65535 3 month 1 12 4 day 1 31 5 hour 0 23 6 minutes 0 59 7 seconds 0 60 use 60 for leap second 8 deci seconds 0 9 RowStatus INTEGER active 1 notInService 2 notReady 3 createAndGo 4 createAndWait 5 destroy 6 A way of creating deleting rows in tables from RMON RFC 1271 and SNMPv2 RFC 1443 196 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only active row available for use by the managed device notInService row exists but is unavailable for use notReady row exists but some information is missing createAndGo create and use row createAndWait create row but do not use it now destroy remove row NetPrefix OCTET STRING SIZE 0 13 A network prefix part as defined in the UNI V3 0 specification AtmAddress OCTET STRING SIZE 0 20 An ATM Address as defined in the UNI V3 0 specification It consists of a network prefix part and an End User part Three types of format exist for the network prefix part a DCC Format b ICD Format c E 164 Format The End User part consists of an ESI and a SEL area 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 a AFI DCC DFI AA RSRVD RD AREA BST esses ISEL b AFI ICD DFI AA RSRVD RD AREA
60. as ATM switches ATM concentrators and ATM bridges This application is available on IBM and HP platforms Nways Campus Manager ATM provides management of IBM ATM subsystems and provides device management applications also called product specific modules PSMs for stand alone or integrated as an ATM module IBM ATM hardware devices Nways Campus Manager ATM provides device configuration and ATM network topology views that enable network administrators to quickly determine the status of the network and its components Also an ATM management function is included providing the capability to graphically display ATM connections on each user device port UNI port of ATM switches This feature allows network administrators to perform a visual connection tracking from one endpoint to another The Nways Campus Manager ATM is supported on the following platforms Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX This package implements three major components e The functionality sets from the former ATM Campus Manager for AIX ATM Network Topology Management ATM Resource Configuration ATM Fault Management ATM Change Management ATM Network Monitoring and Statistics Management e The Management Application Transporter MAT e ATM device management applications PSMs Nways Campus Manager ATM for HP UX This is the HP UX version of Nways Campus Manager ATM and is similar to it in terms of implementation and functionality Nways Manager for Windows
61. atmSvcSiVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vci value which with the Vpi value specified in atmSvcSiVpi defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmSvcEntry 3 atmSvcCallReference OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 8388607 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Q2931 call reference value used for this SVC atmSvcEntry 4 atmSvcEndPointReference OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 16383 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION 234 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only One of the Q2931 end point reference values used by this SVC In a unicast SVC there is only one entry for this SVC in the table In a multicast SVC there is one entry per party atmSvcEntry 5 atmSvcCallingNumber OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The calling number carried in the calling party number information element of the call set up message atmSvcEntry 6 atmSvcCal ledNumber OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The called number carried in the called party number information element of the call set up message atmSvcEntry 7 atmSvcClear OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER active
62. become available in 1997 The 8285 is capable of supporting the following LAN switching modules e Token Ring 2 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module 3 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module 2 slot 8272 LAN Switch Module with the following 8272 LAN Switch ATM Backplane Upgrade Hi 3 slot 8272 LAN Switch Module with the following 8272 LAN Switch ATM Backplane Upgrade e Ethernet 2 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module 3 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module 2 slot 8271 LAN Switch Module with the following 8271 LAN Switch ATM Backplane Upgrade K 3 slot 8271 LAN Switch Module with the following 8271 LAN Switch ATM Backplane Upgrade J Notes Becomes functionally identical to 2 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module 2 Becomes functionally identical to 3 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module El Becomes functionally identical to 2 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module E Becomes functionally identical to 3 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module 4 9 1 Description The LAN switch modules that could be supported by the 8285 provide existing LAN users high performance cost effective access to the ATM backbone as well as media speed LAN switching for microsegmentation Direct ATM backplane connectivity allows segments of LAN users to be interconnected to other LANs users segment via LAN switching or high speed ATM switching These modules feature the following e Common Features Support media speed transmission on all ports simultaneously even
63. by a VC or a VP connection When incrementing the VCI value the following considerations apply If the connection is a point to point connection and the currently highest allocated VCI is less than 286 the VCI value is incremented by two If the connection is a point to point connection and the currently highest allocated VCI is 286 or higher the VCI value is incremented by one If the connection is a point to multipoint connection the VCI value is incremented by one If the currently allocated VCI value for the point to point connections is 1023 the next VCI allocated will be the first free VCI value starting from 32 If the currently allocated VCI value for the point to multipoint connections is 285 the next VCI allocated will be the first free VCI value starting from 33 For PVCs as described in 5 1 5 How to Configure PVCs on page 83 you can either specify the VPI VCI values allocated to the PVC at the two ports which are the endpoints of the PVC or you may leave it to the 8285 to select the VPI VCls which are allocated If you choose the latter the 8285 will use the algorithm described for SVCs to allocate the VPI VCI values For the intermediate links on a PVC it is always up to the 8285 to allocate the VPI VCI values using the previous algorithm For PVPs as described in 5 1 7 How to Define PVPs on page 85 you can either specify the VPI value allocated to the PVP at the two ports whic
64. com Telephone orders United States toll free 1 800 879 2755 Canada toll free 1 800 IBM 4YOU Outside North America long distance charges apply 45 4810 1320 Danish 45 4810 1020 German 45 4810 1420 Dutch 45 4810 1620 Italian 45 4810 1540 English 45 4810 1270 Norwegian 45 4810 1670 Finnish 45 4810 1120 Spanish 45 4810 1220 French 45 4810 1170 Swedish Mail Orders send orders to IBM Publications IBM Publications IBM Direct Services Publications Customer Support 144 4th Avenue S W Sortemosevej 21 P O Box 29570 Calgary Alberta T2P 3N5 DK 3450 Aller d Raleigh NC 27626 0570 Canada Denmark USA Fax send orders to United States toll free 1 800 445 9269 Canada 1 403 267 4455 Outside North America 45 48 14 2207 long distance charge 1 800 IBM 4FAX United States or 1 415 855 43 29 Outside USA ask for Index 4421 Abstracts of new redbooks Index 4422 IBM redbooks Index 4420 Redbooks for last six months Direct Services send note to softwareshop vnet ibm com On the World Wide Web Redbooks Home Page http www redbooks ibm com IBM Direct Publications Catalog http www elink ibmlink ibm com pbl pbl Internet Listserver With an Internet E mail address anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver To initiate the service send an E mail note to announce webster ibmlink ibm com with the keyword subscribe in the body of the note leave t
65. compatible with the current code it is indicated as BAD LEVEL J Test network connectivity by PINGing Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 121 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 122 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration This chapter provides information on how to configure 8285 Classical IP devices and LAN Emulation ELAN parameters are also listed in this chapter as well as configuration instructions to troubleshoot the LANE 7 1 Configuring Classical IP To allow the 8285 ATM Control Point to communicate with Classical IP CIP devices it is necessary to configure and enable CIP on it 7 1 1 Classical IP Parameters The minimal set of parameters you will need in order to configure CIP are ATM address This is the 20 byte ATM address to be assigned to the switch s CIP interface This address is comprised of five basic parts 1 ATM network prefix bytes 1 11 2 ATM cluster number ACN byte 12 3 4 End station identifier ESI bytes 14 19 5 ATM hub number AHN byte 13 ATM selector byte 20 ARP server The ATM address of the ARP server with which to register The ARP server will be used for resolving CIP IP addresses in to ATM addresses IP address The IP address assigned to the switch This must be unique Subnet mask The mask used to allocate the IP address bits Mu
66. condition W as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This is the number of times that transmission was not permitted by the peer entity due to a lack of credit atmSaalStatsEntry 10 atmSaalCreditObtained OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Error condition X as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This is the number of times that credit was obtained from the peer entity to allow transmission atmSaalStatsEntry 11 This MIB defines ATM support for Permanent Virtual Circuits atmPvc OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 10 Global PVC Parameter atmPvcHandler OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ready 1 out of memory 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The status of the PVC handler in the switch When no more memory is available the creation of new PVCs is rejected with a generic Error sense code atmPvc 1 PVC Table atmPvcTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmPvcEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table lists all PVCs defined per interface There is only one entry in this table per PVC point to point or point to multipoint PVC atmPvc 2 atmPvcEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmPvcEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of atmPvcTable Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 245 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Policing parameters a
67. configuration which denotes unidirectional distribution to all users BCM Broadcast Manager An IBM extension to LAN Emulation designed to limit the effects of broadcast frames BUS Broadcast and Unknown Server A LAN emulation Service component responsible for the delivery of multicast and unknown unicast frames C cell header ATM layer protocol control information CBR Constant Bit Rate ATM Forum Service category in relation to traffic Management on ATM networks Includes anything where a continuous stream of bits at a predefined constant rate is transported through the network cell loss priority A control descriptor in each ATM cell header which indicates the relative importance of the cell If set to zero it should not be discarded if set to one it may be discarded CIP Classical IP An IETF standard for ATM attached devices to communicate using IP CIPC Classical IP Client A classical IP component that represents users of the classical IP Subnet CAC connection admission control The set of actions taken by the network at the call setup phase or during call re negotiation phase in order to establish whether a virtual channel virtual path connection can be accepted or rejected or a request for re allocation can be accommodated Routing is part of connection admission control actions congestion control The set of actions taken to relieve congestion by limiting its spread and duration connect
68. copy for use by IBM employees only Figure 49 ATM Campus Submap 8 3 3 4 ATM Cluster Submap The ATM Cluster submap shown in Figure 50 on page 159 displays the node level view and contains the icons representing the IBM ATM switches and the ATM physical links between them 158 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Figure 50 ATM Campus Submap From this submap you can manage or unmanage ATM switches Also from the pull down list of CMA shown above you can choose the following for each node Open ATM View Profile Configuration Fault Device Monitor SLIP Configuration Download Call Logging LAN Emulation These options are explained in 8 3 4 IBM 8285 Node Related Information 8 3 4 IBM 8285 Node Related Information The following sections describe the options for IBM 8285 node related information Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 159 160 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8 3 4 1 8285 ATM View The ATM View shown in Figure 51 allows you to display the interface level view and contain icons representing the physical ATM ports of the IBM 8285 and the ATM node internal interface The interface number shown for each port is slot 1 byte decimal port 2 byte decimal For example the interface number for slot 3 port 1 is 301 This view replaces the ATM Node submap provided by the ATMC Figure 51 IBM 8285 ATM Node View Star
69. designated LES BUS When the command is to stop the server the following parameters are not needed ELAN Type Specify the ELAN type of the designated LES BUS The valid options are ETH Ethernet LANE or TR token ring LANE When the ELAN type of the LES BUS is Ethernet it always supports both Ethernet types 802 3 and DIX Ethernet V2 you cannot make it support only either type Maximum Number of the Clients ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Specify the maximum number of LECs supported by the designated LES BUS The maximum number is 128 and is the sum of both LES BUSes when two LES BUSes are configured Maximum SDU Size Specify the maximum AAL 5 service data unit SDU size supported by the designated LES BUS The SDU is the information part of AAL 5 protocol data unit PDU The possible values are 1516 4544 9234 and 18190 default 1516 regardless the ELAN type Note On a real Ethernet network the maximum data frame length is 1492 or 1500 bytes However up to 18190 byte frames are supported on an ELAN as stated above You may know the inconsistency with the length field in an IEEE 802 3 frame which should be less than 1536 X 0600 But the inconsistency is resolved on the the IEEE 802 3 LANE by placing the value 0 in the length field when the IEEE 802 3 LANE frame is longer than 1536 On the other hand you must specify 1516 fo
70. downloading the code from a TFTP server either in band or via a SLIP connection These code updates can be obtained from several sources e Via the IBM Networking Home Page e From the PC Company s BBS servers e Via traditional software support by calling 1 800 237 5511 and ordering P N 51H4869 EC E28199 Make sure you have your customer number handy e Via the TOOLS disk Internal Use Only 6 4 2 1 Downloading from the World Wide Web To download the microcode from the World Wide Web WWW you need the following e TCP IP installed and operational on your computer e A Web browser to present HTML documents to you Popular Web browsers include Netscape Navigator Windows IBM Web Explorer OS 2 Microsoft Internet Explorer Windows A connection to the WWW via your corporate network or an access provider To get the microcode first load the URL http www raleigh iom com 82a 82afix html in to your Web browser and press Enter Your Web browser will download the 8285 Microcode Upgrades page for you You will then be able to e Register to receive e mail notification of 8285 microcode upgrades e Download the 8285 Base Unit Expansion Unit Installation and Users Guide in 3M Adobe Acrobat pdf format e Download the README file for the upgrade package e Download the 8285 Upgrade Package in ZIP format e Download the appropriate Unzip EXECS for your operating system e Download the latest code for the 8
71. following is an example of the output display for a PVP 8285A gt set pvc 2 7 100 1 9 2 path 14 15 best_effort PVC set and started 8285A gt show pvc all Local endpoint Remote endpoint Port id type Vpi Vci Port Vpi Vci HNb role Q0S Status E See ee eel es reese Oe ie 2 07 100 PTP PVP 14 8285A gt 5 1 8 How a VPI VCI Is Allocated to SVCs 86 For virtual connections both SVCs and PVCs the VPI VCI allocation is performed on a per port basis For an SVC it s always the 8285 s role to allocate any VPI VCI used by the SVC at each segment of the connection The procedure for allocating a VPI VCI for the SVCs is based on the following considerations ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e The VPI value is always 0 on the UNI and SSI links On the NNI links the VPI value is as defined in the SET LOGICAL_LINK command for that NNI link e The VCI values 0 through 31 are always reserved for ITU and ATM Forum e The 127 odd numbered VCls between 32 and 286 that is VCI 33 35 37 etc through 285 are reserved for point to multipoint connections e The even numbered VCls between 32 and 286 32 34 36 etc through 286 and all the VCls from 287 up to and including 1023 can be used by the SVCs e The VPI VCI allocation algorithm is to increment the highest previously allocated VCI value and verify that this value is not in use
72. for the IBM 8285 are as follows Parameter IBM 8285 Default Value Baud rate 9 600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 3 Access the IBM 8285 When the previous procedure is completed try to access the IBM 8285 The initial screen which requires your password input will appear after you press the Enter key You may then enter 8285 which is the initial administrator password or just press Enter which is the initial user password Note The password will not be visible If you have changed the administrator password but forgotten it refer to the procedure to reset the password to the factory default setting described in A 1 4 Resetting the Password to Factory Default on page 174 m Note The passwords are case sensitive although the commands are not ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch C Copyright IBM Corp 1996 All rights reserved Password Welcome to system administrator service on 8285 8285 gt After entering the proper administrator password you will be logged in and the 8285 will respond with a welcome message identifying what kind of access privileges system administrator or user you have Figure 36 on page 107 shows the screen containing the initial prompt and the welcome message Figure 36 Logon Screen of the IBM 8285 Console SLIP Mode The setup procedure of SL
73. has VPI VCI out target port TP RB NRB and Multicast indication There is also part of the LCB in a shadow zone in CAD_Store for performance reasons LCBAdown TP NRB RB and Multicast indications from the LCB are given to CAD_Down CAD_Down queues the cell in the corresponding target port queue one RB and one NRB per port with the indication received from CAP_Down and prepares it for transfer to SFE_Down a Cc d 7 Prepare and send a new ATM cell When SFE_Down asks for the next cell of a port CAD_Down moves the contents of LCBshadow which has VPI VCI out and the type of swapping SWAP_TYPE to be performed plus the 52 byte cell to SFE_Down SFE_Down modifies the header based on SWAP_TYPE SWAP_TYPE indicates if only the VP needs to be swapped if both the VP and VC need to be swapped or neither need to be swapped The PTI field is always retrieved from the incoming header SFE generates HEC SFE presents the cell to the specific interface Point to Multipoint Routing In a point to multipoint multicast connection the process is very similar Steps remain the same right up until the cell is ready to be switched The TB field actually indicates that this cell is part of a multicast connection by having the first bit of TB set to 1 The other 7 bits form the multicast ID MID bits indicate the target blade 1 In a point to point connection the first bit is set to 0 and the other 7 Switch th
74. indication There is also a shadow of the LCB chain in CAD_Store for performance reasons b The same steps as in the unicast case apply But when the cell has been sent to SFE_Down the CAD_Down will re enqueue this cell in the general queue so that CAP will reprocess this cell with the next LCB in the chain This is done till CAP_Down finds the LAST_MC indication in the LCB 4 Prepare and send a new ATM cell These scenarios assume that the appropriate tables have been assembled already by the 8285 ATM Control Point and stored in the appropriate CAP CAD This would be done for instance during the call establishment process To communicate such information to internal devices such as CAD CAP an SFE the 8285 ATM Control Point uses a special port number F which is unique within the switch and special internal cells called guided cells which can be discriminated from the other internal cells called swapped cells by its format field 3 3 Control Point Codes 28 There are three types of control point microcode e Boot Code This resides in flash memory on the control point and is the first thing that executes after a power on or reset It contains initialization diagnostics and support for download out of band commands This code executes straight from flash memory and is normally used to load the operational code e Operational Code ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by
75. limitation can be overcome using an ATM router such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server 60 aAt Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Token Ring Token Ring _ Workstation Server s Token oken oken oken Token Token Token Token Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring 4 w Sa W w C pa aje fle ATM 155 Mbps 5 O Backbone OO 6 i l Up to 12 Up to 12 ATM ATM 25 6 Mbps ATM 25 6 Mbps 155 Mbps Workstations Workstations Server Figure 25 Campus LAN Interconnect and ATM Server Access 4 7 3 ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module and LAN Emulation The ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module provides connectivity between traditional LANs token ring or Ethernet and ATM networks by sending LAN frames transparently over the ATM network using LAN emulation to resolve MAC to ATM addresses The IBM LAN emulation service allows the ATM network to emulate the services of either a token ring or an Ethernet LAN The LAN emulation service is provided jointly by a LAN emulation server LE server and the LAN emulation client LE client software running in the device attach
76. links But parallel SSI links increase the total bandwidth available between switches There is no limit for the number of the parallel SSI links but excessive links provide little additional benefit Multiple SSI links which provide alternate paths are supported There is no limit to the number of multiple SSI links allowed as long as the network is designed within the restrictions of the maximum number of ATM switches and ATM switch hops in a cluster Table 25 shows the summary of the TRS capacity of the IBM 8285 and IBM 8260 Table 25 TRS Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch and IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub Description Value Maximum number of the ATM switches per a cluster 25 Maximum number of the ATM switch hops in a cluster 6 2 1 5 NNI Connection The IBM 8285 implements static routing mechanism between ATM switches as well It is called NNI and is fully compliant with the IISP specification of The ATM Forum The NNI connection may be established on a physical link direct connection or over a permanent VP PVP connection via the ATM WAN module As of today IISP is the only protocol that can be used to interconnect an IBM campus ATM switch to another vendor s switch On the NNI connection the following capacity limitations should be considered Maximum number of static route definitions Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 101 This soft copy for use by IBM employees
77. longer logged traces 1 trsTrace OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER on 1 off 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION When on the Topology and Routing Selection trace is started Messages are stored in the hub in a file that can be retrieved through TFTP When off the control point trace facility is stopped and messages are no longer logged traces 2 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 225 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Dumps dumps OBJECT IDENTIFIER service 2 dumps 1 intentionnally left unused trsDump OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ready 1 start 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION When start is selected a dump of the Topology and Route Services component is taken The dump is stored in the hub in a file that can be retrieved through TFTP dumps 2 Microcode swap swap OBJECT IDENTIFIER service 3 swapControl OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ready 1 swap 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION When swap is selected the backup microcode image is checked and if valid activated The previously active microcode image becomes the backup image The atm subsystem is reset swap 1 swapResult OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER not initialized 1 swap successful 2 swap in progress 3 checksum error 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The result of the latest
78. microcode swap When an operational code image is downloaded or when the system is reset swapControl becomes not initialized swap 2 swapBackupVersion OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION 226 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The version and release number for the backup firmware microcode saved in flash memory swap 3 configuration save revert configuration OBJECT IDENTIFIER service 4 configurationControl OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ready 1 save 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION When set to save 2 the current configuration of the atm subsystem is saved in non volatile memory This configuration will be restored at the next reset of the atm sub system It may be useful before an upload of the configuration file is performed to save the current configuration cf tftp group When a reset is performed the last configuration saved in non volatile memory is restored and not necessarily the current config at the time of the reset configuration 1 This MIB defines ATM signalling support i e Q2931 and SAAL support for SVCs atmSvc OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 9 This group defines support for the Q2931 protocol atmQ2931 OBJECT IDENTIFIER atmSvc 1 This table defines the Q2931 configuration and status at
79. not operational 3 standby 4 maintenance 5 testing 6 switch error 7 incompatible level 8 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The operational state of this module When unknown the module cannot be accessed by the Control Point When operational the module is operational When not operational the module is not operational When standby the module is a redundant switch module ready to be used When maintenance the module is a redundant switch module currently in maintenance mode When testing the module is a redundant switch module currently running diagnostics When switch error the module is a redundant switch module not operational not ready to be used because an error 204 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only has been detected When incompatible level the module is a redundant switch module operational but its microcode level is not compatible with the microcode level of the active control point switch module and the active configuration is not copied in the redundant module If a switch over is performed the current configuration is not restored To guarantee a good restoration the back level switch must be upgraded moduleEntry 8 moduleErrors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of errors detected by this module on the traffic from the switch to thi
80. not the case the MAX FRAME SIZE parameter in the 0S 2 device driver PROTOCOL INI file must be increased from 4096 to 4200 bytes MAX FRAME SIZE value of 4096 is not compatible with NETBIOS and can create a problem if this protocol is used between the LAN clients and the ATM server 2 2 Network Management The 8285 ATM LAN Bridge Module is now fully supported by the Network Management applications up to release 1 14 of the Operational code software the 8285 ATM LAN Bridge was handled by the Network management applications strictly in the same way as the Stand Alone 8281 ATM LAN Bridge ATMC PTF NUMBER UR45751 MUST BE INSTALLED AS A PREREQUISITE FOR THE 8285 ATM LAN BRIDGE SUPPORT BY THE NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS WITH THE BRIDGE OPERATIONAL CODE STARTING FROM LEVEL 1 15 2 3 Problems with memory dump on machines with less than 8M RAM Appendix D Hints and Tips for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 191 192 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Memory dump for error log sector aborts with a system error before it completes Memory dump should be done only at the request of product support In most cases the partially received dump file contains enough information for analysis 2 4 User filter clarification ATM bridge supports only inbound filters In Token Ring mode ATM bridge applies filters only on broadcast frames In Ethernet mode ATM bridge applies filters on every frame ATM bridge performs th
81. on to the server as root 2 Key in the command E t atm a 7 1 3 2 Correcting ARP Registration If the ARP server is not registering your 8285 CIP information but is registering other CIP devices try re initializing the 8285 CIP function by re entering the SET DEVICE ARP_SERVER command This will force the 8285 ATM Control Point to go through the CIP registration process again If you are still not able to register check the ARP server address you keyed in and be sure that all 20 bytes of the address explicitly match the ARP server s address You have now completed a simple CIP network You could add additional workstations to the switch Or you might choose to extend your network by adding another switch Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 127 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 7 1 4 Configuring a Local Multi Switch Network for CIP In this scenario we add another 8285 to our network representing perhaps a departmental work group on a different floor To accommodate the new high speed connection we add an 8285 Expansion Chassis to our base configuration Now our network diagram looks like the following ATM 25 Mbps UNI Ol m OO s ki i Oa ATM 155 Mbps SSI a ee ATM 155 ooo e a Mbps UNI IBM 8285 ATM Switch ARP Server TFTP Server
82. other traffic utilizing guaranteed bandwidth services has been serviced ARP Address Resolution Protocol IP ARP translate network addresses into hardware addresses LE ARP translates LAN destinations into ATM addresses asynchronous Any two events that are not tied together exactly in time are said to be asynchronous ATM asynchronous transfer mode A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells It is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic ATM layer The layer in the protocol model which relays cells from one connection to another ATM peer to peer connection A virtual channel connection VCC or a virtual path connection VPC ATM user to user connection An association established at the ATM layer to support communication between two or more ATM service users that is between two or more next higher layer entities or between two or more ATM entities The communication over an ATM layer connection may be either bidirectional or unidirectional The same virtual channel identifier VCI is used for both directions of a connection at an interface ATM layer link A section of an ATM layer connection between two active ATM layer entities ATM entities ATM link A virtual path link VPL or a virtual channel link VCL Copyright IBM Corp 1996 Broadcast A value of the service attribute communication
83. performed using the Configuration Utility Program e Create a bridge profile e Edit a bridge profile e View a bridge profile e Save a bridge profile to the hard disk Delete a bridge profile from the hard disk e Send a bridge profile to the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module e Retrieve current configuration parameters from an ATM LAN Bridge Module e Load new operational parameters from an ATM LAN Bridge Module e View vital product data VPD for an ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module e Erase the configuration for an ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e Perform a memory dump of the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module To install the Configuration Utility Program insert the diskette that contains the program in the diskette drive in your workstation start Windows and select Run from the Program Manager File menu This procedure starts the execution of the install exe file from the diskette which installs the Configuration Utility Program When the installation is complete the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module configuration group will appear as an icon on the Program Manager window see Figure 26 guration IBM 8261 IB Fieeciene Text Configuration Configuration Help File Utility Figure 26 ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Configuration Window To use the Configuration Utility Program to manage the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module the work
84. recently in ATM UNI Specification 3 1 based on ITU T Q 2931 recommendations and is performed when the endstation is activated During this process the workstation receives its 13 byte network prefix from the switch appends its own local address ESI plus selector and registers its complete ATM address with the switch Connection Setup When an endstation wishes to communicate with another endstation it must first establish a connection to it It does this by issuing a SETUP request to the ATM network If the requested address is local the switch acknowledges the request by issuing a CALL PROCEEDING response to the requesting endstation and forwarding the SETUP request to the requested endstation which acknowledges receipt with a CALL PROCEEDING response ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only If the requested endstation is not local the switch will forward the request to the correct switch based on routing information compiled and maintained by the 8285 ATM Control Point s Topology and Routing Services TRS subsystem The path will be selected based on the widest path not the shortest available between the end points This path information is appended to the setup request and is used by intermediate switches to determine the next hop through the network There can be no more than 15 hops in any given path If the requested workstation is able to accept the incomi
85. relevance to us are the following addressing restrictions ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 1 The network prefix must be unique and consistent within a given ATM network It is defined at each switch in the network and consists of an 11 byte network address and a 2 byte area identifier which is further divided in to a 1 byte ATM Cluster Number ACN and a 1 byte Hub Number HN This results in a hierarchical network topology of a An ATM network comprised of b ATM sub networks or clusters comprised of c ATM hubs In any given ATM network all switches will have an ATM address with the same first 11 bytes In any given ATM cluster all switches will have an address with the same first 12 bytes and every switch will have a unique 13 byte network prefix This hierarchical organization allows for very efficient topology calculation and distribution since updates can be localized to a given cluster or where appropriate to devices connected to an adjacent cluster or network The network prefix must begin with either 39 corresponding to IEEE 802 LAN Format 45 corresponding to ITU T E 164 Format or 47 corresponding to OSI Format Generally speaking it doesn t matter which format you choose however specific bytes have specific significance in each format and consequently care should be taken in choosing a format especially if your AT
86. ssSlotIndex INTEGER ssSubS1lotIndex INTEGER ssValues OCTET STRING ssSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The slot number of the slot to which this entry pertains staticSummaryEntry 1 ssSubSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The subslot number to which this entry pertains It is associated with a slot number Motherboards are always located in subslot one e g lt slot gt 1 However daughter cards can reside on any subslot within the range 2 8 e g lt slot gt lt 2 8 gt staticSummaryEntry 2 ssValues OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OCTET STRING ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The OIDs and values of the objects to be summarized given as an octet string in the New Summary format NEW SUMMARY DEFINITION BEGIN IMPORTS TimeTicks FROM RFC1155 SMI Message CHOICE OF Message 0 262 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Message_0 0 IMPLICIT SEQUENCE timeStamp TimeTicks containments CONTAINMENTS CONTAINMENTS SEQUENCE OF CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT SEQUENCE prefix OID Base OID blocks BLOCKS BLOCKS SEQUENCE OF BLOCK BLOCK SEQUENCE suffix SUFFIX values VALUES SUFFIX CHOICE OF SEQUENCE OF INTEGER Indicies i e slot port NU
87. system layer also removes storage and transmission dependencies from MPEG 2 Since the system layer is self clocking MPEG 2 does not require synchronized transmission lines Error checking fields add robustness to the transmission layer In comparison there is no standardized system layer for M JPEG Therefore it must record and transmit video and audio separately The lack of a standard prevents M JPEG encoded material from being freely exchanged It cannot be recorded for future playback due to the absence of built in timing information M JPEG requires a synchronous transmission line that is a more expensive communications network Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 49 50 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 6 1 3 Motion Interpretation and Improved Compression MPEG 2 interprets motion between successive images and takes advantage of motion to improve compression while sustaining the same level of perceived image quality The MPEG 2 motion interpretation uses a combination of two kinds of frames to do this e An anchor frame Intra Frame l Frame Only exploits spatial redundancy to compress information within the frame Contains all information to reconstruct the image does not depend on another frame A difference frame which can be either Predictive Frame P Frame Exploits temporal and spatial redundancy to compress video frame Must reference a previous anchor frame to reconstruct the ima
88. this object will always return 1 for this object value agentsEntry 6 The conc Group This group is mandatory for all devices that are acting as a concentrator master The conc group contains information and control relative to the concentrator concType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER hub 8260 017 A 6 17 slot with ring backplane hub 8260 010 A 10 10 slot with ring backplane ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This object identifies the type of concentrator represented by this agent conc 1 concReset OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER noReset 1 reset 2 258 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Writing a reset 2 will reset every module in the stack without changing the current configuration and will zero all counters conc 2 concNumS lots OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of slots in this concentrator This value is the sum total of all payload slots plus any slots reserved for controller modules For example for an IBM 8260 agent operating in a 17 slot IBM 8260 hub this object will have the value 19 17 payload slots plus 2 controller slots conc 3 concProfile OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OCTET STRING SIZE 1 3 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCR
89. to connect ATM devices Note that many LECs should be started after the LES BUS has been up because they have retry counts which limit how many times they may issue the LANE registration request 7 2 4 Troubleshooting Your LANE Network There are relatively few entries in a LANE network that could cause you problems The following sections describe the typical items that should be considered e Check the Physical ATM Connection e Check the LANE Registration e Other Considerations For more information about troubleshooting your LANE network refer to the troubleshooting chapter of IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and Users Guide 7 2 4 1 Check the Physical ATM Connection When you connect an ATM device to the IBM 8285 you have to connect the physical cabling to the device and configure its ATM parameters Then the device should be connected to the ATM network and you can check the status from the IBM 8285 console using SHOW PORT command Figure 45 on page 140 shows a sample console screen when the commands issued Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 139 140 gt 8285 gt show port 1 1 verbose Type Mode Status 1 01 UNI enabled UP NO ACTIVITY Signalling Version with ILMI Flow Control Off VPI VCI range 3 1023 2 10 bits Connector gt RJ45 Media copper twisted pair Remote device is inactive H IX status IX KO A Port speed 25600 kbps 8285 gt 8285 gt show port 1 1 verbose Type Mode Status
90. to connect each component of IBM 8285 The buses between CAP CADs or CAP CAD and the switch chip are called as the ATM backplane In the IBM 8285 the ATM backplane is extended to the connection between the base and expansion unit When the IBM 8285 is installed with the expansion unit they are connected by a special cable called the expansion interface cable which has 68 pins On the other hand as described in some documents such as the IBM 8260 As a Campus ATM Switch all ATM modules have 120 pins for backplane connection The difference comes from the number of modules supported by the IBM 8285 and the IBM 8260 whether or not it supports the redundant switch configuration Except for the redundant switch function both of the IBM 8285 and IBM 8260 ATM backplanes are fully equivalent functionally to an ATM blade You can find the pin layout of the IBM 8285 expansion interface in the appendix of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and User s Guide For more information about the IBM 8260 ATM backplane refer to IBM 8260 As a Campus ATM Switch SG24 5003 Table 2 shows the characteristics of typical buses implemented in the IBM 8285 Table 2 ATM Buses Implemented in the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Bus Location Bus Speed CAD_Up and CAD_Down ATM backplane in the base unit 256 Mbps 32 MHz x 8 bit parallel CP SFE and 25 Mbps HS SFE_Up Down 256 Mbps FDX 25 Mbps HS SFE_Up Down or 155 Mbps SFE_Up Down a
91. try using the LECS well known address WKA as specified in the standard To use the dynamic LECS ATM address resolution you must not forget to define the specific ATM address of LECS in the IBM 8285 definition using the SET LAN_EMUL CONFIGURATION_SERVER command The LEC automatically starts when the SET DEVICE LAN _EMULATION_CLIENT command is issued and it cannot be stopped after starting If you really need to clear the LEC parameters you should clear the parameters using CLEAR CONFIGURATION command in maintenance mode e LECS IBM 8285 Addressing The IBM 8285 doesn t have the LECS but does interwork with the external LECS When you have an external LECS and resolve the specific ATM address of LECS dynamically such as using ILMI and well known Address WKA you have to define the real ATM address of it to register it on the LECS address table in the IBM 8285 To register the real ATM address of LECS use the SET LAN_EMUL CONFIGURATION_SERVER command with the following parameter ACTIVE_WKA or INACTIVE_WKA The LECS address table contains an ATM address to be substituted for the WKA You can define the specific ATM address of WKA as Active WKA In an 8285 you can define only one active WKA entry But you can also define 4 Inactive WKA entries in addition The ACTIVE_WKA or INACTIVE_WKA option is followed by the specific ATM address of it The ACTIVE_WKA option replaces current Active WKA m Note As described above the SE
92. uni 2 ssi 3 nni 4 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The type of ATM access offered on this port UNI User Network Interface SSI Switch to Switch interface NNI Network to Network interface The ATM access can be modified only when the port is disabled interfaceEntry 7 interfaceMediaType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unknown 1 monomode fiber 2 multimode fiber 3 twistedPair 4 utp 5 stp 6 coaxial cable 7 backplane 8 long range fiber 9 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The type of media supported on this port interfaceEntry 8 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 211 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only interfaceMediaSpeed OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The speed of this interface in bits per second interfaceEntry 9 interfaceMediaErrors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of physical layer errors detected on this media such as violation errors and length errors interfaceEntry 10 interfaceSubSlot OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION When equal to 0 this interface and its physical connector is directly located on the module identified by the slot number When equal to a non zero value this number identifies a feature card o
93. unshielded e 1 ATM155 Port Optional This port is further described in 2 2 3 155 Mbps ATM I O Card on page 13 2 2 2 2 LEDs The front panel has LEDs for two purposes 1 Port LEDs Port Enable e Output Activity 2 Switch Status LEDs e Power e OK e Fault 2 2 2 3 Connectors The front panel has four connectors e Power Input The power input connector matches the country specific power cord that is shipped with the base unit The power supply itself is an auto sensing universal power supply e Console Port The console port is a standard RS 232 25 pin D shell male interface for connecting either an ASCII console or a modem in order to perform the initial configuration e Expansion Connector The expansion connector is a 68 pin female connector used to attach the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis using an expansion interface cable shipped with the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis shipping group e Advanced Diagnostics Connector The advanced diagnostics connector is a 9 pin connector used only by authorized service personnel for advanced diagnostics This connector is not needed in any case to install and configure the 8285 switch 12 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 2 2 2 4 Reset Button The reset button resets both the IBM 8285 Base Unit and the optional IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis with its inserted modules For more information about the LEDs the co
94. 285 8260 modules that can be installed in the 8285 Expansion Chassis Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 111 112 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 6 4 2 2 Downloading from a PC Company Bulletin Board The PC Company maintains several bulletin boards that contain the latest microcode You can reach them at the following locations al 2 3 4 U S 919 517 0001 Toronto 905 316 4255 or 416 956 7877 Vancouver 604 664 6464 Montreal 514 938 3022 Look for the string 8285 in the directory 32 The files are the same as on the Internet 6 4 2 3 Downloading from an Internal VM Site 8285 microcode is available to IBMers from an internal site You may access this site by Entering TOOLS at the PROFS command line and on the next screen c Copyright IBM Corporation 1996 All Rights Reserved Please fill in fields as needed TOOLS will prompt you for missing values Press ENTER to send request PF3 to quit PF5 to send request and then quit Disk Conference gt TOOLS Fl ATMP disk managed by ATMDESK at LGEVMXA Request gt Ei Details Filename Type gt El EA Description gt Note BM Alter address to disk name gt ATMBIN managed by ATMPE at LGEVMA EM Change to GET EM Change to one of the following 8285P100 for operational code level 1 0 0 8285P101 for operational code level 1 0 1 8285P120 for operational code level 1 2 0
95. 31 032 051 052 IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub feature 8250 Token Ring 18 port Active Media Module IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub features 8250 Token Ring 18 port Active Media Module Ethernet Flexible Concentration Module ATM Control Point Switch Module 4 port 100 Mbps ATM Concentration Module 12 port 25 Mbps ATM Concentration Module 2 port 155 Mbps ATMFlex Concentration Module IBM 8271 Nways Ethernet LAN Switch Model 216 IBM 8272 Nways Ethernet LAN Switch Model 216 IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch features 8285 Expansion Unit 8285 Base Unit 155 Mbps SMF I O Card ATM 4 port 100 Mbps MIC or SC Fiber Module ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module Utopia 1 ATM Carrier 1 or 2 slot Modules e IBM 8285 Configuration Options PSMs for IBM 8285 also supports the following configuration options associated with above modules but will not display the module in the IBM 8285 graphic LAN Emulation Trap Support Ability to display ATM attached devices Ability to backup and restore a configuration Ability to display SVCs Ability to manage SVC log files Ability to telnet into the 8285 e RMON Coupling IBM Nways RMON for Windows V1 is offered as a separate product that seamlessly integrates with Nways Manager for Windows through the use of its RMON PSM Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 169
96. 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 01 99 99 99 99 99 01 00 This call will reset the ATM subsystem Are you sure Y N y 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch C Copyright IBM Corp 1996 All rights reserved Password Welcome to system administrator service on 8285 8285 gt set port 1 13 enable uni fj 8285 gt show port 1 13 Type Mode Status 1 13 UNI enabled UP OKAY 8285 gt ping 9 100 86 130 Starting ping hit CTRL C to stop Ping 9 100 86 130 1 packets sent 1 received Ping 9 100 86 130 2 packets sent 2 received Ping 9 100 86 130 3 packets sent 3 received Notes Set the 8285 ATM Control Point CIP IP address and subnet mask 2 Set the 8285 ATM Control Point CIP IP default gateway Set the 8285 ATM Control Point ARP Server ATM address This is the address which ARP requests will be sent to to determine the ATM address of other CIP devices g Save the configuration changes before entering the 8285 switch s ATM address 5 Set the 8285 switch s ATM address This forces a reset of the 8285 switch g Enable the port port 13 that the ARP server is connected to Test connectivity by pinging the ARP server 7 1 3 Troubleshooting Your CIP Network 126 There are relatively few entities in a CIP network that could cause you problems However should you be unable to reach other CIP devices the following items should be considered e Check the ARP server to see that you have registered with it The p
97. 4673 51H4852 card MMF 1 port STM1 I O 51H4557 51H4573 card SMF 1 port STM1 I O 51H4674 51H4853 card MMF network for all 8285 attached devices whether native ATM or connected via the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module Figure 29 on page 70 shows some ways the ATM WAN Module can be used with the 8285 Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 69 70 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Server B Public ATM Network Workstation A Server C Figure 29 A Typical ATM WAN Module Configuration The scenario depicts a possible client server environment in which the workstation must access both servers and in which both servers must exchange information such as files and images The ATM WAN Module allows each site to access the common backbone network at the most cost effective speed from E 3 for the workstation to DS 3 T3 and even STM 1 OC 3 for the servers ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 9 LAN Switching Modules Attention The following section is included as a preview of module support that might
98. 8 on page 47 show some ways the 4 port 100 Mbps modules can be used with the 8285 Up to Up to 12 ATM25 12 ATM100 ATA Server users users amp server 155 Mbps Figure 17 ATM 100 Mbps MIC SC Fiber Module Workgroup Configuration The first example a workgroup configuration shows how you might set up a very cost effective high performance stand alone workgroup providing up to 100 Mbps bandwidth to as many as 16 power users 25 Mbps of bandwidth to as 46 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only many as 12 ATM25 desktops and give them all 155 Mbps access to an ATM server When used in conjunction with IBM s Turboways 100 Mbps ATM Adapters on the workstations performance can meet or exceed some 155 Mbps adapter switch combinations Up to Up to 12 ATM25 10 ATM100 users users amp servers ATM Campus Backbone 100 Mbps Redundant Links ATM Server a a 6 e le a 155 O Mbps Figure 18 ATM 100 Mbps MIC SC Fiber Module with Redundant ATM Backbone Links The second example above
99. 85 412 67 Power Budget for the Expansion Chassis The 8285 Expansion Chassis has a universal power supply that provides power for these three available slots for 8285 8260 modules When planning for your installation please make sure that the power requirements of your planned configuration do not exceed either the 5V power budget or the 12V power budget m Note Any 8260 ATM module except the A CPSW module will function properly in the 8285 Expansion Chassis provided that the power budget is not exceeded However any configuration containing modules that are not officially supported by the 8285 will be considered an unsupported configuration Please note that as of November 1996 the following 8260 ATM modules were not supported in the 8285 e 2 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module e 3 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module e 2 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module e 3 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module e Multiprotocol Switch Service MSS Server Module To determine if there is adequate power to support your desired configuration simply add up the required power listed in Table 20 and make sure that it is less than the available power listed in the same table Note Although listed there is no supported configuration in which the 12V power budget can be exceeded Table 20 Page 1 of 2 Power Budget of the 8285 Expansion Chassis Device Watts 5V Watts 12V Available Power Budget Present Future 120 150 15 6 24
100. 88 LES BUS 104 capacity 33 88 99 functions 33 levels 29 102 MIB browsing 189 switching capacity 97 variable VPI VCI 31 81 102 8285 Customization ATM address 131 137 LEC 137 ELAN name 133 143 Ethernet type 133 143 IP parameters 133 143 LES LECS ATM address 134 MAC address 134 maximum SDU size 143 LECS LECS ATM address 135 LES BUS 137 ELAN name 133 143 ELAN type 132 Ethernet type 132 143 maximum number of LECs 132 maximum SDU size 133 143 server ID 132 PVC 83 PVP 85 8285 Expansion Unit 13 backplane capacity 36 bandwidth capacity 99 CAP CAD capacity 97 functions 19 connectors 15 environmental specifications 92 front panel 14 latency 97 LEDs 15 mechanical specifications 93 295 8285 Expansion Unit continued physical installation 105 109 power budget 94 power supply 93 power supply future 93 shipping group 92 slots 15 switching capacity 97 switching fabric 22 functions 25 internal cell 22 33 A abbreviations 291 acronyms 291 ARP Server 6 Asynchronous Transfer Mode addressing 2 connection setup 4 connection tear down 5 connections 2 initial registration 4 ATM WAN I O cards power requirements 94 ATM WAN Module 2 Port features 67 power requirements 94 supported ATM interfaces 67 supported I O cards 67 used with VDM 56 Available Bit Rate ABR 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module 12 Port support for 38 bibliography 279 Bridge Module 4 Port TR Ethernet as a proxy LEC 61
101. 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 02 Actual LES addr 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 02 BUS ATM address 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 02 j Config LECS add none Actual LECS add 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 LEC Identifier 1 Maximum Transmission Unit 1492 gt Subnet lan emulation token ring Not Started Name MAC Address 000000000000 IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet mask 00 00 00 00 ATM address 239 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 00 Config LES addr none Actual LES addr 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 BUS ATM address 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Config LECS add none Actual LECS add 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 LEC Identifier 0 Maximum Transmission Unit 0 Default Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 ARP Server ATM address 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dynamic RAM size is 8 MB Migration off Diagnostics enabled 8285 gt Figure 47 The Sample Console Screen to Check the LANE Registration Notes 142 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only This SHOW DEVICE command was issued when the server was up and the clients have requested to be registered This command can be used to check the status of each LEC on the IBM 8285 especially if they are registere
102. 99 99 99 99 99 01 02 Some parameters are missing Client state unchanged 8285 gt set device lan_emulation_client Enter lan type eth mac_address 0200CCCCCCCC Client starting 8285 gt set device lan_emulation_client eth eth_type DIX H Client starting 8285 gt set lan_emul server 1 start eth 64 Enter emulated LAN name Starting server H 8285 gt set port 1 1 enable uni 1 01 Port set 8285 gt set port 1 8 enable uni 1 08 Port set 8285 gt ping 9 100 86 192 Starting ping hit CTRL C to stop Ping 9 100 86 192 1 packets sent 1 received Ping 9 100 86 192 2 packets sent 2 received 8285 gt a Figure 44 The Console Screen of a Simple LANE Network Configuration Notes With control point V1 3 or later the 8285 switch uses this message to tell you when the ATM subsystem reset is finished 2 The LEC in the IBM 8285 doesn t start until you define the necessary parameters and this message appears But the parameters you define are reflected The LEC in the IBM 8285 starts as soon as it gets the necessary parameters You may change the Ethernet type of the LEC in the IBM 8285 because the default is 802 3 and many devices use DIX as the default ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The integrated LES BUS is started The LEC in the IBM 8285 automatically registers with it g The ports attached the LECs are enabled They are now ready
103. ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current slot power class For a slot containing an IBM 8260 module this object s value ranges from 1 to 10 where 1 is the lowest power class and 10 is the highest power class Slots assigned higher power classes will be power enabled before slots assigned lower power classes Similarly slots assigned lower power classes will be power disabled before slots assigned higher power classes Power class can be used to establish an IBM 8260 module power up and power down priority scheme Combined with slot location slot power class defines the order in which slots containing IBM 8260 modules will be power enabled and power disabled For a given power class slots are power enabled from lowest payload slot to highest payload slot and power disabled from highest payload slot to lowest payload slot Slot power class is not pre emptive changing a slot s power class will not affect the power state of other slots It will take effect during a slot power up or power down event e g the failure or recovery of a power supply ocPowerSlotEntry 2 ocPowerSlotAdminStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER enable 1 enable slot power disable 2 disable slot power ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current desired slot power state For a slot Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 269 270 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only containin
104. AN Emulation Configuration Server LECS Although the LECS function is not integrated in to the 8285 ATM Control Point support is provided for using an external LECS by using its well known address or by getting its ATM address through the ILMI protocol 2 2 2 8285 Front Panel Figure 5 shows the front panel of the IBM 8285 base unit AC Power Optional 25 6Mbps ATM Ports Input and their LEDs pien Feature a gt JOON C sf Hi 1 DOD0O0OOO OOOO COO OOCOO 00C SOOO OC SOC FONIOCOONCCOOONNCUCUOINCD lt gt H w J 3 N T n e a o E C oa o0 af J oa EA shy EA EA sh sE at Status Console 25 6Mbps ATM Ports Advanced Diagnostics LEDS Port and their LEDs Connector Reset Expansion Unit Button Connector Figure 5 Front Panel of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base Unit As found in the Figure 5 there are ports LEDs connectors and a button that the user can access from the front panel Chapter 2 Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 11 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 2 2 2 1 Ports The IBM 8285 Base Unit has the following ATM ports 12 ATM25 Ports Fully compliant with the ATM Forum Physical Interface Specification for 25 6 Mbps over Twisted Pair Cable Use standard RJ 45 connectors Support standard twisted pair cabling either shielded or
105. ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module and the ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps SG Fiber M d l aed 23 ee eon eed oe ee So ea Ge a Poss 46 4 5 1 Sample Scenarios 0 2 0002 ee 46 4 6 Video Distribution Module 2 020000 00000004 48 4 6 1 MPEG Fundamentals 0 000020 pees 48 4 6 2 Configuring the Video Distribution Module 52 4 6 3 Sample Scenarios 0 0 00000 ee 54 4 7 ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 57 4 7 2 Sample Configurations Using ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module 58 4 7 3 ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module and LAN Emulation 61 4 7 4 Association between IP and MAC Address 62 4 7 5 ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Configuration Utility Program 62 4 7 6 Running and Stored Configuration Parameters 66 4 8 ATM WAN Module 0 00000 67 4 8 1 A02 WAN ATM Physical Interface Supported 67 4 8 2 VPD Installation Considerations 0 68 4 8 3 Sample Scenario 0 0 000 0 69 4 9 LAN Switching Modules 0 0000 pee ee 71 4 9 1 Description lt e see Bie eee he Ae ee ed eee AS 71 4 9 2 Sample Scenarios 00000 M Ge U k e go ee 77 Chapter 5 8285 ATM Network Specifications 81 5 1 ATM Connections 0 00 0000 2 81 5 1 1 Supported VPI and VCI Range 81 5 1 2 Supported Virtual Connection Types 82 5 1 3 Maximum
106. ATM Forum Available Bit Rate ABR Service using Explicit Forward Congestion Control EFCI marking e Has a large 8 000 cell buffer to smooth bursts of traffic without triggering congestion control mechanisms e Supports UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 and UNI translation e Expands IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch capacity up to 48 ports with optional 8285 Expansion Chassis FC 5502 4 3 1 Sample Scenarios 38 The ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module is a high performance card that is very cost effective for connecting high bandwidth users and servers into a workgroup or an ATM network In addition it can be used to provide redundant links to a backbone or server to provide higher bandwidth and improved reliability Figure 12 on page 39 Figure 14 on page 41 and Figure 13 on page 40 show some ways the ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module can be used with the 8285 switch ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Up to Up to 12 ATM25 36 additional users in ATM25 users in ATM Server Base Unit 155 Mbps ELR Flee ee Lee eee eles elec Figure 12 ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module Workgroup The first example a workgroup configuration shows how you might set up a very cost eff
107. ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Note If the module is configured for source route switching all token ring LAN ports and emulated token ring LAN ports share the same ring number 4 9 2 Sample Scenarios The 8285 LAN switching modules complement the IBM 8285 Base Unit s cost effective ATM25 capabilities and can serve as the basis for a smooth migration from traditional shared media LANs to the high performance ATM networks of the future Here are some scenarios that could be implemented 4 9 2 1 Stand Alone Token Ring Migration In this scenario a workgroup of 80 users and 4 servers has run out of bandwidth on its local token ring network A very simple way to alleviate this constraint is to implement an 8285 switch with a 3 slot 8272 ATM LAN Switch Module right in the same wiring closet as illustrated in Figure 30 ATM25 Token Ring LAN Users Segments Servers Token Token Rings Rings Full Duplex Token Ring o ATRN D o Gand ejb Baca e ATM Server oo ee Acad Ceceoeo oO _ Figure 30 Relieving Token Ring Congestion with LAN Switching Module The first change to make is to move all four servers off of the common ring and give them dedicated bandwidth If we use ful
108. Base Unit implements a direct connection between CAD_up and CAD_down This means that inbound cells would undergo the following process 1 The SFE_up strips the HEC from valid cells and forwards the cell to the CAD_up 2 The CAD_up prepares the internal cell and forwards it directly to the CAD_down 3 The CAD_down uses the RH information to determine which ports to forward the cell to strips the internal header and forwards the 52 byte cell to the SFE_down 24 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 The SFE_down performs the appropriate label swapping calculates a new HEC and forwards the 53 byte cell across the physical interface Blade number 0 is assigned to the blade for the base unit Note The blade number is used for the internal switching and is different from physical slot number 3 2 1 3 Switching the Switch Chip When the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis with its switch on a chip is connected the connection between the base unit s CAD_up and CAD_down is disabled and all traffic flows through the switch on a chip This means that Step 2 above becomes the following e 2A The CAD_up prepares the internal cell and forwards it across the expansion interface cable to the switch on a chip e 2B The switch on a chip decides which blade s to forward the cell to and forwards it to the CAD_down of the target blade s for further handling 3 2 2 Swit
109. C This UFC provides an ATM interface that enables token ring attached users to interoperate with ATM attached devices that comply with the ATM Forum LAN Emulation specifications e Interface SC e Cabling Multimode fiber e Supports token ring IEEE 802 5 emulated LAN types 1 Port RMON UFC Support up to 1792 filter table entries per port but no more than 10 000 filter table entries per module These filter table entries can be either MAC addresses or source route descriptor entries These entries can be aged out based upon configurable parameters at the port and module level Support a bandwidth aggregation feature TokenPipe which allows different LAN switching modules to be connected by up to four full duplex connections providing up to 128 Mbps of bandwidth between 8272 switching modules Support source route bridging that is fully compatible with existing source route bridges Support source route switching in which frames are forwarded based on destination MAC addresses for locally attached stations and based on the routing information within the token ring frame for non locally attached stations as is the case with source routing bridges to a maximum of seven bridge hops Note If the module is configured for source route switching all token ring LAN ports and emulated token ring LAN ports share the same ring number Gather statistics by Port Connected station Switch Suppo
110. C3 I O card MMF 1 port STM1 I O card SMF 1 port STM1 I O card MMF 35 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 2 Some Common Elements among the 8285 Modules The following sections describe some of the common elements shared by the 8285 modules 4 2 1 Maximum Capacity All 8285 modules have a backplane capacity of 212 Mbps In order to provide guaranteed service the maximum configurable reserved bandwidth is 185 Mbps 85 of 212 Mbps The non reserved traffic will use whatever bandwidth is available including bandwidth that is reserved but not being used 4 2 2 Variable VPC VCC Value Ranges 36 With the latest release of 8285 code Release 1 4 the 8285 modules now support variable VPC VCC range values That is to say they allow you to manage your network more precisely by allocating varying numbers of bits to the VPC and VCC portions of the header on a port by port basis Note The VPC VCC range must be the same on both ends of an SSI or NNI link With one exception noted below all of the modules allocate 14 bits to the VPC VCC portion of the header which you can allocate in one of the following ways e Mode 0 14 all 14 bits assigned to VCC VPC 0 VCC range is 0 16383 e Mode 4 10 4 bits for VPC 10 bits for VCC VPC range is 0 15 VCC range is 0 1023 e Mode 6 8 6 bits for VPC 8 bits for VCC VPC range is 0 63 VCC range is 0 255 The exception to the above is the ne
111. C3 STM 1 155 520 Mbps when the bandwidth management capabilities of an external ATM WAN switch are not desired e Supports switch to switch and switch to server connections at speeds up to OC3 STM 1 e Interfaces directly to the circuit installed by your service provider e Supports both UNI and NNI e Supports reserved bandwidth RB service QOS class 1 under UNI 3 0 e Is hot pluggable in any available slot in the 8285 Expansion Chassis e Supports both internal and external clocking e Up to 3 ATM WAN Modules can be supported in the 8285 Expansion Chassis providing up to 6 ATM WAN ports e Features four standard interfaces Two backplane interfaces An ATM backplane interface which enables both data and control flows to the switch on a chip and the 8285 ATM Control Point respectively A standard tri channel interface which provides power and other control signals Two I O interfaces which enable the attachment of any combination of the following I O cards 1 port E3 I O card E3 34 368 Mbps BNC interface 1 port DS3 I O card DS 3 T3 44 736 Mbps BNC interface 1 port OC3 I O card SMF OC3 155 520 Mbps SC interface 1 port OC3 I O card MMF OC3 155 520 Mbps SC interface 1 port STM1 I O card SMF STM 1 155 520 Mbps SC interface 1 port STM1 I O card MMF STM 1 155 520 Mbps SC interface For each of these cards the receive port is the left one and the transmit port is the ri
112. CCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION For a UNI or a NNI port the current bandwidth available for the reserved bandwidth connections on this port For a SSI port the current bandwidth available on this port It is in bits per second interfaceEntry 14 interfaceAl locatedBandwidth OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION For a UNI or a NNI port the bandwidth in bits per second currently used by the reserved bandwidth connections on this port For a SSI port the bandwidth in bits per second currently reserved on this port interfaceEntry 15 interfaceMaxBandwidth OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION For a SSI port the maximum bandwidth usable on this port Out of this defined bandwidth at most 85 are usable for the reserved bandwidth connections and at least 15 are usable for the non reserved bandwidth connections The interfaceMaxBandwidth must not exceed the physical bandwidth of this port interfaceMediaSpeed The minimum valid value to set for the interfaceMaxBandwidth is 60000 bps which is the bandwidth requested to set a non reserved bandwidth connection on this ssi link The interfaceMaxBandwidth must be equal on each side of an SSI link to avoid route computation deadlocks The default value is equal to interfaceMediaSpeed For a port which is not a SSI port the maximum bandwidth cannot be changed and remain
113. CKAGE To register for information on workshops residencies and redbooks TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS ZDISK GET ITSOREGI 1996 For a list of product area specialists in the ITSO TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS ZDISK GET ORGCARD PACKAGE Redbooks Home Page on the World Wide Web http w3 itso ibm com redbooks IBM Direct Publications Catalog on the World Wide Web http www elink ibmlink ibm com pb1 pbl IBM employees may obtain LIST3820s of redbooks from this page REDBOOKS category on INEWS Online send orders to USIB6FPL at IBMMAIL or DKIBMBSH at IBMMAIL Internet Listserver With an Internet E mail address anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver To initiate the service send an E mail note to announce webster ibmlink ibm com with the keyword subscribe in the body of the note leave the subject line blank A category form and detailed instructions will be sent to you Copyright IBM Corp 1996 281 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks Customers may request ITSO deliverables redbooks BookManager BOOKs and CD ROMs and information about redbooks workshops and residencies in the following ways 282 Online Orders Do not send credit card information over the Internet send orders to IBMMAIL Internet In United States usib6fpl at ibmmail usib6fpl ibmmail com In Canada caibmbkz at ibmmail Imannix vnet ibm com Outside North America dkibmbsh at ibmmail bookshop dk ibm
114. CRIPTION Entries of the interfaceTable Each entry corresponds to a port that belongs to an ATM module This module must be inserted in a slot that is attached to the ATM switch INDEX interfaceIndex interfaceTable 1 InterfaceEntry SEQUENCE interfaceIndex INTEGER interfaceSlot INTEGER interfacePort INTEGER interfaceConnector INTEGER interfaceAdminState INTEGER interfaceOperState INTEGER interfaceAtmAccess INTEGER interfaceMediaType INTEGER interfaceMediaSpeed INTEGER interfaceMediaErrors Counter interfaceSubS1ot INTEGER interfaceClocking INTEGER interfaceScrambl ing INTEGER interfaceAvailableBandwidth INTEGER interfaceAl locatedBandwidth INTEGER interfaceMaxBandwidth INTEGER interfaceFrameFormat INTEGER Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 207 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only interfaceIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The interface number of the port represented by this entry This is the same number as the index used to represent this interface in the MIB II interface table interfaceEntry 1 interfaceSlot OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 64 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The slot number of this ATM port s module interfaceEntry 2 interfacePort OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 64 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The port number o
115. CT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION T310 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 7 3 atmQ2931T316 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION T316 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 8 atmQ2931T317 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 229 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION T317 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 9 atmQ2931T322 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION T322 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 10 atmQ2931T398 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION T398 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 11 atmQ2931T399 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION T399 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 12 atmQ2931SetupRetry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Number of set up retries as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 13 atmQ2931ReleaseRetry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Numb
116. E SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmSaalConfEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains basic information on the SAAL protocol for each signalling link defined per port Usually there is only one signalling channel per interface and thus one SAAL protocol definition entry per interface atmSaal 1 atmSaalConfEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmSaalConfEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of atmSaalConfTable Each entry corresponds to a pair of ATM interface signalling channel A signalling channel is uniquely defined on each interface by the VPI and VCI values allocated to it INDEX atmSaalConfIndex atmSaalConfSiVpi atmSaalConfSiVci atmSaalConfTable 1 AtmSaalConfEntry SEQUENCE atmSaalConfIndex INTEGER atmSaalConfSiVpi INTEGER Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 239 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only atmSaalConfSiVci INTEGER atmSaalState INTEGER atmSaalTimerPol INTEGER atmSaalTimerKeepAl ive INTEGER atmSaalTimerNoResponse INTEGER atmSaalTimerCC INTEGER atmSaalTimerIdle INTEGER atmSaalMaxCC INTEGER atmSaa 1MaxPD INTEGER atmSaalMaxStat INTEGER atmSaalConfIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifIndex value of the ATM interface which with the signalling channel defined by its Vpi Vci values uniquely identifies this entry at
117. E SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OptionalFeatureEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table provides the list of the optional ATM features installed in the ATM subsystem physical 6 optionalFeatureEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Optional FeatureEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of the optionalFeatureTable INDEX optionalFeatureS otIndex optionalFeatureSubslotIndex optionalFeatureTable 1 OptionalFeatureEntry SEQUENCE optional FeatureS1otIndex INTEGER optional FeatureSubs1otIndex INTEGER Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 215 216 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only optional FeatureHardwareVersion DisplayString optional FeatureNumber0fPorts INTEGER optionalFeatureDescription DisplayString optionalFeatureSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 64 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The slot number for this optional feature card optionalFeatureEntry 1 optional FeatureSubSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 16 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The sub slot number for this optional feature card optionalFeatureEntry 2 optional FeatureHardwareVersion OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Part Number P N and Engineering Change EC level and Plant Location for this optional feature card
118. F85HV130 for operational code level 1 3 0 F85HV140 for operational code level 1 4 0 EH Change to PACKAGE Press the Enter key resulting in the screen below The package will be sent to your reader ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Disk Conference gt ATMPE ATMBIN disk managed by ATMPE at LGEVMA Request gt GET Details Filename Type gt 8285P120 PACKAGE Description gt Requesting a copy of 8285P120 PACKAGE GET request for disk ATMBIN sent to ATMPE at LGEVMA 2314 Any CMS command gt Each package contains a self extracting EXE file for The microcode both BOOT and OPERATIONAL The FPGA picocode Installation instructions The release note The new 8285 Installation and User s Guide If you replace GET with LIST and package_name with you will get a list of available packages sent to your reader e Entering the TOOLS fast path command at the PROFS command line SENDTO LGEVMA ATMPE ATMBIN GET package name PACKAGE where package_name is set to one of the following 8285P100 for operational code level 1 0 0 8285P101 for operational code level 1 0 1 8285P120 for operational code level 1 2 0 F85HV130 for operational code level 1 3 0 F85HV140 for operational code level 1 4 0 Each package contains a self extracting EXE file for The microcode both BOOT an
119. FF FF CO Subnet mask FF FF FF CO LES BUS Parameiers LEC Parameters ELAN type Ethemet ELAN type Ethemet Ethemet type DIX 802 3 Ethemet type DIX ELAN name IBM_ETHERNET_LAN1 MAC 0200CCCCCCCC Max of clients 64 LES ATM MaxSDU size 1516 39999999999999000099 99010999999999990102 IP 9 100 86 200 Subnet mask FF FF FF CO Figure 43 A Simple LANE Network Logical View To configure a simple LANE network the following parameters are needed e 8285 ATM address 136 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e 8285 LEC parameters e 8285 Integrated LES parameters e ATM module and port parameters The parameters we use in our example are listed in Table 36 Table 36 Necessary Parameters for 8285 1 Parameter Value Comments ATM Address ATM Prefix 3999999999999900009999 First 11 bytes of address ACN 01 12th byte should not be 0 HN 09 13th byte should not be 0 ESI 999999999901 6 byte MAC address SEL 00 20th byte 8285 Integrated LES parameters Server ID 1 ELAN type Ethernet Max of 64 clients Max SDU size 1516 Default ELAN name IBM_ETHERNET_LAN1 Default 8285 LEC parameters ELAN type Ethernet Ethernet type DIX IP address 9 100 86 200 Subnet Mask FF FF FF CO Default 0 0 0 0 Not specified because not used Gateway in this configuration MAC addre
120. GER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION An identification value for this entry assigned by the local SNMP agent This value is assigned for each new SVC call or add party request This index is allocated in a decreasing order so that a get next request on the table allows to retrieve the latest calls first atmSvcLogEntry 1 atmSvcLogInterfaceIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifIndex value of the ATM interface used by this svc atmSvcLogEntry 2 atmSvcLogCallingNumber OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The calling number carried in the calling party number information element of the call set up message atmSvcLogEntry 3 atmSvcLogCalledNumber OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmAddress ACCESS read only Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 237 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The called number carried in the called party number information element of the call set up message atmSvcLogEntry 4 atmSvcLogCreationTime OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DateAndTime ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The date and time this call was placed atmSvcLogEntry 5 atmSvcLogTime OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DateAndTime ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The date and time this call was cleared atmSvcLogEntr
121. IBM Networking World Wide Web home page http www raleigh ibm com 826 826fix htm Select ATM TR Ethernet LAN Bridge module FC 5204 entry Further instructions are provided online ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 1 1 1 2 2 What to do if operational code FLASH is corrupted If code download terminates abnormally then operational code FLASH may become corrupted If this happens then bridge can not forward frames or respond to most configurator commands However bridge can still communicate with configurator to load operational code via the serial port 1 Select Load new code image via serial port from Utilities menu 2 Choose the image to load 3 Select OK The configurator will automatically determine that the FLASH is corrupted and print a message stating that fact Configuration Utility Installation Before you can use the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration Utility program you have to run the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration install setup program so it will work properly on your computer You cannot just copy the files from the Installation disk to your hard disk The files on the distribution disk are packed to save space The install program unpacks those files and builds them on your working disk 1 Make Windows Program Manager the active window 2 From Windows Program Manager select File t
122. INTEGER atmSaalStatsSiVci INTEGER atmSaalUnexpectPdus Counter atmSaalUnsuccessPdus Counter atmSaalFailedEstablishment Counter atmSaal SequenceGap Counter atmSaalGapNumbers Counter atmSaalOtherListErrors Counter atmSaalLackOfCredit Counter atmSaalCreditObtained Counter atmSaalStatsIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifIndex value of the ATM interface which with the signalling channel defined by its Vpi Vci values uniquely identifies this entry atmSaalStatsEntry 1 atmSaalStatsSiVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vpi value which with the Vci value specified in atmSaalStatsSiVci defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmSaalStatsEntry 2 atmSaalStatsSiVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vci value which with the Vpi value specified in atmSaalStatsSiVpi defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmSaalStatsEntry 3 atmSaalUnexpectPdus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 243 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION Error conditions A to M as define
123. IP mode console is as follows 1 Establish normal mode connection In order to have SLIP mode connection some parameters are needed such as an IP address Then establish normal mode connection at first based on the procedure described in the setup procedure of Normal mode Set up the console parameters You need to define local IBM 8285 and remote terminal IP address for the SLIP protocol using the SET TERMINAL SLIP_ADDRESS command And if you use a baud rate other than 9600bps change the rate using the SET TERMINAL BAUD command Change the operating mode The operating mode of the configuration console is either ASCII or SLIP mode and they are exclusive You need to change the mode from normal to SLIP since the default setting is normal mode You can change the mode using SET TERMINAL CONSOLE PORT PROTOCOL SLIP command The console automatically returns to normal mode if no activity takes place for a period of 20 minutes or if the IBM 8285 resets Access the IBM 8285 When the previous procedure completed try to access the IBM 8285 In SLIP mode you need to start a Telnet session to the IBM 8285 The logon procedure is the same as for the normal mode 6 3 2 3 Basic Console Functions This section describes the basic console functions to check if the physical installation has been done successfully Te following commands are useful to check the IBM 8285 status e SHOW DEVICE e SHOW MODULE Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Plann
124. IPTION A bit string containing always 00 00 00 conc 4 concDescr OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 128 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A textual string containing information about the hub type conc 5 The env Group This group represents the concentrator s environment It is available from agents that are acting as a concentrator master envTempStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER okay 1 extremeTemp 2 warning 3 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The overall temperature status for this concentrator This object s value is an aggregate of all the temperature probes in the concentrator such that when at least one probe reports extreme temperature this object will have the value extremeTemp 2 This object will have the value warning 3 prior to reporting the value extremeTemp 2 as a means of warning of a possible hub overheat condition Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 259 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only env 1 envPSCapacity OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The total capacity of power supplies for this concentrator env 2 envPSTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF EnvPSEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A table that contains information about each potential power supply in the concentrator en
125. IPTION The interface number for this ATM port vpXConnectEntry 1 vpXInVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 219 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION The VPI value for this connection vpXConnectEntry 2 vpXOutIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The interface number for this ATM port vpXConnectEntry 3 vpXOutVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VPI value for this connection vpXConnectEntry 4 vpXType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unicast 1 multicast 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Whether this cross connection is part of a unicast or a multicast connection vpXConnectEntry 5 vpXDirection OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER upstream 1 downstream 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Whether this entry identifies this cross connection in the upstream or downstream flow as seen from the root Downstream means that the connection was set up from the in parameters interface VPI to the out parameters interface VPI Upstream means that the connection was set up from the out parameters interface VPI to the in parameters interface VPI As a result any cross connection is modeled in this table as two entries dependin
126. LL VALUES SEQUENCE OF VALUE VALUE SEQUENCE attribute INTEGER data DATA DATA CHOICE OF INTEGER OCTET STRING TimeTicks END staticSummaryEntry 3 ssLastChangedTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SsLastChangedEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A table of timestamps each indicating the change state of the corresponding information contained in the staticSummaryTable This table contains a fixed number of entries one for each possible subslot in each possible slot in the concentrator regardless of whether the slot or subslot is occupied For example for an IBM 8260 concentrator this table has 19 x 8 entries for an Hub concentrator which has no subslots this table has either 5 or 17 entries and the subslot index of each entry is 1 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 263 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Note that the number of subslot entries in this table is determined by the type of concentrator not the type of module for an Hub module in an IBM 8260 concentrator there will still be 8 subslot entries staticSummary 2 ssLastChangedEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SsLastChangedEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION An entry for a particular slot subslot address in the concentrator indicating the value of SysUpTime at the time of the last detected change to any of the information inclu
127. M interface which with the signalling channel defined by its Vpi Vci values uniquely identifies this entry atmQ2931ConfEntry 1 atmQ2931SiVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vpi value which with the Vci value specified in atmQ2931SiVci defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface 228 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmQ2931ConfEntry 2 atmQ2931SiVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vci value which with the Vpi value specified in atmQ2931SiVpi defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmQ2931ConfEntry 3 atmQ2931T303 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION T303 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 4 8 atmQ2931T308 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION T308 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 5 8 atmQ2931T309 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION T309 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 6 3 atmQ2931T310 OBJE
128. M network will be connected to other ATM networks 1 1 4 ATM Data Flows Header 5 Bytes Payload 48 Bytes Header Format UNI att Wen oti ya C GFC vf Pi Y VOL VOI Gl PT L HEC Header Error Check Cell Loss Priority Payload Type Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual Path Identifier Generic Flow Control a iret mo oC YPL VPLI PL VOL VOL YOR VCE PTO HEC Header Format NNI Figure 2 ATM UNI NNI Format Data Cells Chapter 1 Introduction to ATM Networks 3 4 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Because ATM allows for dynamic registration of resources signalling processes have been established to provide for initial registration connection setup and connection teardown whether the connection is native ATM ATM Forum Compliant LAN Emulation or Classical IP CIP 1 1 4 1 Basic ATM Signalling ATM Endpoint ATM Endpoint Figure 3 ATM Call Establishment For an endstation to communicate in a switched environment such as ATM it must register with the network request a connection when necessary and clear the connection when through For native ATM endstations this is done by the following Initial Registration When an endstation wishes to enter the network it must first register its full ATM address with its associated switch This signalling process is described in ATM UNI Specification 3 0 based on ITU T Q 93B recommendations or more
129. Maximum number of LECs 128 H LEC Registration Capacity 27 LECs sec 100 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Notes Any two combinations of token ring IEEE 802 5 and Ethernet IEEE802 3 LAN Emulation 2 Sum of the LECs when two sets of LES BUS configured Average value based on the performance test 6 2 1 4 SSI Connection TRS Capacity The IBM 8285 implements a dynamic routing mechanism between ATM switches This mechanism called the switch to switch interface SSI protocol was developed by IBM based on the ATM Forum PNNI Phase 1 specification and is an IBM exclusive SSI provides many benefits such as reducing the workload of route definition enabling link aggregation between switches and enabling automatic route backup should the primary route fail However as with any dynamic routing protocol the need to exchange information between nodes can consume bandwidth and processing resources The IBM 8285 has the following capacity limitations for SSI connection e Maximum number of ATM switches per cluster e Maximum number of ATM switch hops in a cluster Call setup and cell transmit time are proportional to the number of hops e Parallel Multiple SSI link Parallel SSI links between two hubs are supported but the bandwidth cannot be shared This means a data path between two switches is assigned to a specific SSI link even if you have parallel SSI
130. Multimode fiber 1 Port ATM 155 Mbps Multimode Fiber UFC This UFC provides an ATM interface that enables Ethernet attached users to interoperate with ATM attached devices that comply with the ATM Forum LAN Emulation specifications e Interface SC e Cabling Multimode fiber e Supports Ethernet IEEE 802 3 emulated LAN types Support up to 1790 active Ethernet addresses per port but no more than 10 000 addresses per module These addresses can be aged upon configurable parameters at the port and module level out based Support a bandwidth aggregation feature EtherPipe which allows different LAN switching modules to be connected by up to four full duplex connections providing up to 80 Mbps of bandwidth between 8271 switching modules Gather statistics by Port Connected station Switch Support Plug and Play installation by automatically initializing as a multi port transparent bridge This allows the module to learn the network addresses and eliminates all pre installation configuration requirements In most cases however you will eventually want to customize this initial configuration with such parameters as an IP address SNMP parameters and port filters Table 8 and Table 9 provide comparisons of the token ring modules and the Ethernet modules respectively Table 8 A Comparison of 8285 Token Ring LAN Switch Modules Module Feature Maximum Number of Ports Copper Fiber ATM 155
131. ODULE command 5 All of the status indicators of the module have become Y This means the physical installation has been done successfully If any status does not become Y check the physical installation procedure ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only m Note Most of the MES processes such as installing or removing a module do not prevent the others from working However the process of adding or removing the expansion unit to or from the IBM 8285 base unit makes the ATM subsystem reset The install status may be Y even if no module installed This should be normal because the IBM 8285 does not clear the previous status If you really want to clear the status use the CLEAR CONFIGURATION command in maintenance mode 6 3 3 ATM Concentration Module Basic Configuration Process Steps The module configuration process is very straight forward It summarizes briefly what operations must be done to install ATM port concentration modules However you should familiarize yourself with the following reference materials before you begin Table 26 Page 1 of 2 References and Process Quick Guide Task References Physical 8260 8285 ATM 25 Mbps Concentration Module Installation Installation and User s Guide SA33 0383 8260 8285 ATM 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module Installation and User s Guide SA33 0358 IBM 8260 8285 A4 FB100 Module Installation
132. PE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This is the current number of outgoing calls in progress on this interface atmQ2931StatsEntry 5 atmQ29310utCallFailures OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This is the number of outgoing calls that were cleared for a reason other than a DTE or operator initiated action atmQ2931StatsEntry 6 atmQ2931InCallAttempts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This is the number of incoming call attempts on this interface including accepted as well as rejected calls atmQ2931StatsEntry 7 232 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only atmQ2931InCallInProgress OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This is the current number of incoming calls in progress on this interface atmQ2931StatsEntry 8 atmQ2931InCallFailures OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This is the number of calls that were rejected by the receiver atmQ2931StatsEntry 9 This table contains basic information about calls in progress It allows the network operater to force clear an SVC Its implementation is optional atmSvcTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmSvcEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION
133. R ocPowerOutputVoltageLevel Gauge ocPowerOutputWattageCapacity Gauge ocPowerOutputWattageConsumed Gauge 266 atu Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ocPowerOutputWattageAvai lable Gauge ocPowerOutputUnmanagedWattageAl loc Gauge ocPowerOutputType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER plusFiveVolt 1 5 Volt minusFiveVolt 2 5 Volt plusTwelveVolt 3 12 Volt minusTwelveVolt 4 12 Volt plusTwoVolt 5 2 Volt ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Identifies the power voltage line type for which this entry contains power budget information ocPowerOutputEntry 1 ocPowerOutputVoltageLevel OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION In millivolts 1 1000 Volt the actual voltage level for this voltage type as sensed on the backplane This voltage is supplied by all operational power supplies ocPowerOutputEntry 2 ocPowerOutputWattageCapacity OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION In hundredths of a Watt 1 100 Watt the maximum wattage for the voltage line that is output by all operational power supplies combined ocPowerOutputEntry 3 ocPowerOutputWattageConsumed OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION In hundredths of a Watt 1 100 Watt the wattage consumed
134. RT TYPE ESER kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk gt gt gt NOTE It is HIGHLY recommended that you use a workstation that has a Type 2 UART to ensure reliable transfer of data between the workstation and the ATM LAN Bridge Module If you are not sure what type of UART your machine has SLIP will display the UART type on bringup When SLIP ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only is started it will display a line of information in a box across the screen The UART type will be presented in this display If you can locate the UART chip it s type can be determined from the table below TYPE 1 8250 16450 TYPE 2 16550 16550A 16550AF 16550AFN Type 1 UART s only have single character buffer while the Type 2 UART s have a 16 character buffer The problem is that Windows applications have trouble fetching characters fast enough to prevent the next incoming character from overwriting the single character buffer resulting in comm overrun errors Sometimes running Windows in the standard mode will permit the configurator to work on a Type 1 UART To start Windows in the standard mode bring it up by typing C win s Also certain TSR s screen savers and some video cards can aggravate this problem This is a well documented problem and much discussion can be found by searching the world wide web for the keyword
135. S read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The maximum number of clients supported by this lan emulation server The maximum number of clients cannot be set if the associated LES is started The total number of clients on all the embedded lan emulation servers in one node must not exceed 128 lesConfEntry 2 lesLecTableLastChange OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX TimeTicks ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The value of the sysUpTime the last time a change was detected Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 253 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only in a lesLecEntry associated to the given lesIndex The lesLecEntry is defined in the lesMIB lesConfEntry 3 hello TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node VARIABLES sysObjectID ifPhysAddress DESCRIPTION A hello trap is sent when the system re initializes it is sent every minutes until an SNMP request is received or until 255 minutes have passed when one of the following parameters is changed agent IP address es agent subnet mask s ATM address of the IP ARP server IP address of the default gateway The value of ifPhysAddress is the ATM address of the hub The hello trap may be disabled 1 lock TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node VARIABLES moduleSlotIndex DESCRIPTION A lock trap is sent when a set request is rejected because it is suspected that this may cause to break the link between the agent and the manager This ma
136. SG24 4817 00 IBM ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch December 1996 International Technical Support Organization Raleigh Center This soft copy for use by IBM employees only International Technical Support Organization PERNES IBM ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch December 1996 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Take Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information in Appendix F Special Notices on page 277 First Edition December 1996 This edition applies to the ATM Workgroup Switch with microcode level 1 4 Comments may be addressed to IBM Corporation International Technical Support Organization Dept HZ8 Building 678 P O Box 12195 Research Triangle Park NC 27709 2195 When you send information to IBM you grant IBM a non exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1996 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Contents Figures cinuen 44 eine ee ke Bs a ER he we oe ee ee
137. SS read write STATUS mandatory Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 223 224 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION The name of the file to transfer tftp 4 fileType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unknown 1 bootCode 2 operationalCode 3 errorLog 4 systemTrace 5 trsTrace 6 7 intentionnally left unused trsDump 8 configuration 9 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The type of file to transfer Boot and operational codes can only be dowlnoaded Logs traces and dumps can only be uploaded tftp 5 fileTarget OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The module target to which the transfer applies When set to 0 the transfer applies to the agent itself tftp 6 transferResult OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER not initialized 1 transfer successful 2 upload in progress 3 download in progress 4 generic error 5 no response from host 6 connection lost 7 file not found 8 file empty 9 file too big 10 access rights violation 11 invalid file header 12 checksum error 13 transfer error 14 hardware error 15 file already exists 16 config unreadable version 17 config file empty 18 config impossible 19 config internal error 20 config app ied ok 21 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION ATM Workgroup Solutions Imple
138. SYNTAX INTEGER unspecified 0 class A 1 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The QOS requested for this PVC from the originator DEFVAL unspecified atmPvcEntry 9 248 atu Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only atmPvcBackwardType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OBJECT IDENTIFIER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The first parameter used to define the policy requested for this PVC atmPvcEntry 10 atmPvcForwardType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OBJECT IDENTIFIER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The type of policy requested for this PVC atmPvcEntry 11 atmPvcBackwardParml OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The fourth parameter used to define the policy requested for this PVC DEFVAL 0 atmPvcEntry 12 atmPvcForwardParml OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The third parameter used to define the policy requested for this PVC DEFVAL 0 atmPvcEntry 13 A list of all the End Points for each PVC defined atmPvcEpTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmPvcEpEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table lists the characteristics of the remote end points of defined PVCs There is at least one entry for each PVC defined in the atmPvcTable
139. T LAN_ EMUL CONFIGURATION _SERVER command is used to define the specific ATM address of LECS for ILMI MIB Then the active WKA has no meaning and all entries defined on the table are included in the MIB in the order of index Index 1 should be top of the ILMI MIB entries It means that you can have LECS redundancy by defining multiple LECSs which have the same configuration on the IBM 8285 8260s in your campus ATM network 7 2 3 Configuring a Simple LANE Network Figure 42 on page 136 and Figure 43 on page 136 show a simple LANE network both physically and logically comprised of an IBM 8285 and workstations Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 135 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ATM Device 1 8285 1 ATM Device 2 LEC S W ATM Prefix LEG ESH SEL 00203534208781 32999999999999000099990109 ESL SEL 020088888988881 LES BUS ESH SEL 99999999990102 LECESHSEL 99999999990100 Figure 42 A Simple LANE Network Physical View ATM Device 1 ATM Device 2 Emulated LAN LEC Parameters LEC Parameters ELAN type Ethemet ELAN type Ethemet Ethemet type DIX Ethemet type DIX MAC 002035342087 a teestannecsscesecscesseducsessaenessesseesceessennecssonsnessscsbesseessenmessecsanscees es MAC 020088888888 LES ATM i LES ATM 39999999999999000099 39999999999999000099 99010999999999990102 99010999999999990102 IP 9 100 86 192 IP 9 100 86 201 Subnet mask FF
140. T TERMINAL PROMPT SET TERMINAL TIME_OUT SET TERMINAL HANGUP SET TERMINAL CONSOLE_PORT_PROTOCOL SET CLOCK SET DEVICE NAME SET DEVICE LOCATION SET DEVICE CONTACT SET DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS Configure Classical IP parameters for 8285 SET DEVICE IP_ADDRESS SET DEVICE DEFAULT_GATEWAY SET DEVICE ARP_SERVER Configure LEC IP parameters for 8285 Configure SLIP parameters for 8285 Configure LE server parameters LECS and LES BUS for 8285 SET DEVICE LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT SET TERMINAL CONSOLE_PORT_PROTOCOL SET TERMINAL SLIP_ADDRESS SET TERMINAL BAUD SET LAN_EMUL CONFIGURATION_SERVER SET LAN_EMUL SERVER Configure SNMP parameters for 8285 SET COMMUNITY SET ALERT Configure ATM media modules SET MODULE Configure ATM ports SET PORT Configure NNI connection between Hubs SET LOGICAL_LINK Configure NNI connections ATM subnetworks SET STATIC_ROUTE Configure ESI for ATM stations Configure PVCs and PVPs Configure TFTP parameters for download upload SET ATM_ESI SET PVC SET TFTP FILE_NAME SET TFTP FILE_TYPE SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS SET TFTP TARGET_MODULE Configure trace dump facilities SET TRACE 172 AT Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only A 1 2 Access Mode There are three levels of access mode to 8285 via the console port User Mode When you are logged on as a user yo
141. TATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION MaxPD as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This is the maximum iacceptable value for the state variable VT PD before sending a POLL PDU and resetting VT PD to zero This parameter is an upper limit for counter VT PD that sends a POLL PDU after every MaxPD SD PDUs atmSaalConfEntry 11 atmSaalMaxStat OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION MaxSTAT as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This is the maximum number of list elements placed in a STAT PDU atmSaalConfEntry 12 This table defines the SAAL statistics atmSaalStatsTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmSaalStatsEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains statistics for the SAAL protocol for outgoing calls only atmSaal 2 atmSaalStatsEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmSaalStatsEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of atmSaalConfTable Each entry corresponds to a pair of ATM interface signalling channel A signalling channel is uniquely defined on each interface by the VPI and VCI values allocated to it INDEX atmSaalStatsIndex atmSaalStatsSiVpi atmSaalStatsSiVci atmSaalStatsTable 1 AtmSaalStatsEntry SEQUENCE atmSaalStatsIndex INTEGER 242 AT Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only atmSaalStatsSiVpi
142. TEGER dynamicRouting noLanEmulationServer 1 staticRouting LanEmulationServer 2 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 199 200 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only dynamicRouting LanEmulationServer 3 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This variable controls the configuration of the functions in the control point This attribute cannot be set in the 8285 when read on a 8285 functionsConfiguration is always equal to dynamicRouting LanEmulationServer When this attribute is set the configuration of the functions is saved in the non volatile memory and the atm subsystem is automatically reset When dynamicRouting noLanEmulationServer is set the dynamic routing function is active The selection of the routes when a connection is established will be automatic through the SSI ports The LAN emulation servers cannot be started if functionsConfiguration is equal to dynamicRouting noLanEmul ationServer When staticRouting LanEmulationServer is set no automatic route selection accross the SSI ports will be performed by the atm subsystem The routing will be performed only through the defined static routes The ports cannot be set with the atm access equal to SSI All the ports previously configured as SSI ports are changed to UNI when the atm subsystem is restarts after the change of functionsConfiguration into staticRouting LanEmulationServer dynamicRouting LanEmulationServer cannot be set on a
143. TM Workgroup Concentrator e IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub e IBM 6611 Network Processor IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotocol Router The Nways Manager for Windows program provides integrated and easy to use graphical interfaces for configuration fault and performance management solution for networks and can be used to manage a variety of SNMP managed devices in addition to those above mentioned The suite is packaged with NetView for Windows V2 at a competitive price Nways Manager for Windows has been enhanced via PTF UR44773 to support the following IBM networking devices e IBM 8238 Nways Token Ring Stackable Hub e IBM 8271 Ethernet LAN Switch Models 108 e IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub 8 4 1 2 Nways Manager for Windows V2 Nways Manager for Windows V2 is packaged with the NEWT TCP IP stack and NetView for Windows as well as V1 but the versions are the latest NEWT V4 6 and NetView for Window V2 1 Nways Manager for Windows V2 provides the following functional enhancements in addition to V1 e New PSMs Support The PSMs for the following devices are newly supported IBM 8210 Multiprotocol Switched Services Server IBM 8225 Fast Ethernet Stackable Hub IBM 8230 Token Ring Concentrator Model 04x RI RO Module ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only IBM 8235 DIALS Server Models 001 002 011 012 021 022 0
144. TM Workgroup Switch Expansion Unit 14 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only As shown in the Figure 6 there are slots LEDs and connectors that the user can access from the front panel 2 3 2 1 Slots The expansion unit has three slots that can support most of the IBM 8260 ATM modules The modules that are supported in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis are listed in Chapter 4 Figure 7 shows how the modules are inserted in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis Figure 7 Inserting a Module in the Expansion Unit 2 3 2 2 LEDs The expansion unit has the following switch status LEDs e Power OK e Fault 2 3 2 3 Connectors The expansion unit front panel has two connectors e Power Input e Base Connector The base unit connector is a 68 pin female connector just like expansion unit connector of the base unit It is connected to the IBM 8285 Base Unit by the expansion interface cable which is shipped with the expansion unit Chapter 2 Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 15 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Figure 8 Attaching the Expansion Interface Cable For more information about the LEDs and the connectors refer to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and User s Guide SA33 0381 2 4 Installable Modules All ATM modules designed for the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub can be use
145. The third example shows how you can connect the ATM25 workgroup into the backbone network to access additional high speed resources using only the standard ATM 155 Mbps uplink In this capacity the 8285 makes an excellent ATM floor switch especially when used in conjunction with the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub as the backbone or collapse point switch By implementing a second backbone link using either the ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module or the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module connected to a different switch in the backbone you can take advantage of the additional bandwidth during normal operations and provide availability to your workgroup even if one of the collapse point switches fails Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 41 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 4 ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module and ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module The ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module and the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module are single slot concentrator modules that are ideal for high speed connections to both local resources and to devices up to 20 Km away They have the following characteristics in common e Provide two or three ports each capable of supporting a 155 Mbps full duplex connection to either a user a server or another switch The traffic received from these ports will be multiplexed into the backplane connection between the ATM 155 Mbps Media Modu
146. US mandatory DESCRIPTION The maximum number of entries that can be written in the atmSvcLogTable before a trap is generated When this number is reached an svcLogOverflow trap is generated When set to 0 no trap is generated atmQ2931 5 atmSvcLogTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmSvcLogEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains a list of the latest Switched Virtual Connection SVC that were completed on this ATM node An SVC is completed when it has been torn down at the originator s request normal completion or by the network operator forced tear down or when it has been rejected or cleared by the network exceptional condition atmQ2931 6 atmSvcLogEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmSvcLogEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of atmSvcLogTable INDEX atmSvcLogIndex atmSvcLogTable 1 236 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only AtmSvcLogEntry SEQUENCE atmSvcLogIndex INTEGER atmSvcLogInterfaceIndex INTEGER atmSvcLogCal 1 ingNumber AtmAddress atmSvcLogCal 1 edNumber AtmAddress atmSvcLogCreationT ime DateAndTime atmSvcLogTime DateAndTime atmSvcLogClearCause INTEGER atmSvcLogForwardQ0OS INTEGER atmSvcLogBackwardQOS INTEGER atmSvcLogForwardBW INTEGER atmSvcLogBackwardBW INTEGER atmSvcLogIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTE
147. UTP STP I O card RJ 45 are suitable for direct connection to a public bearer service In addition there may be incompatibilities with certain adapters that expect a full SDH implementation Please refer to Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Technical Overview for more information on the SONET and SDH standards e Hot pluggable in any slot in the 8285 Expansion Chassis e Support UNI SSI and NNI on either port in any combination 42 AT Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 4 1 e Support UNI 3 0 and or UNI 3 1 on all ports and will attempt to adapt to the standards of the connected device That is to say if a remote UNI 3 1 device needs to connect to a UNI 3 0 device connected to the ATM 155 Mbps module the module will attempt to translate between the two at the output port Differences between the 2 and 3 Port ATM Modules Although these two modules are very similar there are some key differences Specifically the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module has the following additional features e Supports ATM Forum Available Bit Rate ABR Service using Explicit Forward Congestion Control EFCI marking e Has a large 8 000 cell buffer to smooth bursts of traffic without triggering congestion control mechanisms 4 4 2 ATM 155 Mbps Media Module Traffic Management The ATM 155 Mbps Media Module provides reserved bandwidth RB and non reserved bandwi
148. X 8 3 3 1 Submap Hierarchy When you navigate through Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX you get the following submaps in a hierarchical level e Root submap e ATM Campus submap e Cluster submap You can get ATM Switch View by double clicking on an ATM switch on the cluster submap And also several panels are available for each switch such as device view PSM profile and configuration management The following sections provide brief explanations of each submap and view ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8 3 3 2 Root Submap The NetView for AIX Root submap shown in Figure 48 is the access point when using NCM A Figure 48 NetView for AIX Root Submap From the Root submap you can e Manage the ATM Campus When the ATM campus is managed each node of the ATM campus will be polled in the amount of time provided in the Polling Interval field e Unmanage the ATM Campus An unmanaged ATM campus is not managed by the NCM A meaning that none of nodes in this campus will be polled by the NCM A e Explode the ATM Campus icon This allows you to display the ATM cluster level view in the ATM Campus submap 8 3 3 3 ATM Campus Submap The ATM Campus submap shown in Figure 49 on page 158 displays all the clusters in your ATM campus From this submap you can choose to have a cluster managed or unmanaged by NCM A Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 157 This soft
149. YPE ENTERPRISE node DESCRIPTION A chassisEnvironment trap indicates a change in the concentrator s environment has occurred The variables supplied indicate what exactly changed 104 274 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only chassisChange TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node DESCRIPTION A chassisChange trap is used to indicate that a configuration change has occurred The actual variables that changed are included in the variables section of the PDU 107 chassisModuleDown TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node DESCRIPTION A chassisModuleDown trap indicates that management communications with a slot has been broken This event usually occurs when a module has been physically removed from the concentrator However it is possible for this event to occur when the particular module fails 116 chassisModuleUp TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node DESCRIPTION A chassisModuleUp trap indicates that management communications with a slot has been established This event usually occurs when a module has physically been inserted into the concentrator The variable chipModType indicates the module type inserted 117 END Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 275 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 276 AT Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Appendix
150. YPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The value of the MIB II sysName as reported by the device attached to this port 222 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only When not available a null string is returned nbrEntry 8 nbrLocation OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The value of the MIB II sysLocation as reported by the device attached to this port When not available a null string is returned nbrEntry 9 trunkId OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The internal identifier for this trunk Set to 0 if not a trunk nbrEntry 10 TFTP tftp OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 6 transferControl OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ready 1 download 2 upload 3 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A file transfer is initiated through a start command tftp 1 transferDate OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DateAndTime ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The date and time of the last transfer tftp 2 serverIpAddress OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX IpAddress ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The IP address of the server used for file transfer tftp 3 fileName OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 128 ACCE
151. a protocol specific VLAN PVLAN technology that has been widely adopted in the Internet working community It provides for layer 3 routing of IP datagrams over an ATM network In many ways it is analogous to LANE For instance all endstations must register with an address resolution server called a LES in LANE but an Address Resolution Protocol ARP Server in CIP Once the endstation is registered with the address resolution server it is by definition part of a virtual broadcast domain an ELAN in LANE terminology but a VLAN in CIP known as a Logical IP Subnet LIS The 8285 ATM Control Point has a single CIP client entity Here are the CIP data flows ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only CIP Address Registration Because in CIP there is no function analogous to the LECS in LANE each endstation must be configured with the ATM address of its ARP server The ARP client establishes a connection to the ARP server and notifies it of its IP address and its ATM address The ARP server adds these to its ARP table so that it can respond properly to other ARP requests CIP Address Resolution When a CIP client wishes to establish IP communication with another IP device it issues an ARP to the ARP server to determine the ATM address of the other device If the ARP server has an entry that matches the IP address of the requested device it returns the ATM address of that de
152. about the supported values of VPI VCI In case a station fails to do so this may Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 31 32 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only prevent interworking with the IBM ATM switches This function solves this problem by allowing the the network administrator to set the VPC VCC range on a given ATM port on the ATM switch thereby enabling the interworking with non compliant devices For example you can restrict the VPI value equal to 0 and VCI value comprised between 0 and 63 by specifying 0 6 as the VPI VCI Note If you change the VPI VCI range for the SSI or NNI port you must specify the same value on both ends ABR Flow Control Support On the ATM 12 port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator module the ATM 3 port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration module and on the 12 port 25 Mbps base unit the end user can add the ATM Forum compliant available bit rate ABR flow control through Explicit Forward Congestion Notification Indication EFCI marking When congestion occurs due to excessive traffic flow the IBM 8285 and 8260 modules can now mark the EFCI bit in the ATM cells to indicate a congestion condition asking the destination station to notify the source device to reduce its traffic Increase Buffer Size When multiple ATM sources try to send traffic over one link for instance the one to which a server is attached using UBR or ABR class of service congestion conditions might occur because
153. accordance with ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL 5 specifications e Supports up to 3072 virtual channel connections VCCs requiring one VCC for each unique source destination LEC pair e Supports up to eight emulated LANs ELANs each represented by a logical emulated LAN port ELP all sharing the same physical link to the ATM network However it is not possible to have two ELPs assigned to the same ELAN on a single ATM UFC e Does not support the VPI field of the virtual path channel identifier e Supports up to eight LECs which are compatible with LES LECS Version 1 0 implementations Each LEC can be pre configured with the address of its required LAN Emulation Server LES or can discover the address of its LES dynamically via communication with a LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS e Supports full media speed throughput in both directions on its full duplex ATM connection assembling or disassembling an aggregate of approximately 177 Kbps thousand 64 byte frames per second e Supports the following management interfaces LEC MIB ATM Forum LEC Management Specification Version 1 0 AToM MIB RFC 1695 Interface group of MIB II RFC 1213 and 1573 enhanced to include ATM The switch s SNMP agent is accessible though any of the Ethernet or token ring LAN ports When the LAN switch is configured with an ATM UFC the switch s SNMP agent is also accessible via an emulated LAN connection across an ATM port 76
154. al FPGA version Are you sure Y N Y Processing slot 2 Swap completed 2 a Note H Save configuration changes before starting H swap FPGA message will be generated for each module being upgraded EJ SWAP FPGA_PICOCODE slot command entered to swap microcode levels on the module in slot 2 Symptom Table 31 Swap Errors and Suggested Fixes Possible Cause Suggested Actions Failure Prompt gt gt gt gt The 8285 ATM Control Point was unable to find FPGA code that was valid with its operational code and has reverted to maintenance mode You must restore the 8285s operational code and configuration Use the SWAP ACTIVE command to restore the previous operational microcode Use the BOOT command to restart the system e Re enter your configuration information e Re enter your TFTP configuration information Repeat the download and swap process ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only an 8285 gt swap microcode You are about to change operational microcode version and reset the hub The saved hub configuration may be lost Are you sure Y N Y Migration allowed checking for needed FPGA swaps gt gt 0050 gt gt gt gt 0050 gt gt swap active Changed gt gt 0050 gt gt boot Booting 6 Check the new levels of code by using the
155. alarmed when queries for octet string MIB objects yield strange results Typically the browser is not able to distinguish between octet strings that are supposed to be human readable Appendix D Hints and Tips for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 189 190 1 N This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ie ASCII data and those that are merely hexadecimal data ie MAC addresses Therefore you may be dealing with a MAC address whose bytes happen to map to the ASCII character set and your browser will reflect readable characters on the screen The MIB Browser shipped with the current version of NetView for AIX applies the following logic IF vector contains all human readable bytes THEN represent as DisplayString IF all but the last byte of the vector are human readable bytes AND the last byte is the null terminator ie 0 THEN represent as DisplayString ELSE respresent as hexadecimal data For example a MIB variable that is a 6 byte octet string having the value 0x616263313233 will be represented by the browser as abc123 The expectation is that additional features of SNMPv2 will allow browsers to better determine the intended representation of octet string data Until that time please be aware of this potentially ambiguous situation when using MIB Browser applications 0S 2 Japan This section provides instructions on how to run the Configuration Utility Program in a Japanese 0S 2 WARP envir
156. alling process used by LANE is analogous to that for basic ATM signalling except that instead of a control point providing directory services there is now a LAN Emulation Server LES which provides directory services at the MAC layer which provides MAC address to ATM address mapping for LAN Emulation Clients LECs The 8285 ATM Control Point has two LES entities which together can handle 128 clients distributed between two Ethernet or token ring ELANs Either of the 8285 ATM Control Point s two LECs can use these internal LESs or can be configured to use an external LES such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server providing for greater flexibility for larger ELANs and for inter ELAN routing and bridging Emulating a traditional LAN environment requires the ability to allow for broadcast traffic common in a connectionless environment while handling it in a fashion optimized for a connection oriented environment This function is addressed by the Broadcast Unknown address Server BUS which attempts with the LES to convert MAC broadcast traffic to a specific ATM destination address The 8285 ATM Control Point integrates this BUS function with the internal LES function Either of the 8285 ATM Control Point s two LE clients can also be configured to use an external BUS such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server providing for very sophisticated broadcast management especially in IP and IPX environments Chapter
157. and Users Guide SA33 0324 IBM 8260 8285 ATM WAN Module Installation and Users Guide SA33 0396 8260 8285 Video Distribution Module Installation and User s Guide GA27 4173 Uncrating Installing I O Cards Installing Module Connecting Cables Configuration IBM 8260 8285 ATM Command Reference Guide Process SA33 0385 SET MODULE SET PORT SET STATIC_ROUTE SET LOGICAL_LINK SAVE ALL MODULE_PORT Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 109 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 26 Page 2 of 2 References and Process Quick Guide Task References Monitoring and e Use the respective ATM Module Installation and User s Troubleshooting Guides Understanding LEDs Troubleshooting IBM 8260 8285 ATM Command Reference Guide SA33 0385 SHOW MODULE SHOW MODULE VERBOSE SHOW PORT SHOW PORT VERBOSE SHOW STATIC_ROUTE SHOW LOGICAL_LINK 6 4 Microcode Picocode Considerations The following section describes e Reasons for upgrading microcode e How to acquire the latest microcode e How to upgrade the microcode 6 4 1 Reasons for Upgrading Microcode As part of your network operations plan it is a good practice to include maintaining your network devices with the most recent software microcode available This allows you to take advantage of the newest features to comply with the latest standards and to i
158. andatory DESCRIPTION Entries of moduleTable INDEX moduleSlotIndex moduleTable 1 ModuleEntry SEQUENCE moduleSlotIndex INTEGER moduleType INTEGER moduleDescription DisplayString moduleSerial Number DisplayString moduleSoftwareVersion DisplayString modul eHardwareVersion INTEGER moduleAdminState INTEGER moduleOperState INTEGER moduleErrors Counter modul eMaxVpc INTEGER moduleUsedVpc INTEGER ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only moduleMaxVcc INTEGER moduleUsedVcc INTEGER moduleSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 64 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The slot number for this module moduleEntry 1 moduleType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unknown 1 switch 2 atm 100 Mbps 3 atm 155 Mbps 2 ports LAN 4 atm kit 5 atm base 6 atm lan bridge 51 atm 25 Mbps 7 atm wan 52 atm mss server 53 atm 155 Mbps 3 ports LAN 8 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The type of module attached to the ATM switch in this slot The unknown value is used when the ATM agent is unable to get information for this module the module is isolated from the switch or is not operational moduleEntry 2 moduleDescription OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A textual
159. as we did the first one however for the sake of brevity we show only the commands that are new for thi s scenario Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 129 130 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only To enable connectivity between the switches we configure an SSI connection between them This is done using the SET PORT command ezes set port 1 13 enable ssi 155000 When setting up your SSI parameters make certain that you satisfy the following conditions 1 The ATM network address the first 11 bytes of the ATM address for each switch is the same 2 The ATM cluster number 11th byte of the ATM address is the same on each switch 3 The hub numbers 13th byte of the ATM address are different Even though the port may be physically up that is receiving and transmitting properly if it is misconfigurated it will be reported as being not in service If this happens The 8285 will try to provide helpful error messages in the IX Status field returned by the SHOW PORT command with the VERBOSE option m gt 8285 gt show port 1 13 verbose Type Mode Status 1 13 SSI enabled UP NOT IN SERVICE SSI Bandwidth 155000 Kbps Connector SC DUPLEX Media Multimode fiber Port speed 155000 Kbps Remote device is activ IX status HUB numbers identical Scrambling mode frame and cell Clock mode internal A list of some of these messages is given in Table 34 Table 34 Page 1 of 2 IX Sta
160. at can be used by Ethernet only 4 7 1 2 ATM Port The ATM port on the ATM LAN bridge does not have an external interface and communicates with the switch on a chip and the 8285 ATM Control Point via the ATM backplane in the 8285 Expansion Chassis The ATM interface complies with UNI 3 0 specifications 4 7 1 3 RS 232 Console Port In addition to the LAN ports the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module has an RS 232 console port also known as a service port The service port enables you to connect a workstation to the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module to load new configuration microcode etc Note After the initial configuration you can also access the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module inband through LAN or ATM ports to load new configuration microcode etc 4 7 2 Sample Configurations Using ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module The following sections show you some examples of using the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 58 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 7 2 1 Local LAN to LAN Server Bridging Figure 23 shows an example of using the ATM LAN bridge as a means of bridging three token ring LANs together while providing all users including the ATM25 users with access to a LAN server Note the console connects to the base unit and to the bridge module this is required for the initial configuration of the bridge module LAN Workstations
161. ating status The graphical topology display uses a color code to represent the status of the following levels of resources displayed in submaps ATM Campus ATM Clusters ATM Nodes ATM Interfaces ATM Resource Configuration The Nways Campus Manager ATM provides easy access to various submap levels allowing users to set and change the ATM switch and node configuration The following resources can be configured or displayed e ATM physical resources such as ATM interface ports e PVC including create delete set up and tear down UNI e SVC including tracking and forced clearing UNI e VP and VC link ATM Fault Management The Nways Campus Manager ATM provides a complete set of messages traps and event notifications The integration of this information into NetView for AIX enables retrievability and more efficient problem determination The user can customize the events in such a way to reduce the amount of information to manage large networks effectively The Nways Campus Manager ATM allows the recognition of network management information which is described in 8 1 Management Information Bases MIBs on page 145 from different sources supporting ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e Display of traps e Color coding of status information e Logging of call failures ATM Change Management The Nways Campus Manager ATM provides a quick way
162. ation and status of the subsystem PVC Configuration When you single click on the PVC Configuration button the SVC List PVC configuration panel appears It allows you to display the PVCs currently defined to track the connection and to create a new PVC When you single click on the SVC List button the SVC list panel appears It allows you to display the SVCs currently established to show the characteristics to track the connection and to delete File Transfer When you single click on the File Transfer button the file transfer panel appears It allows you to use TFTP for the switch management such as downloading the microcode and FPGA picocode from the management station to the switch ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Telnet When you single click on the Telnet button the management station establishes a telnet connection to the switch and provides you the console interface Attached Device When you single click on the Attached Device button the attached device panel appears It allows you to display the ATM devices attached to the switch The color of a port on the managed device is a visual indication of its status and has the following meaning Red The port is disabled Yellow The port is enabled but not connected Gray The port is administratively disabled Blue The port state is unknown Green The port is enabled and in service The color of
163. ation to set and enable the COM port as a SLIP interface with the following configuration IP Address 1 2 3 6 Gateway 1 2 3 5 Modem direct connection Modem speed 19200 bps Port COM Flow control none Note is the number of the COM port to be used The following statement MUST be added to the WIN INI file to setup the mtu size TCPIP slipmtu 1500 You will need a NULL modem cable if you are directly attached to the bridge using the SLIP interface kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk x x Test your SLIP connection by making sure you can ping the bridge ping 1 2 3 5 eR kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Configuration Utility Program and 0S 2 with TCP IP V2 0 The TCP IP V2 x for OS 2 must be installed including DOS Windows access The latest OS 2 TCP IP 2 x CSDs must also be applied including the DOS Windows access CSD The TCP IP SLIP interface must be enabled and configured by running tcpipcfg check the enable box MTU size 1500 VJ compression off IP address 1 2 3 6 destination IP address 1 2 3 5 The speed of the com port is not set through tcpipcfg You must explicitly change the com port speed by issuing a mode command from the 0S 2 prompt ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only mode coml 19200 none 8 After setting these parameters and restarting TCP you
164. atus in the concentrator such that when at least one fan unit is faulty this object will have the value faulty 2 env 4 Static Summaries staticSummary OBJECT IDENTIFIER modules 12 staticSummaryTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF StaticSummaryEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A table for retrieving predefined collections of MIB objects as a single field of octets This table is read only all the entries are created by the agent The purpose of this table is to replace the modSummaryTable It can support changes in the MIB structure and new types of variables as they are added in the future This is accomplished by returning the OID of each item included in the summary along with the summarized values Each entry in this table summarizes important information concerning the configuration and status Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 261 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only of a slot subslot This information is a summary of the objects in the modules branch No entry in this table exists for an empty slot staticSummary 1 staticSummaryEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX StaticSummaryEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A predefined collection of MIB objects whose values can be retrieved as a single field INDEX ssSlotIndex ssSubSlotIndex staticSummaryTable 1 StaticSummaryEntry SEQUENCE
165. ble performance with the least number of errors Provides a Virtual Switch capability that allows the switch to operate as though it were actually several up to 8 switches That is to say traffic arriving on a port can only be forwarded to ports within its group This also means that broadcasts are isolated within each virtual switch Support inbound MAC address filtering which allows Blocking of packet based on source or the destination MAC address Forwarding to specific ports based on source MAC address Forcing traffic to specific ports based on the destination MAC address e Token Ring Features Supports 8 shielded TRN UTP STP RJ45 lobe ports using either UTP category 3 4 or 5 cabling or STP cabling Note These ports do not support RI or RO connections Use the 2 Port Fiber RI RO UFC to handle RI or RO connections Have either two UFC slots 2 slot modules or four UFC slots 3 slot modules which can contain any combination of the following UFCs 4 Port UTP STP This UFC adds an additional four switched TRN ports to the module e Interface RJ45 e Cabling STP UTP categories 3 4 and 5 72 AT Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 2 Port Fiber RI RO UFC This UFC enables switching between token ring segments as far as 2 km away e Interface ST e Cabling Multimode fiber 1 Port ATM 155 Mbps Multimode Fiber UF
166. ble Highlights Level March 1996 Initial release April 1996 Fixed some problems in initial release July 1996 TR LEC EU and 8260 modules support 1 October 1996 New 8260 module support 2 V1 4 0 October 1996 Connection capacity increased Variable VPC VCI ABR flow control and PVC multipoint support Ky Notes Except A CPSW MSS Server and 8271 8272 modules 2 A3 MB155 module ATM firmware upgrade kit required These control point microcode levels except the obsolete ones are available on the Internet and can be downloaded via the Web or by FTP And the code can be downloaded into the IBM 8285 either out of band via a SLIP connected workstation or inband via an FTP file transfer For more information about how to get and download the code refer to 6 4 Microcode Picocode Considerations on page 110 Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 29 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 3 3 2 Control Point V1 2 The Control Point V1 2 has been available since July 1996 It contains the operational code V1 2 0 the boot code V1 2 0 and FPGA 3 The FPGA is optional but highly recommended The highlights of new and enhancement functions are as follows e Token Ring IEEE 802 5 LAN Emulation Client LEC Support The previous levels allowed the inband monitoring of the IBM 8285 in a Classical IP environment as well as in Forum Compliant LAN Emulation Ethernet IEEE 802 3 This support has been e
167. by all hub modules For a given voltage line this object s value is the sum total of the power consumed by the hub itself the Controller Modules and all power enabled slots containing IBM 8260 modules If power fault tolerant mode is enabled when it was previously disabled this object s value is increased by the amount of power reserved for the voltage line If power fault tolerant mode is disabled when it was previously enabled this object s value is decreased by the amount of power that is returned to the available power budget for the voltage line ocPowerOutputEntry 4 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 267 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ocPowerOutputWattageAvai lable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION In hundredths of a Watt 1 100 Watt the wattage available to power up modules If power fault tolerant mode is enabled when it was previously disabled this object s value is decreased by the amount of power reserved for the voltage line If power fault tolerant mode is disabled when it was previously enabled this object s value is increased by the amount of power that is returned to the available power budget for the voltage line ocPowerOutputEntry 5 ocPowerOutputUnmanagedWattageAl loc OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Gauge ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION In hundredths of a Watt 1 100 Watt the wattage res
168. cOnly the remote device succesfully acknowledges ILMI polling requests but it rejects the ATM prefix registration Only PVCs are supported misConfigured an SSI to UNI or an SSI to NNI configuration has been detected wrongNetworkPrefix the switches on each end of an SSI link have incompatible network prefixes the 12 first bytes have different values wrongNodeNumber the switches on each end of an SSI link have the same ATM node Numbers failing line the port is enabled and a invalid signal is detected on the line disabled failing the port is disabled and an anomaly is detected either internal or external wrap no signal the port is internally wrapped so that all the traffic received on the attached line is returned unchanged on the line No activity is detected at the physical layer wrap idle the port is internally wrapped so that all the traffic received on the attached line is returned unchanged on the line and a valid signal is detected on the line wrap failing internal an internal failure has been detected when the port has been turned into the wrap reply state The actual state of the port is undefined wrap failing line the port is internally wrapped so that all the traffic received on the attached line is returned unchanged on the line and an invalid signal is detected on the line idle no bandwidth the port is enabled and activity from the remote device is detected but there is not enough bandwidth to operate the por
169. ch a 2 switch b 3 base only 4 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This variables indicates the currently active switch When the active switch is in slots 9 10 switch a is returned When the active switch is in slots 11 12 switch b is returned On a 8285 ATM workgroup when there is no expansion installed base only is returned when there is an expansion installed switch a is returned When reset is set the complete atm subsystem is reset and a switch swap over may occur if the switch electing conditions have changed since the last reset base 6 backupMode OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER noBackUp 1 primary 2 secondary 3 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This variable controls the way the active switch will be elected at the next reset of the atm subsystem and controls also the reset of the atm subsystem When set to primary the switch module currently in use is defined as the primary switch to elect as the active switch if possible at the next reset of the atm subsystem When set to secondary the switch module currently in use is defined as the secondary switch If another switch module is present and can be elected then this other switch will become the active switch at the next reset of the atm subsystem noBackUp is returned for the atm subsystems which do not support the redundant switch function base 7 functionsConfiguration OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX IN
170. ching Scenarios The following describes the process of how cells are switched from one port to another port in the IBM 8285 To understand this process it is best to follow a cell as it enters one port and exits another and to see what actually happens as it goes through the various components Please refer to 3 2 1 1 Internal Cell Format on page 22 as the following discussion assumes that you are already familiar with the internal cell format e Point to Point Routing The following describes what happens to a cell in a point to point connection 1 Receive the cell a CAD_Up prepares in advance for every port the address of the next cell assembly buffer This is the location where the internal cell will be built in CAD_Store b An ATM cell is received by SFE_Up Here the HEC of the ATM header gets checked If it is a bad cell it is discarded otherwise the HEC is stripped and the remaining 52 bytes are delivered to CAD_Up c The connection from SFE_Up to CAD_Up is 32 bits wide so the cell is transferred in 13 4 byte blocks There are port lines between SFE_Up and CAD_Up which indicate what port the cell came from Using these port lines the 4 byte block transfers can be mixed from different ports For example deliver a 4 byte block from Port 1 then deliver a 4 byte block from Port 2 then deliver a 4 byte block from Port 1 and so on This ensures that no time is wasted in delivering data from a port that has no cells d W
171. d OPERATIONAL The FPGA picocode Installation instructions The release note The new 8285 Installation and User s Guide If you replace GET with LIST and package_name with you will get a list of available packages sent to your reader The following tables summarize the various code packages available and the names of their component files Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 113 114 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 27 Filenames for System Upgrade Microcode Release 1 0 1 2 Component Release 1 0 Release 1 0 1 Release 1 2 Feature Code Field P N 51H4869 Package Name 8285P100 8285P101 8285P120 PACKAGE Release Notes 8285R100 8285R101 R51H4872 relnote doc LIST3820 Installation 82851100 82851101 82851120 Instructions install doc LIST3820 Executable File 82850101 82850101 82850120 EXEBIN Boot boot120 bin Operational oper100 bin oper101 bin oper120 bin FPGA basfpga3 bin Table 28 Filenames for System Upgrade Microcode Release 1 3 1 4 Component Release 1 3 Release 1 4 Feature Code Field P N Package Name F85HV130 F85HV140 PACKAGE Installation Instructions 11031989 110J1994 INST8285 DOC LIST3820 Release Notes R10J1990 R10J1993 REL8285 DOC LIST3820 Executable File D10J1991 D51H5219 EXEBIN D10J2095 Boot boot130 bin boot140 bin Operational oper130 bin oper140 bin FPGA 8285LEV3 enc 85pgac10 enc
172. d ee ia vii Fables oh ra OS eet ee EL ee ea a eS teh ee ne Ae on OS ee Dose ix Prelat e ade nate oP Fe eye aa Te e hy ey Bi Seah Oh te a ah xi How This Redbook Is Organized oaa aaa a xi The Team That Wrote This Redbook 0 00 xii Comments Welcome 2805 geerd ack Ge eh hed Bete ee Pe he aa xiii Chapter 1 Introduction to ATM Networks 1 Al SATM Fundamentals arara 4 6s Meet ctw a ee ae eee ea eg 1 eR TATEM Gels enaa on ah amp ee ee ug et et a dae ee ee ek Ae dey chess 1 11 2 ATM Connections e 2404 28 220 od oS Bo BOS oe eh ES 2 1 1 3 ATM Addressing 0 00002 eee ee 2 1 1 4 ATM Data Flows 0000 0 000000000002 a 3 Chapter 2 Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 9 2 1 8285 Components A uni ar aa ae aE e a e a n S o e aa 9 2 2 Base Umt Goets Ea Sse a pA te re ee Sy e Gade Bian A deer ce Be tas E 10 2 2 1 Internal Features 2 2 00 0200000005002 20a 10 2 2 28285 Front Panel cocks bie hed ete OSG Bee Pe See ee 2 eh TE 11 2 2 3 155 Mbps ATM I O Card aoaaa aaa 020020200248 13 2 3 Expansion Unit FC 5502 2 13 2 3 1 Internal Features 2 2 0 020002000500 55040 14 23 2 Front Panel Ase 2a5 2 ee beet eee OER ESE GEL ALA EAS RAM 14 2 4 Installable Modules 2 0 0020000005052 20a 16 Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 17 3 1 IBM 8285 Architecture Overview
173. d in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis Refer to 4 1 Modules Currently Available for the 8285 ATM Subsystem on page 35 for the list of modules that are officially supported with the 8285 switch 16 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 This chapter contains the following sections describing the functional overview of the IBM 8285 IBM 8285 Architecture Overview Switching Fabric Control Point Codes ATM Backplane Expansion Unit Connection LAN Emulation Server Functions 3 1 IBM 8285 Architecture Overview This section discusses the architecture of the IBM 8285 Figure 9 on page 18 shows the hardware architecture of the IBM 8285 Base Unit Copyright IBM Corp 1996 17 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 512 KBytes 25 ns RAM O J a 512 KBytes 25 ns RAM 512 KBytes 12 ns RAM 512 KBytes 12 ns RAM 32 155 Mbps 155 Mbps 25 Mbps HS SFE_up a E E Pi P2 P3 P4 PS P P7 P8 P9 P10 Pll Pi2 Fr anna nn te ce ec ne a e r ey CP Components FLASH M 68040 Pid P11 P12 31ns 32 Mghz x 8 256 Mbps 60ns 16 Mghz x 32 512 Mbps Figure 9 Hardware Architecture of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base Unit As shown above the IBM 8285 Base Unit contains the following functi
174. d in the Q 2110 Specification This is the number of received unsolicited or or inappropriate PDUs atmSaalStatsEntry 4 atmSaalUnsuccessPdus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Error condition 0 as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This is the number of failing retries atmSaalStatsEntry 5 atmSaalFailedEstablishment OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Error condition P as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This is the number of failing polls atmSaalStatsEntry 6 atmSaalSequenceGap OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of times sequence gaps were detected by the peer entity atmSaalStatsEntry 7 atmSaalGapNumbers OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of times frames were re transmitted due to sequence gaps detected by the peer entity atmSaalStatsEntry 8 atmSaalOtherListErrors OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Error conditions Q to V as defined in the Q 2110 Specification atmSaalStatsEntry 9 atmSaalLackOfCredit OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory 244 AT Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION Error
175. d with an external LES This line shows the ELAN type and Ethernet type of the LEC The ethernet 802 3 means the ELAN type is Ethernet and the Ethernet type is 802 3 Don t make the mistake of thinking that ethernet 802 3 means that both DIX and 802 3 Ethernet types are supported The LEC on the IBM 8285 can support either of them and the status should be ethernet DIX when the Ethernet type is DIX The appropriate values in these fields means that the registration process has been successfully completed since these values are returned by the LES The typical reasons a LEC might be unable to register with the LES are as follows ATM switch connection If the LECs are attached to a different switch check to see if the connection between the switches has been established Designated LES address Check if the designated LES ATM address specified for the LEC especially the SEL field is correct Max SDU size ELAN name Check if the same maximum SDU size and ELAN name are defined on the LEC and LES If these values don t match the registration process fails And some LECs such as IBM 8285 internal LEC don t have specific values for itself but instead gets the values from its LES Registration sequence Reissue the LANE registration request from the LEC Several devices have limited retry counts to issue the registration request and only do so during the initialization phase Therefore they won t register when the LES is re
176. ded in the corresponding staticSummaryEntry instance INDEX ssTlcSlotIndex ssTlcSubSlotIndex ssLastChangedTable 1 SsLastChangedEntry SEQUENCE ssTlcSlotIndex INTEGER ssTlcSubSlotIndex INTEGER ssTlcCurrentlyOccupied INTEGER ssTimeLastChanged TimeTicks ssTlcSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of the slot to which this entry pertains ssLastChangedEntry 1 ssTlcSubSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The subslot number to which this entry pertains For Hub concentrators there is a single entry for each slot with a subslot number of 1 For IBM 8260 concentrators the number 1 indicates the motherboard and daughterboards are numbered beginning with subslot 2 ssLastChangedEntry 2 ssTlcCurrentlyOccupied OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER empty 1 occupied 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current configuration state of this slot subslot Whether occupied or not the ssTimeLastChanged field is still valid ifa 264 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only slot subslot is unoccupied the timestamp indicates the time that the module was removed If no module has occupied this slot subslot since the last restart of the agent the value of ssTimeLastChanged for this entry is ze
177. description of this module This description is blank when no description is available moduleEntry 3 moduleSerialNumber OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 13 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The serial number for this module moduleEntry 4 moduleSoftwareVersion OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 203 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION The version and release number for this module firmware microcode moduleEntry 5 moduleHardwareVersion OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Part Number P N and Engineering Change EC level for this module and Plant Location moduleEntry 6 moduleAdminState OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ready 1 reset 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The administrative state of this module On an 8260 when set to reset for an entry associated to the active switch control point module the whole atm subsystem is reset and a switch swap over may occur if the backupMode criterium has been changed since the last reset When set to reset for an entry associated to a module which is not the active Control Point Switch module only this module is reset moduleEntry 7 moduleOperState OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unknown 1 operational 2
178. dge The bridge communicates on it s serial port at 19200 8 data 1 stop no parity To insure that your modem is compatible with the bridge reset the bridge while modem is attached and powered on but does not have phone connection After the bridge resets verify that you can dial in and ping the bridge One modem we tested Motorola Codex 3260 did not pass this test The problem was most likely caused by ATM bridge sending various messages out the serial port while it is resetting 2 6 Problem Configurator communication errors when Max Frame Size is reduced below 1500 bytes Release 1 versions of the bridge and Configurator would allow IP frames as large as 1518 bytes If the bridge s Max Frame Size is set lower than this the 8281 bridge will throw away the IP frames and subsequent retries to and from the configurator Thus the configurator and bridge could not complete Profile sends or retrievals successfully Release 2 of the 8281 and configurator should work with Max Frame Size set to 1112 bytes or higher If there is a ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only requirement to set the Max Frame Size lower than 1112 then you will need to use the serial port for communicating with the bridge 2 7 Recovering from corrupted 8281 configuration If you observe unusual problems after loading bridge profile or loading new operational code then it is p
179. dth NRB with the following caveats e For RB traffic the maximum bandwidth that can be reserved is 85 of the total throughput capacity which is Port Interface 131 Mbps 85 of 155 Mbps Backplane Interface 180 Mbps 85 of 212 Mbps 4 4 2 1 Reserved Bandwidth Constraints In order to fairly allocate reserved bandwidth among its ports the ATM 155 Mbps modules will enforce traffic limitations on each port that is configured for SSI as follows e For a single SSI link between two 8285s the maximum bandwidth that can be reserved is 131 Mbps 85 of 155 Mbps e If a second SSI port is configured the amount of reserved bandwidth for the first port will be recalculated and each SSI link will be allocated 90 Mbps 50 of 180 Mbps If the peak cell rate PCR in the first SSI port exceeds 90 Mbps when you try to configure the second port the command setting for the second SSI port will be rejected since the first port could not be throttled back e If a third SSI port is configured on the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module only the amount of reserved bandwidth for the first two ports will be recalculated and each SSI link will be allocated 60 Mbps 33 of 180 Mbps If the peak cell rate PCR in either of the first two SSI ports exceeds 60 Mbps when you try to configure the third port the command setting for the third SSI port will be rejected since the other ports could not be throttled back 4 4 3 Sample Sce
180. e atmQ29310utCal1Failures Counter atmQ2931InCallAttempts Counter atmQ2931InCallInProgress Gauge atmQ2931InCal1Failures Counter atmQ2931StatsIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifIndex value of the ATM interface which with the signalling channel defined by its Vpi Vci values uniquely identifies this entry atmQ2931StatsEntry 1 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 231 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only atmQ2931StatsVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vpi value which with the Vci value specified in atmQ2931StatsVci defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmQ2931StatsEntry 2 atmQ2931StatsVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vci value which with the Vpi value specified in atmQ2931StatsVpi defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmQ2931StatsEntry 3 atmQ29310utCallAttempts OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This is the number of outgoing call attempts on this interface including accepted as well as rejected calls atmQ2931StatsEntry 4 atmQ29310utCallInProgress OBJECT TY
181. e Set Terminal Prompt This command allows you to customize the prompt that is displayed when you are connected to the 8285 An example of this this command and the result is shown in Figure 64 8285 gt set terminal prompt ATMWKGP gt ATMWKGP gt Figure 64 Changing the Terminal Prompt This command is useful for identifying the 8285 to which you are connected The factory default prompt is 8285 gt It is recommended that you set the prompt to the device name you specify for the 8285 Refer to the SET DEVICE NAME command to show how to configure the 8285 device name This will help you to identify the 8285 to which you are connected when using Telnet e Set Terminal Hangup This command allows you to configure 8285 to automatically disconnect the modem drop DTR when you log off To do so you must issue the following command sz set terminal hangup disable Figure 65 Disabling the Terminal Auto Hangup The default is disable which means that the modem will not hang up and an unauthorized user may pick up your 8285 modem session Set Terminal Time_Out This command allows you to set the number of minutes that you can remain logged on to an 8285 session without keyboard activity This is a security Appendix A 8285 ATM Control Point Commands 175 A 2 176 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only measure that prevents unauthorized users from accessing and working in an open 8285 session when the 8285 co
182. e by the number of devices sharing it In this case the original bandwidth calculation is 10 000 Kbps segment 1 segment 40 users 4 servers 227 Kbps device To be fair this is a nominal value in reality the available bandwidth on a shared Ethernet segment rarely exceeds 40 50 of the rated bandwidth because of collisions and re transmissions H This is an average value The four segments with one device would actually receive 10 000 Kbps device while the remaining 12 segments would have two devices a piece each receiving 5 000 Kbps ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chapter 5 8285 ATM Network Specifications This chapter gives ATM connections and Traffic management specifications supported by the 8285 5 1 ATM Connections The IBM 8285 provides support for the following types of connections Permanent Virtual Connection PVC Two types of PVCs are supported PVC for virtual channel connections VCC PVC for virtual path connection VPC also known as permanent virtual path PVP Permanent Virtual Path PVP Note that PVPs are not supported when they span over NNI links However PVPs are supported over SSI links Switched Virtual Connection SVC Note Switched virtual path SVP is not supported by the IBM 8285 5 1 1 Supported VPI and VCI Range The virtual path identifiers VPls and virtual channel identifiers VCls sup
183. e cell This step depends on the IBM 8285 has a expansion unit or not In other words the switching is done by the CAP CAD or the switch chip When Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 27 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only the IBM 8285 is installed without the expansion unit the switching is done as follows a The cell is switched from CAD_Up to CAD_Down immediately as well as the case of point to point connection The CAP_Up does not recognize the multicast ID When the IBM 8285 installed with the expansion unit the switching is done as follows a The switch chip recognizes that the TB is actually a Multicast ID thus using the MID as a pointer it looks at its switch multicast tree table to get 16 bits Each bit corresponds to a blade If the bit is on then that blade is part of the multicast tree b The switch chip switches the cell to the target blades based on the multicast tree table 2 Receive the cell into the target blade This step is the same as in a point to point connection described earlier 3 Place the cell in the correct output queue and prepare for transfer to SFE_Down a Using SB and LCBA CAP_Down determines LCBAdown Since this is a multicast connection LCBAdown actually points to a chain of LCBs Each LCB in the chain represents the branches on the multicast tree on this blade Each LCB in the chain has VPI VCI out SWAP_TYPE and target port TP and last multicast Last_MC
184. e command line interface or the Nways Campus manager program The following example shows how to configure a PVC for the configuration shown in Figure 32 VPI 0 Vcl 400 HN 2 1 Remote VPI 0 VCI 500 HN 1 Local Figure 32 Sample PVC Configuration Chapter 5 8285 ATM Network Specifications 83 84 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only szasirse pvc 2 1 100 1 9 2 channel 0 500 0400 best_effort Note that in this example we have chosen the following attributes for the PVC e Workstation attached on the local 8285 slot port 2 1 e Workstation attached on the remote 8285 slot port 1 9 e PVC_id 100 This is an arbitrary number that you can use to identify the PVC on various displays e Remote hub identifier 2 This identifies the hub number HN of the remote hub the hub on which the PVC terminates within the cluster e VPI VCI on the local hub VPI 1 VCI 500 e VPI VCI on the remote hub VPI 0 VCI 400 e PVC type best_effort The VPI VCI values chosen for each port must be free at the time of defining the PVC You can find out the VPI VCI values that are currently allocated to the other connections on the port by using the Nways Campus manager ATM for AIX If you are not sure which VPI VCI is available for allocation you may use the following command which will allow the 8285 Control Point available VPI VCI pair that
185. e following computation to determine whether to apply a user filter if frame and filter_mask equal filter_value then apply filter 2 5 How to connect to the bridge using a modem The following paragraphs explain how to configure telephone modems and TCP IP software to enable communications via telephone lines The ATM bridge configurator program can be used via telephone modems The only modem command issued by ATM bridge is ATEO to turn echo off The modem must be configured before it is attached to the bridge We tested several modems and found that the following configuration works well for Hayes compatible modems AT amp F Restore to factory setting AT amp KO Disable flow control AT amp DO Allow phone connection to stay up when bridge resets AT S0 2 Auto Answer on second ring AT amp W Save configuration Since ATM bridge communicates via TCP IP the SLIP protocol must be configured to dial remote modem The dial string must be set to ATDTXXXXXXXX where XXXXXXXX is the telephone number and the Auto Dial option must be enabled For some reason not enabling Auto Dial option and using SLIPDIAL after TCP IP is started does not work Once connection is established between modems ping the bridge at 1 2 3 5 to verify connectivity We noticed that it may take up to 30 seconds for some modems to forward pings successfully The delay is probably due to auto learning of DTE speed between modem and ATM bri
186. e slot containing the IBM 8260 agent ocPowerSlotAdminStatus cannot be set to the value disable 2 However in the event of an environmental change such as a power supply failure the slot containing the IBM 8260 agent may be automatically power disabled and this object will then have the value insufficient power 3 This is based on the value of ocPowerSlotClass for the slot ocPowerSlotEntry 4 IBM 8260 Inventory Group This group reflects inventory information about components in the IBM 8260 hub Hub chassis information ocInvHubType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The hub type i e model number of the hub An instance for which information is not valid will return invalid EEPROM ocInvHub 1 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ocInvHubSerialNo OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The serial number of the hub An instance for which information is not valid will return invalid EEPROM ocInvHub 2 ocInvHubHWVer OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The revision number of the hardware of the hub An instance for which information is not valid will return invalid EEPROM ocInvHub 3 ocInvH
187. e the complexity of each ELAN elementary configuration action The user will be helped with pop up windows in case of errors Examples follow Create remove ELANs to from a domain Move a client from an ELAN to another one Administer un administer an ELAN e Generic support of non IBM OEM devices Automatic discovery of OEM devices switches or edge devices For example the ATM uplink of any LAN switch or bridge will be managed Dynamic display of OEM devices with hook to specific management Generic profile such as configuration and fault management of OEM devices standard SNMP MIBs e Automatic discovery enhancement The automatic discovery process can be relied on For the discovery of specific SNMP agents such as OEM devices To filter the devices that are discovered based on their IP address or device type To optimize polling by tuning its period for ATM devices e Display of ATM workstations node expanded view Automatic discovery of ATM workstations attached to IBM ATM switches when the station adapter supports ILMI MIB variables such as the IP address and ATM address Generic profile configuration and fault management of ATM standard compliant workstations with SNMP agents Command line interface Support of shell script initiated commands for LANE e Global services Save and restore IBM ATM switches configuration through single slot configuration using configuration fil
188. e with an IBM 8285 ATM network It provides a brief overview of the MIBs that are available functions of Nways Campus Manager ATM and an explanation of how to perform some of the functions that we have found useful in configurating and monitoring the IBM 8285 ATM network For more information about ATM campus network management refer to the ATM Campus Network Management SG24 5006 8 1 Management Information Bases MIBs Copyright IBM Corp 1996 The IBM 8285 control point provides full SNMP support with the use of standard SNMP commands Get GetNext Set and Trap Below is a list of all the MIBs an IBM 8285 ATM network supports that any SNMP based management can use MIB II RFC 1213 The IBM 8285 ATM subsystem fully supports this MIB described in RFC 1213 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP Based Internets MIB II For the purposes of the system group ATM is treated as a data link protocol The interface group describes the ATM cell layer interface This group only concerns itself with the ATM cell layer as a whole and not the individual connections Here the amount of traffic that was transmitted and received can be found Also the number of cells dropped due to an incorrect HEC and invalid ATM cell header will be found IETF AtoM MIB RFC 1695 This MIB is described in RFC 1695 Definitions of Managed Objects for ATM Management Version 8 0 using SMIv2 and also called AtoMIB It describes objects used f
189. ead only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This Module model number If the instance value is unknown Hub will be returned ocInvModEntry 3 ocInvModSerialNo OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This Module serial number If the instance value is unknown N A will be returned ocInvModEntry 4 ocInvModHWVer OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The revision number of the hardware on this module If the instance value is unknown N A will be returned ocInvModEntry 5 ocInvModSWVer OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The revision number of the software on this module If the instance value is unknown N A will be returned ocInvModEntry 6 ocInvModSWBootVer OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The revision number of the boot software on this module If the instance value is unknown N A will be returned ocInvModEntry 7 ocInvModMfr OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The company name that manufactured this module If the instance value is unknown N A will be returned Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 273 This soft copy for use by IBM employ
190. ective stand alone workgroup by merely changing adapters in the workstations and connecting them to the 8285 switch This simple change provides up to 25 Mbps of bandwidth to the desktop for up to 48 users per 8285 and gives them access to a high speed server Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 39 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Floor See fle Bly ae e Floor al E SS SE da er oo E AEE Floor S k m A e O E E e A Server Basement Figure 13 8285 Low Cost Configuration Implementation The second example shows a building with 8285s on floors and in the basement The backbone and server are working at 155 Mbps By ordering an 8285 model OOP it is possible to create an ATM network at a very attractive price since it provides both the base unit and 12 ATM25 workstation adapters at a special bundled price 40 AT Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Up to Up to 12 ATM25 36 additional users in ATM25 users in Base Unit Expansion Chassis ATM Campus Backbone 155 Mbps ele eller BPG r th IE AG GS ee eee Figure 14 8285 with ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Modules as an Access Switch
191. ed to the ATM network As an LE client the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module is able to find the correct ATM destination to set up the connection and to switch LAN traffic to that destination on behalf of a LAN endstation It is self learning meaning that it is able to discover its ATM partners and to establish connections on an as needed basis Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 61 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 7 4 Association between IP and MAC Address The ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module can be reached via four LAN ports and or one ATM port but it has only a single IP address that is assigned to it at the time of configuration This IP address will be associated with the first port on the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module that connects to a network successfully If more than one port is configured for the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module there will be a race condition to determine which port is associated with the IP address The MAC address of the port associated with the IP address will be used in the response to the ARP requests sent to the IP address of the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module regardless of the port on which the ARP request is received If the port which is associated with the IP address of the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module becomes disabled say the cable is disconnected the IP to MAC address association will remain unchanged This means that the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module will still respond to ARP requests wi
192. een IBM 8285 and Nways Campus Manager ATM station The requirements for the connection is as follows Either Nways Campus Manager ATM directly attaches an ATM network to the IBM 8285 or attaches a legacy LAN via an ATM bridge router The following protocols are supported between the IBM 8285 and the ATM edge device the Nways Campus Manager ATM workstation or the ATM bridge router The same protocol should be supported on both ends CIP RFC1577 Ethernet DIX Ethernet or IEEE 802 3 LAN Emulation Forum Compliant LAN Emulation V1 0 Token Ring LAN Emulation Forum Compliant LAN Emulation V1 0 m Note As no Forum Compliant LAN Emulation driver is currently available for the AIX environment the Nways Campus Manager ATM station should attach a legacy LAN and have the connection via an ATM bridge router that supports Forum Compliant LAN Emulation when Forum Compliant LAN Emulation is used Software Requirements AIX V4 1 4 or AIX V4 2 for Campus Manager ATM AIX V4 1 3 V4 1 4 or AIX V4 2 for Campus Manager LAN and Router and Bridge Manager AIX Windows Environment 6000 V11R5 In order to have drag and drop functions working properly under AIX V3 2 5 the PTF U442598 x11rte obj and U441397 x11rte motif1 2 are required OSF Motif Version 1 2 IBM SystemView NetView for AIX V3R1 V4R1 Server Client with latest PTFs namely With NetView for AIX V3 PTF U444911 is required With NetVi
193. ees only ocInvModEntry 8 ocInvModMfrDate OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 6 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The date in yymmdd format that this module was manufactured If the instance value is unknown N A will be returned ocInvModEntry 9 ocInvModNotePad OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 256 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Note pad area reserved for the module This area contains information pertaining to the module such as service or hardware upgrade information If the instance value is unknown N A will be returned ocInvModEntry 10 Chassis related Traps sent by the 8260 ATM agent Traps are defined using the conventions in RFC 1215 chassisSlotDown TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node DESCRIPTION This trap indicates that a module is down Usually this trap is sent when the module has been removed Sometimes this trap is sent when management communications with this module have been broken In this case it may not be possible to distinguish between a removed and a failed module 102 chassisSlotUp TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node DESCRIPTION This trap indicates that a module is up Usually this trap is sent when the module is inserted into the hub Sometimes this trap is sent when management communications have been restored to a module where they had previously been broken 103 chassisEnvironment TRAP T
194. en to Check the LANE Registration 141 The Sample Console Screen to Check the LANE Registration 142 NetView for AIX Root Submap aoaaa aa 157 ATM Campus Submap 0 0002 ee ee 158 ATM Campus Submap 0 0 00 a 159 IBM 8285 ATM Node View Star 02000 4 160 IBM 8285 Node Profile Panel 2 2 2 161 IBM 8285 Node Configuration Panel 0 162 IBM 8285 Device View 2 2 0020002002058 163 IBM 8285 Node Call Logging Panel 166 IBM 8285 Node LAN Emulation Panel 0 166 ELAN View 20 028 ees owe Gn ee ee Re ee gl eee a A a 167 Changing Administrator Password 173 Changing User Password 0 22048 174 Changing the Terminal Baud Rate 2 2 174 Changing the Terminal Data Bits 2 20 2 174 Changing the Terminal Parity 175 Changing the Terminal Stop Bits 175 Changing the Terminal Prompt 175 Disabling the Terminal Auto Hangup 0 175 Changing the Terminal Timeout aaa aa aaa 176 Saving the Terminal Settings 0000 176 Showing the Terminal Settings 00 176 Output from Show Terminal Command 176 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Tabl
195. enerate an error on the port e Ethernet Features Support 12 10Base T RJ 45 MDI X ports using standard UTP category 3 4 or 5 cabling or STP cabling Note When using STP cabling the patch cables at the switch port and at the workstation port should have an impedance matching balun Have either two UFC slots 2 slot modules or four UFC slots 3 slot modules which can contain any combination of the following UFCs 4 port Ethernet 10Base T UFC This UFC adds an additional four switched Ethernet ports to the module Interface RJ45 e Cabling STP UTP categories 3 4 and 5 3 port Ethernet 10Base FL UFC This UFC enables switching between Ethernet segments that are physically distant up to 2 kilometers away from the module Interface ST e Cabling Multimode fiber 1 port Ethernet 100BaseT UFC This UFC provides one 100BaseT Ethernet port for a connection to a 100BaseT backbone segment or directly to a LAN station or server equipped with a 100BaseT Ethernet adapter e Interface RJ45 e Cabling STP UTP categories 3 4 and 5 1 port Ethernet 100BaseFx UFC 74 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only This UFC provides one 100BaseFx Ethernet port for a connection to a 100BaseFx backbone segment or directly to a LAN station or server equipped with a 100BaseFx Ethernet adapter as far as 2 km away e Interface ST e Cabling
196. er of release retries as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 14 atmQ2931RestartRetry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Number of restart retries as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 15 atmQ2931StatusRetry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION Number of status retries as defined in the ATM UNI Specification atmQ2931ConfEntry 16 This table defines the Q2931 statistics atmQ2931StatsTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmQ2931StatsEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains statistics for the Q2931 protocol atmQ2931 2 atmQ2931StatsEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmQ2931StatsEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of atmQ2931ConfTable Each entry corresponds to a pair of ATM interface signalling channel A signalling channel is uniquely defined on each interface by the VPI and VCI values allocated to it INDEX atmQ2931StatsIndex atmQ2931StatsVpi atmQ2931StatsVci atmQ2931StatsTable 1 AtmQ2931StatsEntry SEQUENCE atmQ2931Stats Index INTEGER atmQ2931StatsVpi INTEGER atmQ2931StatsVci INTEGER atmQ29310utCal lAttempts Counter atmQ29310utCal1InProgress Gaug
197. erpret motion and to provide improved compression and to transport multiple different audio compression data streams Table 4 on page 52 provides a convenient comparison of the two technologies Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 51 Feature This soft copy for use by IBM employees only MPEG 2 Table 4 Video Distribution Module Comparison of MPEG 2 and Motion JPEG M JPEG System Layer Provides audio and video synchronization No system layer that is no standard synchronization method Record on Servers Yes Must record video and audio separately leading to synchronization problems Motion Compression Yes No Standard Auto Yes No Compression Compression Algorithm DCT DCT MPEG 1 Compatibility System layer can carry No MPEG 1 MPEG 2 equipment downward compatible with MPEG 1 Private Data for Closed Yes No Captioning Bandwidth Requirements Frame Less 20 Mbps for High Quality Video than 18 Mbps l P Frame Less than 12 Mbps IPB Frame Less than 6 8 Mbps ATM Compatibility MPEG 2 Transport Streams can be carried over AAL5 and can take advantage of variable bit rate services Requires circuit switched constant bit rate AAL1 services for accurate voice and video synchronization Standardization MPEG 2 video and MPEG 1 audio encoding are standard H 310 encompasses MPEG 2 and defines operational specifications for MPEG 2 over ATM video conferencing 4 6 2 C
198. erved for modules that are not power manageable This value 0 is always returned ocPowerOutputEntry 6 Module power configuration ocPowerSlotTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OcPowerS1lotEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A table that contains power management information for each non empty payload slot in the hub Note that for multi slot IBM 8260 modules there is one point of power management contact and control Hence only the leftmost slot is represented in this table ocPower 3 ocPowerSlotEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OcPowerS1lotEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A list of power management information for each payload slot in the hub containing an 8260 module INDEX ocPowerSlotIndex ocPowerSlotTable 1 OcPowerSlotEntry SEQUENCE ocPowerS1otIndex INTEGER ocPowerSlotClass INTEGER ocPowerSlotAdminStatus INTEGER 268 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ocPowerS1otOperStatus INTEGER ocPowerSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The unique slot number that identifies the module associated with this power entry ocPowerSlotEntry 1 ocPowerSlotClass OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER one 1 two 2 three 3 four 4 five 5 six 6 seven 7 eight 8 nine 9 ten 10
199. es Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 153 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Global download of code updates for IBM ATM switches bridges and concentrators multiple selection list from EUI or flat file e Search facility Leverage of ObjectStore database used already by the Nways Campus Manager LAN 8 3 2 Prerequisites This section lists the recommended hardware and software requirements for the installation and operation of Nways Campus Manager ATM 154 Automatic search of ATM devices on miscellaneous criterion such as IP address ATM address user name and ELAN name Same end user interface as Nways Campus Manager LAN Hardware Requirements ISC System 6000 POWERstations or POWERservers minimum 50 MHz CPU with the following options An IBM compatible mouse Swap space twice the amount of RAM For a machine with 96 MB of memory for example the recommendation is 192 MB of free disk space for paging space A 256 color 8 bit plane display device of at least 16 inches A display graphic card that supports 1280 1024 8 pixels resolution which is set to this mode If your display is configured for 1024 760 8 pixels push buttons at the bottom of some panels may not be displayed At least 96 MB of RAM if you do not install LAN Network Manager At least 128 MB of RAM if you install LAN Network Manager The exact amount of RAM depends on the size of the network you are managing and the number of other appl
200. es 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 Control Point Levels Summary of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup SWITCH sg Gee od 4 ale come ath b Wen buen RAL d Bybee Hew amp bebe Bae a oo ATM Buses Implemented in the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup SWALC Diese da a cb hn cas ese tee Gee Spe cee argo Re Ge tad a fi datos Gee eee Ea ATM 155 Mbps Media Module Supported I O Cards Video Distribution Module Comparison of MPEG 2 and Motion JPEG VC Values by Port for VDM Module VP 0 ATM Physical Interface Support 2 04 A02 WAN I O Card VPD Part Numbers A Comparison of 8285 Token Ring LAN Switch Modules A Comparison of 8285 Ethernet LAN Switch Modules Bandwidth Improvement with Token Ring LAN Switch Module Bandwidth Improvement with Ethernet LAN Switch Module Supported Connection Type by the A CPSW Module LANE Information Field Lengths Types Mafie arnod a pees Pe Oe OS ee ee ee ee eet Traffic Management Functions Support Environmental Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup SWIteh ue os Sottero ts sae ch rae amp dana ont Oto Ere eck Gone ae Pode athe Gorge cadens da S Mechanical Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup WIECH Ai 2s Sap ae
201. es Figure 20 Figure 21 on page 55 and Figure 22 on page 56 show some ways the Video Distribution Module can be used with the 8285 switch Up to 12 Up to ATM25 8 NTSC PAL Video Server users devices 155 Mbps Figure 20 Video Distribution Module Workgroup Configuration The first example a workgroup configuration shows how you might set up a very cost effective stand alone workgroup providing video distribution from a video server to a group of users with video connections and or TV monitors ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Up to 12 Up to ATM25 8 NTSC PAL users devices 8300 Video Access Node g ATM 155 25 oPO 0BO 000 0GO of 090 00 of ATM Backbone Network Figure 21 Video Distribution Module for Campus Video Distribution The second example shows how you can connect the workgroup into the backbone network to access additional video resources such as TV feeds and video servers such as the IBM 8300 Video Access Node Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 55 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Up to 8285 with VDM 12 ATM25 WAN port p to 8 NTSC PAL d
202. es inserted in slots that are attached to the ATM switch physical 3 portEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX PortEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of portTable Each entry corresponds to a port that belongs to an ATM module This module must be inserted in a slot that is attached to the ATM switch INDEX portSlotIndex portIndex portTable 1 PortEntry SEQUENCE portS1lotIndex INTEGER port Index INTEGER port Interface INTEGER portSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 64 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The slot number of this port s module portEntry 1 portIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 64 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The port number for this module portEntry 2 portInterface OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The interface number of this port portEntry 3 ATM interfaces 206 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only interfaceTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF InterfaceEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION For each ATM port this table maps the MIB II interface index for this port with its physical slot and port numbers physical 4 interfaceEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX InterfaceEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DES
203. ese settings is discussed in A 1 5 How to Change Terminal Settings on page 174 The command line interface has the following characteristics e The commands are not case sensitive The system interprets ABC uppercase the same as abc lowercase e The 8285 command line accepts abbreviated command input which enables you to enter a command by typing the minimum number of characters that uniquely identifies the command followed by the space bar Pressing the space bar automatically fills the rest of the command e The system prompts you if you forget to enter a mandatory command e To get help simply type on the command line Also when entering a command you get the system to display the next available options by entering Copyright IBM Corp 1996 171 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e All the commands can be abnormally terminated by pressing the Ctrl and C keys simultaneously The following table is a quick reference to the procedures required to configure the ATM subsystem of the 8285 Some of them are mandatory others are recommended Table 37 8285 Configurations SET Commands Quick Reference List Procedure 8285 Commands Configure user and administrator passwords SET DEVICE PASSWORD Configure 8285 terminal settings Configure 8285 device configuration Configure 8285 ATM address SET TERMINAL BAUD SET TERMINAL DATA_BITS SET TERMINAL PARITY SET TERMINAL STOP_BITS SE
204. esignated LES ATM address the following options are offered Use a pre defined LES ATM Address If you don t have the LECS on the ELAN you have to specify the LES ATM address in each LEC definition When the 8285 LEC is attached to this type of ELAN the SET DEVICE LAN EMULATION _CLIENT command with the parameter NO_LECS_WITH_LES followed by the LES ATM address is used to pre define the LES ATM address Use a pre defined LECS ATM address If you have the LECS on the ELAN but don t want to use dynamic address resolution you can specify the LECS ATM address on each LEC definition When the 8285 LEC is attached to this type of ELAN the SET DEVICE LAN _EMULATION_CLIENT command with the parameter NO_LES_WITH_LECS followed by the LECS ATM address is used to pre define the LECS ATM address Use a dynamic LECS ATM address ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only It is not necessary to pre define the LECS address on each LEC definition if you have a LECS since the mechanisms by which the LECs dynamically use a specific ATM address of the LECS are standardized When the 8285 LEC is attached to this type of ELAN the SET DEVICE LAN _EMULATION_CLIENT command with the parameter NO_LES_WITH_LECS followed by NONE is used to get the LECS ATM address dynamically The IBM 8285 will search for the LECS ATM address first using ILMI If it does not find it then it will
205. evices ATM public Backbone Network 8285 with VDM 25 Mbps port Attachment Figure 22 Video Distribution Module with ATM WAN for Enterprise Video Distribution The third example shows how you might use the VDM module with the ATM WAN Module to provide access to video resources throughout the enterprise using publicly available ATM WAN services accessed with the ATM WAN Module at speeds from E3 to OC 3 STM 1 56 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 7 ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module The ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module is a two slot module that functions as a multiport bridge providing a simple way to connect shared media LAN segments to a high speed ATM backbone This is an ideal way to begin a migration to an ATM backbone especially for those customers running flat or bridged networks today since it is completely transparent to your shared media users The main features of this module are Provides four external ports for interconnection to either Ethernet IEEE 802 3 and DIX V2 or token ring IEEE 802 5 LANs This module does not allow the mixing of various LAN types Provides media speed bridging between all four LAN ports even when configured for full duplex token ring Provides a single UNI 3 0 compatible ATM interface to the ATM backplane of the 8285 Expansion Chassis The ATM port supports clients for either Forum compliant LAN Em
206. ew Server for AIX V4 PTF U444912 is required ObjectStore 4 0 2 Runtime shipped with Campus Manager Suite Campus Manager LAN and Campus Manager ATM packages is required for Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 155 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8250 and 8260 8285 Hub Manager Router and Bridge Manager Router and Bridge Manager FDDI Application LAN Network Manager LNM OS 2 Agent Application LAN Network Manager SNMP Bridge Application LAN Network Manager SNMP Token Ring Application LAN Network Manager ATM Manager and LAN Emulation Manager e The following is required for Router and Bridge Manager Mid Level Manager Version 2 3 or higher Mid Level Manager is shipped with the Campus Manager Suite and Campus Manager LAN packages For the server AIX V4 1 3 V4 1 4 or V4 2 NetView Version 4 1 server For all clients AIX V4 1 3 V4 1 4 or V4 2 NetView Version 4 1 client e DynaText Browser V2 3 or later shipped with the Campus Manager Suite Campus Manager LAN and Campus Manager ATM packages e For PSMs the additional prerequisite software you will need is Management Application Transporter MAT V2 1 For NetView for AIX V3 PTF U444148 For NetView for AIX V4 PTF U444149 8 3 3 Using Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX with IBM 8285 156 This chapter describes how to manage an IBM 8285 ATM network using Nways Campus Manager for AI
207. f the module that is used by this interface interfaceEntry 11 interfaceClocking OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER internal 1 external 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The source of the bit clock used for data transmission When set to external the source is the clock received from the line The clocking can be modified only when the port is disabled The clocking can only be modified on 155 Mbits ports for which the atm access is UNI or NNI interfaceEntry 12 interfaceScrambling OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER off 1 cell 2 frame 3 cell and frame 4 cell in receive only 5 cell in transmit only 6 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Whether data scrambling is used when transmitting on this 212 A Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only line Scrambling may be applied at the cell level at the frame level or at cell and frame level The scrambling configuration can only be modified for a wan interface cell in receive only applies only for a wan interface In this case the cells are descrambled when received and are not scrambled when transmitted cell in transmit only can only be set for a wan interface In this case the cells are not descrambled when received and are scrambled when transmitted interfaceEntry 13 interfaceAvailableBandwidth OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER A
208. f this ATM port interfaceEntry 3 interfaceConnector OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unknown 1 internal 2 mic 3 sc Duplex 4 monomode 5 db 9 6 rj45 7 bnc 8 db 15 9 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Whether this port is an internal port on the backplane or an external connector interfaceEntry 4 interfaceAdminState OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER enabled 1 disabled 2 wrap reply 3 wrap far end 4 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The administrative state for this port When set to disabled no ATM traffic can pass on this port all connections SVC and PVC are cleared When set to wrap reply this interface is wrapped so that 208 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only all the traffic received from the attached line is sent back on this line If the interface state is not changed it will automatically go back to the disabled state after one minute When interfaceAdminState is equal to wrap far end then the interface located on the other side of the link is now wrapped wrap reply can only be set for 155 and wan ports wrap far end cannot be set interfaceEntry 5 interfaceOperState OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unknown 1 disabled nosignal 2 disabled idle 3 no signal 4 idle 5 in service 6 pvcOnly 7 failing internal 8 mi
209. fault password for the administrator so you can prevent unauthorized users from being able to log on to the 8285 to view or modify your ATM network configuration Figure 58 shows how you can change the administrator password For security purposes the values you enter are not displayed on the screen 8285 gt set device password administrator 8285 gt Enter current administrator password New password Re enter password Password changed Figure 58 Changing Administrator Password Appendix A 8285 ATM Control Point Commands 173 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Note 8285 passwords are case sensitive You can also change the user password Figure 59 shows an example of how it is changed az ame 8285 gt set device password user Enter current administrator password New password Re enter password Password changed 8285 gt Figure 59 Changing User Password A 1 4 Resetting the Password to Factory Default If you forget the administrator password for the 8285 you can use the following procedure to reset the password to the factory default 1 Enter FORCE at the password prompt 2 Select the ATM Reset button on the 8285 front panel A 1 5 How to Change Terminal Settings 174 You can customize the terminal settings of the 8285 if you are logged on as administrator The following commands are provided e Set Terminal Baud This command allows you to set t
210. from Gakusyuin University in Tokyo Japan His areas of expertise include traditional SNA networking legacy LAN protocols token ring Ethernet FDDI and campus ATM protocols and related products Thanks to the following people for their invaluable contributions to this project Aroldo Yuji Yai Systems Management and Networking ITSO Center Raleigh Ange Aznar IBM La Gaude Our grateful acknowledgement for their contribution to this work by the following IBM La Gaude Product Engineering people Benoit Panier Michel Leblais Pierre Olivier Martin Olivier Caillau Bernard Putois Jacques Baroghel Eric Montagnon Comments Welcome We want our redbooks to be as helpful as possible Should you have any comments about this or other redbooks please send us a note at the following address redbook vnet ibm com Your comments are important to us Preface Xili This soft copy for use by IBM employees only X V ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chapter 1 Introduction to ATM Networks This book is designed to help you to get the most effective use of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch as you implement an ATM network Before going into further details about the 8285 however it might be useful to review the basics of ATM networking addressing and data flows 1 1 ATM Fundamentals Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM is a high performance network tech
211. g an IBM 8260 module the value enable 1 causes the module to be power enabled provided sufficient power is available The value disable 2 causes the module to be power disabled and is not allowed for a slot containing the IBM 8260 agent to prevent the user from losing hub manageability The slot will not receive power untill this object is set to the the value enable 1 ocPowerSlotEntry 3 ocPowerSlotOperStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER enabled 1 Slot power is enabled disabled 2 Slot power is disabled insufficient power 3 Slot power up not possible enabled always 4 Slot power is enabled always ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current operational slot power status This object will have the value enabled 1 if the slot contains an IBM 8260 module and is actually power enabled This object will have the value disabled 2 if the slot contains an IBM 8260 module and is actually power disabled In this case the slot is ineligible for power until ocPowerSlotAdminStatus for the slot is set to enable 1 This object will have the value insufficient power 3 if the slot is eligible to receive power but due to power constraints is not power enabled When sufficient power becomes available the slot will become power enabled and this object will then have the value enabled 1 This object will have the value enabled always 4 for a slot containing the IBM 8260 agent For th
212. g on whether it is seen in the up or down stream vpXConnectEntry 6 Neighbor Devices neighbor OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 5 220 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only nbrTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF NbrEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains basic characteristics on adjacent ATM devices attached to this switch neighbor 1 nbrEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX NbrEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of neighborTable Each entry corresponds to a port that belongs to an ATM module This module must be inserted in a slot that is attached to the ATM switch INDEX nbrIndex nbrTable 1 NbrEntry SEQUENCE local Index INTEGER nbrIpAddress1 IpAddress nbrIpAddress2 IpAddress nbrAtmAddress AtmAddress nbrIndex INTEGER nbrDescriptor DisplayString nbrOid OBJECT IDENTIFIER nbrName DisplayString nbrLocation DisplayString trunkId INTEGER localIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The interface number for the port represented by this entry nbrEntry 1 nbrIpAddress1 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX IpAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION One of the IP addresses of the ATM SNMP agent of the node attached to the port slot defined by this entry When
213. ge Can be anchors to other P or B frames Bidirectionally Predictive Frame B Frame Exploits temporal and spatial redundancy to compress video frame Must reference an anchor frame Cannot be an anchor to another frame A typical encoded frame sequence might look like the one in Figure 19 on page 51 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only References A Time B frame B T DNN B fra B frame a eee _ i i B frame Figure 19 Typical MEPG 2 Picture Sequence Showing Picture Types Since the anchor frame is sent only intermittently and only changes are sent for the intervening frames significant bandwidth savings can be realized with minimum degradation of picture quality It should be noted however that response time may be unacceptably affected in some situations when using full IPB compression This can be remedied by using just and P frames resulting in similar delays to M JPEG but requiring much less bandwidth 4 6 1 4 Audio Compression The MPEG 2 system multiplex layer allows for various audio compression standards to be used and the definition of a standard compression scheme ensures compatibility between vendors In comparison M JPEG does not include an audio standard Audio is transmitted separately from the video 4 6 1 5 MPEG Summary MPEG 2 is superior to M JPEG because of its ability to multiplex and to synchronize to int
214. ght one 4 8 1 A02 WAN ATM Physical Interface Supported The following table lists the ATM physical interfaces with WAN module interfaces supported Table 6 Page 1 of 2 ATM Physical Interface Support Layer Rate Mbps Cable Coding A02 WAN Support OC 48 2488 No OC 24 1244 SMF STS 24 No OC 12 622 08 SMF STS 12c No Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 67 Ta This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ble 6 Page 2 of 2 ATM Physical Interface Support Layer Rate Mbps Cable Coding A02 WAN Support STS 12c 622 08 UTP 5 4 pairs No OC 3 STM 1 155 52 MMF SMF NRZI Yes STS 3c 155 52 Yes STS 3c 155 52 UTP 5 STP NRZI No 155 155 52 MMF 8B 10B No 155 155 52 STP 8B 10B No TAXI 100 4B 5B No STS 1 51 84 UTP 3 No DS 3 T3 44 7 Coax BNC Yes E3 34 4 Coax BNC Yes Note 1 T1 1 544 Bipolar AMI NRZI No 25 25 6 UTP STP 4B 5B No Note 1 Country Homologation dependency 4 8 2 VPD Installation Considerations Each I O card ships with a special VPD vital product data PROM Programmable Read Only Memory chip Before you can install the A02 WAN module you must attach the I O cards and install the VPD chips Details on the installation process can be found in BM 8260 8285 ATM WAN Module Installation and Users Guide The following are a few additional considerations 68 The VPD PROM sockets are next to their respective I O cards That is the left or top socket i
215. h Description Value Total bandwidth per an ATM module in the expansion unit Total reserved bandwidth for All ports in the base unit Total bandwidth for all ports in the base unit 212 Mbps 256 Mbps x 53 64 212 Mbps 180 Mbps 212 Mbps x 85 Total reserved bandwidth per an ATM module in the expansion unit 180 Mbps Maximum reserved bandwidth per an ATM port 85 of physical port speed 6 2 1 3 Integrated LES BUS Capacity The IBM 8285 can integrate the LES BUS server functions in the control point This section describes the capacity information when the function is configured Maximum Number of LES BUS Instances When the LAN Emulation protocol is used each LES BUS instance will define an Emulated LAN ELAN The IBM 8285 can configure two LES BUSs instances and therefore two ELANs To interconnect these ELANs together requires an ATM router such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server Maximum Number of LECs The number of LECs can impact LES performance for example during the initial registration process and during the MAC to ATM address mapping process Table 24 on page 100 shows the summary of the IBM 8285 integrated LES BUS capacity Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 99 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 24 LES BUS Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Description Value Maximum Number of LES BUS Instances or ELANs 2H
216. h are the endpoints of the PVP or you may leave it to the 8285 to select the VPI VCls which are allocated If you choose the latter the 8285 will increment the highest previously allocated VPI and check to see if this value is not already in use When the VPI value reaches the upper bound of VPI 15 the next VPI value wraps to 0 For intermediate links on a PVP it is always up to the 8285 to allocate the VPI values using the previous algorithm 5 1 9 How Point to Multipoint Connections Are Supported To support point to multipoint connections one cell destined for multiple ports occupies only one cell location in the shared switch memory However multiple output queues one per media module point to that one cell location When the multicast cell arrives at the top of the output queue it is sent to the output module Within the output module if the point to multipoint connection spans over multiple ports then the multicast cell is replicated as required The switch keeps track of when the last output port has transmitted the cell thereby allowing its memory locations to be freed This technique minimizes the amount of memory space required for multicast messages Chapter 5 8285 ATM Network Specifications 87 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 5 1 10 8285 LAN Emulation Specifications 88 The 8285 is able alone to manage small LAN emulation networks Mechanisms and characteristics supported are 5 1 10 1 LAN Emulation
217. hare a common CAP CAD This is normally a module such as an ATM media module or the ATM Control Point and Switch module of the IBM 8260 However by this definition the IBM 8285 Base Unit can be considered a blade or module as well since its ports share a common CAP CAD Figure 11 on page 24 shows the internal cell format used in the IBM 8285 Note the internal cell format will be changed in future releases but the concept should remain similar and able to be referenced Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 23 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 111111111122222222223 3 01234567890123456789012345678901 TB TBE LCBAu SB LCBAuh 4 RH 8 byte NBA F1 F2 GFC VPI VCI PT CL ATM Header l l l L 4 byte without HEC ATM payload 48 byte Future Use l TB Target Blade TBE Target Blade Extension LCBAul Leaf Control Block Address up inbound lower port LCBAuh Leaf Control Block Address up inbound higher port NBA Next Buffer Address Fils Format Field 1st F2 Format Field 2nd GFC Generic Flow Control VPI Virtual Path Identifier VCI Virtual Channel Identifier PT Payload Type CL Cell Loss Priority HEC Header Error Control Figure 11 Internal Cell Format of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 3 2 1 2 Switching without the Switch Chip When no expansion chassis is connected the IBM 8285
218. he CP SFE In addition each ATM module also uses CAP CAD and SFE components but in two sets an inbound set CAP_Up CAD_Up and SFE_Up and an outbound set CAP_Down CAD_Down and SFE_Down Note that this slightly different from the 8285 switch which has the additional CP SFE and which connects CAD_up directly to CAD_down when operating without an expansion unit Figure 10 on page 21 shows the hardware architecture of the IBM 8285 Base Unit when connected to the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4817481705 Figure 10 Hardware Architecture of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base and Expansion Unit When the IBM 8285 expansion unit is installed its switch chip called a switch on a chip becomes the primary cell switch for the 8285 system The CAD_up and CAD_down devices in the base unit and in any ATM modules link directly to this switch Another way of saying this is that the link between the base unit s CAD_up and CAD_down is disabled and all cells even port to port within the base unit or within an individual ATM module are switched through the switch on a chip Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 21 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only m Additional Information The switch on a chip is a scalable non blocking shared buffer switching module that
219. he baud rate at which the 8285 will communicate with the attached console or modem The following example shows you how to change the baud rate to 2400 bps E set terminal baud 2400 Figure 60 Changing the Terminal Baud Rate e Set Terminal Data_Bits This command lets you configure the 8285 to the number of data bits used by the attached console For example the following command allows you to change the number of data bits to 7 sz set terminal data_bits 7 Figure 61 Changing the Terminal Data Bits e Set Terminal Parity This command lets you configure the 8285to the same parity used by the attached console The following example shows you how to change the parity bit to even ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only E set terminal parity even Figure 62 Changing the Terminal Parity Note When you change the settings for the baud data_bits or parity parameters a mismatch will result between your ASCII terminal and the 8285 This mismatch will result in you not being able to access the 8285 until you change the configuration of your terminal e Set Terminal Stop_Bits This command allows you to configure the 8285 to the number of stop bits used by the attached console or modem The following example shows you how to change the number of stop bits to 2 szes set terminal stop_bits 2 Figure 63 Changing the Terminal Stop Bits
220. he status should be UP NO ACTIVITY which means physical activity isn t detected on the port ATM Connection Parameters Check if the ATM connection parameters used in the switch and the device are matched such as Connection type SVC PVC VPC VCC number UNI Version 3 0 3 1 4 0 Service type CBR VBR UBR ABR Required and available bandwidth if RB connection If this information is mismatched the status should be UP NOT IN SERVICE which means physical activity is detected on the port but that the device cannot access to the network 7 2 4 2 Check the LANE Registration When the physical layer connection is established then the device requests to register with a LANE network You can check the status from the IBM 8285 console using SHOW LAN_EMUL SERVERS and SHOW DEVICE commands Figure 46 and Figure 47 on page 142 show a sample console screen when the SHOW LAN _EMUL SERVERS command is issued E gt 8285 gt show lan_emul servers 1 H LAN Emulation Server 1 Status Running LAN type Ethernet Actual ELAN name IBM_ETHERNET_LAN1 nn Desired ELAN name Actual max frame size 1516 Desired max frame size 1516 ATM address 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 01 02 Max number of clients 64 Current number of operational clients 3 H Local 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 01 00 po
221. he subject line blank ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only IBM Redbook Order Form Please send me the following Title Order Number Quantity e Please put me on the mailing list for updated versions of the IBM Redbook Catalog First name Last name Company Address City Postal code Country Telephone number Telefax number VAT number e Invoice to customer number e Credit card number Credit card expiration date Card issued to Signature We accept American Express Diners Eurocard Master Card and Visa Payment by credit card not available in all countries Signature mandatory for credit card payment DO NOT SEND CREDIT CARD INFORMATION OVER THE INTERNET How To Get ITSO Redbooks 283 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 284 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Glossary A AAL ATM Adaptation Layer The layer that adapts user data to from the ATM network by adding removing headers and segmenting reassembling the data into from cells AAL 5 ATM adaptation Layer 5 One of several standard AALs AAL 5 was designed for data communications and is used by LAN Emulation and classical IP ABR Available Bit Rate ATM Forum Service category in relation to traffic Management on ATM networks Use bandwidth available in the running network after
222. hen select Run This will open the Run dialog box Place the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration Utility Installation disk in your floppy drive Type in the dialog box the command that will run the install program If your floppy disk goes in your Drive A type A INSTALL If your floppy disk goes in your Drive B type B INSTALL Leave the Run Minimized box un selected and click the OK command button or press Enter 3 After a brief moment you will be prompted by a dialog box to enter the desired location for the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration Utility This is the location that you want your Configuration files to be placed It will suggest a drive and directory of C IBM8281 If you want the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration program files installed on a different drive or directory just click the pointer to the right of the characters you want to change backspace over the ones you want to erase then type in the new designation 4 The install program will unpack the necessary files and place them into your directory The status of the operation will be displayed as the setup program does this work Appendix D Hints and Tips for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 185 186 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 5 The ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration Utility will be automatically added to the program manager 6 The setup program will notify
223. hen the first 4 byte block of a cell gets transferred one of the control lines is raised to indicate the beginning of a cell e The SFE forwards each 4 byte block of the cell to CAD_Up which stores it in CAD_Store using the address of the next cell assembly buffer prepared previously However CAD_Up skips the first 8 bytes which are reserved for the routing header before it stores the first Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 25 26 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 byte block A 4 bit register pointing to the lower address of where the next 4 byte block should go is updated and is used as a displacement pointer from the cell buffer address f CAD_Up writes source port SP in RH When the cell is completely assembled in the CAD_Store CAD_Up puts the cell buffer address in a general queue to allow for cell assembly ending almost at same time one cycle of SFE_Up CAD_Up interface Each cell will then be dequeued on a first in first out basis from the general queue and CAD_Up sends a copy of the first 4 byte block and the source port SP to CAP_Up CAD_Up prepares the address of the next assembly cell buffer for this port The address is determined from the port number which indicates a register pointing to where these 4 bytes should be placed This register is also updated 2 Prepare the routing header RH a The first 4 byte block of a cell is the first 4 bytes of the ATM cell header which contain
224. ically routed frame service specific connection oriented protocol service specific convergence sublayer switch to switch interface synchronous transfer mode shielded twisted pair switched virtual circuit This soft copy for use by IBM employees only SVN TA TAXI TCP TCP IP TDM TE TFTP TRS TP UAA UBR UDP UFC ULEC switched virtual networking terminal adapter transparent asynchronous transmitter receiver interface transmission control protocol Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol time division multiplexing terminal equipment trivial file transfer protocol topology and route selection twisted pair Wiring universally administered address unspecified bit rate user datagram protocol universal feature card unknown LAN emulation client UNI UTP VBR ve vcc VCI VLAN VP VPC VPCI VPI WAN user to network interface user node interface unshielded twisted pair variable bit rate virtual circuit X 25 virtual connection Frame Relay virtual channel ATM virtual circuit connection X 25 virtual channel connection ATM virtual channel identifier virtual LAN virtual path virtual path connection virtual path connection identifier virtual path identifier wide area network List of Abbreviations 293 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 294 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM e
225. ications and X stations you may be supporting At most 280 MB of free disk space if all components are installed For Router and Bridge Manager you require the following At least 60 MB of disk space for database files Default location is usr rabmv2 At least 30 MB of disk space for program files for the server Location must be usr rabmve2 At least 20 MB of disk space for program files for the client Location must be usr rabmv2 For the server you must have at least 32 MB of free disk space in the tmp file system for the ObjectStore cache You can change the location of this cache by setting the OS _CACHE_DIR and OS_COMMSEG_DIR environment variables to another directory Both variables must be set in the same directory For the client you must have at least 16 MB of free disk space for in the tmp file system for the ObjectStore cache You can change the location of this cache by setting the OS _CACHE_DIR and OS_COMMSEG_DIR environment variables to another directory Both variables must be set in the same directory ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ObjectStore requires 8 MB of paging space beyond the paging space requirements of any existing applications One of the following to install the software 4mm tape drive 8mm tape drive 1 4 inch tape drive CD ROM drive A physical connection for running TCP IP betw
226. ide management of the ATM modules in the IBM 8260 and of the legacy LANs via ATM bridge routers Coupling involves the topology integration used by each application Although Nways Campus Manager ATM is not mandatory to configure and set up an IBM 8285 ATM network it is highly recommended because the information and functions that it provides will make it significantly easier to work with the ATM network The new version of Nways Campus Manager ATM V2 which provides some enhancements for IBM 8285 ATM network management was announced in October 1996 and is now available in addition to V1 8 3 1 1 Nways Campus Manager ATM V1 for AIX Nways Campus Manager ATM V1 is composed of the following components e ATM Campus Manager Application ATM Campus Manager application is the functionality sets provided by the former ATM Campus Manager product It provides a graphical user interface for controlling ATM resources such as IBM 8285 8260 8281 and 8282 It allows you to manage your ATM environment from a single management station based on graphic views showing network topology views with easy to identify and color coded icons e Management Application Transporter MAT MAT is shipped as a PTF for NetView for AIX and provides the framework to install and run product specific modules PSMs to manage subsystems using device specific functions e Product specific modules PSMs A PSM allows you to have device specific management by device spec
227. ific graphic views PSMs are made based on object oriented technology The original PSMs are easy to transport different platform Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 149 150 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The functional highlights of Nways Campus Manager ATM V1 are as follows ATM Network Topology Management The Nways Campus Manager ATM is fully integrated in the NetView for AIX or HP OpenView topology database This means that it is possible to navigate from NetView for AIX or HP OpenView IP map to the ATM topology map using the protocol switching function This reduces the time network operators need to perform their most current tasks and also gives status correlation among the following different domains ATM Topology Map e IP Topology Map which means ATM IP nodes correlated with ATM objects e Hub Expanded View which comes with Nways Campus Manager LAN package This means an IBM 8260 ATM node is correlated with a physical hub view from Nways Campus Manager LAN The following topology features are provided as well e Automatic discovery of ATM nodes and physical links between elements ATM nodes such as IBM 8285 8260 8281 and 8282 are automatically discovered placed in the submap and monitored When the configuration of the network changes the discovery capability indicates the changes and updates the corresponding network submap e Dynamic display of the topology hierarchy of ATM nodes and their oper
228. ilure TFTP not enabled on the server R W permissions improperly set ona UNIX server Corrupted upgrade files Enable TFTP on server and or start TFTP daemon e Login to the TFTP server e Change to the directory the upgrade files reside in e Change the file permissions using the CHMOD a r lt filename gt command Download the files again making sure that you are downloading them as binary files 5 To activate the new microcode it is necessary to swap the operational microcode with the backup microcode using the SWAP MICROCODE command and the SWAP FPGA_PICOCODE command Don t forget to SAVE ALL first as the SWAP will reset the subsystem and any unsaved changes will be lost Reminder This must be performed with No operational traffic flowing in through the 8285 Normally this operation would be done during a scheduled maintenance period Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 119 120 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8285 gt save all 8285 gt swap microcode You are about to change operational microcode version and reset the hub The saved hub configuration may be lost Are you sure Y N Y Migration allowed checking for needed FPGA swaps Some SWAP FPGA commands will be executed now Generated command SWAP FPGA 1 H Press Enter system reboots 8285 gt save all 8285 gt swap fpga_picocode 2 f You are about to change operation
229. in full duplex mode Support half or full duplex transmission on each port independently Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 71 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Support port mirroring TokenProbe or Etherprobe whereby one port can monitor any LAN port for the purposes of connecting a LAN analysis tool Support three switching modes to optimize performance 1 Cut Through Switching In this mode the switch reads in the address portion of the frame header makes a forwarding decision strictly based on destination address and forwards the header and the remainder of the packet to the destination port while the packet is still arriving This optimizes forwarding performance but does not filter out bad frames 2 Store and Forward Switching In this mode the switch reads the entire packet into a buffer and performs a full CRC check on it before forwarding good packets to the destination port This eliminates bad frames but with a greater latency 3 Adaptive Switching This feature allows the switch to run in cut through mode for high performance and low latency until the number of bad packets received surpasses a user settable threshold within a given period of time It then automatically switches to store and forward mode to avoid propagating bad packets When the number of bad packets falls to acceptable levels the switch reverts automatically to cut through mode The net result is to give the highest possi
230. in Assignments for Converter Cable P N 10H3904 Pin Assignments for Switch to Switch Crossover Cable Spare Parts and Accessories 0 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only X ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Preface This redbook provides a detailed overview of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch from both functional and operational viewpoints It provides everything you need to know to plan implement debug manage and maintain an ATM network using the 8285 switch It includes scripted and tested configuration scenarios to simplify and expedite the initial implementation and debugging and tuning guidelines to optimize the ATM network In addition it covers the very latest modules and features of the 8285 8260 family of ATM switches including the ATM WAN Module and the Video Distribution Module This book is intended for all networking personnel involved in planning implementing and or maintaining an ATM network based on the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch A working knowledge of ATM is helpful but not necessary How This Redbook Is Organized This redbook contains 296 pages It is organized as follows e Chapter 1 Introduction to ATM Networks This chapter provides an overview of ATM LAN Emulation and Classical IP networks This information provides a basis for understanding many of the
231. ing and Installing 107 108 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only First if you can access the IBM 8285 using the console interface it means the IBM 8285 microcode works fine The level and status of the IBM 8285 microcode can be checked using the SHOW DEVICE command And the SHOW MODULE command can be used to check the FPGA picocode level and status of an ATM blade Figure 37 shows the console screen when the SHOW MODULE command is issued to check the physical installation status aie 8285 gt show module all H Slot Install Connect Operation General Information 8285 gt set module 2 connected enable Slot 2 Module set 8285 gt show module all H Slot Install Connect Operation General Information 1 Y Y Y 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 2 y y Y 8285 ATM Wan module with E3 E3 Ports H 3 n n n 4 n n n 8285 gt Figure 37 Sample Screen to Check the Physical Installation Notes The SHOW MODULE command is issued to the IBM 8285 base unit that has an expansion unit with a WAN module connected to it 2 All status indicators of the Base Unit install connect and operation are Y yes but only the install status of module installed in the expansion unit is Y This is normal If you don t have the expansion unit only the first line starting with slot number 1 is displayed To change the other status indicators issue the SET MODULE command 4 The SHOW MODULE command is issued after the SET M
232. ion oriented Communication where there is a connection provided between sender and receiver which must be maintained for data to be transferred connectionless service A service which allows the transfer of information between service users without the need for end to end call establishment procedures constant bit rate service A type of telecommunication service characterized by a service bit rate specified by a constant value 285 E ELAN Emulated Local Area Network A LAN segment implemented with IBM Technology ESI End System Identifier A byte component of an ATM address F FC LANE Forum Compliant LAN Emulation ATM Forum compliance rules FPGA Field Programmable field array Module on which logic functions can be programmed IBUS Intelligent Broadcast Unknown Server A LAN Emulation optimization designed to limit the scope of unknown unicast frames sent to the BUS ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol A protocol for communicating control information over IP IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers An organization involved in establishing Local Area Network standards IETF Internet Engineering task force An organization that product Internet Specifications Interim Local Management Interface ILMI The standard part of the UNI specification for management of ATM networks ILMI uses the SNMP protocol and a special UNI MIB to provide full information on the ATM networ
233. is one video and one audio program e Supports Closed Caption data and Extended Data Services information in accordance with EIA 608 Recommended Practice for Line 21 e Supports ATM for PVC and SVC Connections using UNI 3 1 e Can receive video input from any ATM device that can access the 8285 switch via the the ATM network e Supports frame synchronization using GENLOCK inputs e Functions as an H 310 AAL 5 Receive Only Terminal ROT H 310 is an ITU standard for broadcast quality audiovisual communication over broadband networks using MPEG 2 video over high speed ATM networks The standard includes subparts such as H 262 MPEG 2 video standard H 222 0 MPEG 2 Program and Transport Stream H 222 1 MPEG 2 streams over ATM Various audio compression standards e Can be monitored but not configured via the 8285 ATM Control Point 4 6 1 MPEG Fundamentals 48 MPEG 2 is an International Telecommunication Union ITU standard for digitizing compressing and multiplexing video and audio information The predecessor to MPEG 2 is MPEG 1 which is widely used in low end video and PC software based encoding and decoding environments MPEG 1 is a desktop ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only quality low bandwidth and low resolution standard with fixed limited rates MPEG 2 expands upon MPEG 1 in all directions e Higher quality at the expen
234. is assigned for the PVC on each port szasirse pvc 2 1 100 1 9 2 channel best_effort You can display the configuration information about a specific PVC or all the PVCs using the SHOW PVC command The following example shows the output that will be displayed as a result of this command m 8285A gt set pvc 2 1 100 1 9 2 channel 0 400 0 500 best_effort PVC set and started 8285A gt show pvc all Local endpoint Remote endpoint Port Vpi Vci HNb role QOS Status 2 01 100 PTP PVC 0 500 1 09 1001 PTP PVC 0 400 8285A gt 09 0 400 2 Primary BE Active 1 0 500 1 Secondary BE Active You may display additional information about the configuration of the PVC by using the verbose parameter in the SHOW PVC command as shown in the following example ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only n 8285A gt show pvc 2 1 100 verbose Local endpoint Remote endpoint 2 01 100 PTP PVC 0 500 1 09 0 400 2 Primary BE Active Remote address 39 09 85 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 01 02 Quality of Service Best Effort Last Active Date 16 38 55 2 Nov 96 0 failures 8285A gt 5 1 6 How PVPs Are Supported PVPs are supported through the PVCs 5 1 7 How to Define PVPs PVPs can be set up using the command line interface or the Nways Campus manager program The following example shows how to configure a PVC for the configuratio
235. is operational physical layer In the Open Systems Interconnection reference model the layer that provides the mechanical electrical functional and procedural means to establish maintain and release physical connections over the transmission medium point to multipoint connection A point to multipoint connection is a collection of associated ATM VC or VP links and associated endpoint nodes with the following properties 1 One ATM link called the root link serves as the root in a simple tree topology When the root node sends information all of the remaining nodes on the connection called leaf nodes receive copies of the information 2 Each of the leaf nodes on the connection can send information directly to the root node The root node cannot distinguish which leaf node is sending the information without additional higher layer information 3 Leaf nodes cannot communicate directly with each other ATM Forum Phase 1 signaling does not support traffic sent from a leaf to the root point to point connection A connection that has only two end points port 1 An access point for data entry or exit 2 A connector on a device to which cables for other devices such as display stations and printers are attached Synonymous with socket private network to network interface The interface between two switches or between a switch and a switching subsystem Also known as the private network to node interface p
236. it In this case the original bandwidth calculation is 16 000 Kbps segment 1 segment 80 users 4 servers 191 Kbps device EM This is an average value The 12 segments with three devices segment would actually receive 5 333 Kbps while the remaining nine segments would have four devices apiece each receiving 4 000 Kbps ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Using a similar analysis we can see in Table 11 on page 79 the bandwidth improvement possible for a constrained Ethernet environment of 40 users and 4 servers In this scenario we have added an 8285 switch with an 3 slot 8271 ATM LAN Switch Module as shown in Figure 31 on page 79 In this case however rather than move our secondary servers to full duplex Ethernet we will go directly to 100base Tx providing each secondary server with 100 Mbps of dedicated bandwidth ATM25 Token Ring LAN ATM Users Segments Servers Server amp Token Token Rings Rings Full Duplex Token Ring o Add o o AAAA o aCe ATM Campus Backbone LeeLee Mbps Figure 31 Relieving Ethernet Congestion with LAN Switching Module m Note The choice of 100Base Tx in this scenario is merely to demonstrate the versa
237. k IP Internet Protocol A widely use network layer protocol specified by the IETF IPX Internet Packet exchange A network layer protocol that is frequently used by personal computer systems ISO International Standard Organization An organization that specifies International Communication Standards isochronous Literally in the same time An isochronous bit stream is one that goes at a constant rate The term isochronous is often used colloquially to mean digitally encoded voice The term is not often used in the world of data communications but is a common term in the voice communications and engineering context This soft copy for use by IBM employees only J JPEG Joint Picture Experts Group A Standard body defining image compression methods L LANE or LE LAN emulation The service provided by an ATM network to allow it to emulate a conventional LAN Permits existing LAN based applications to communicate over ATM without any change being required LEC LAN Emulation Client A LAN emulation component that represent users of the emulated LAN LECS LAN Emulation Configuration Server A LAN emulation service component the centralize and disseminates configuration data as LES address LES LAN Emulation Server A LAN emulation service component that resolves LAN destinations to ATM addresses LIS Logical IP Subnet An IP subnet implemented with ATM technology LLC Logical Link Contro
238. l The top sublayer of the Data Link layer which is layer 2 of the ISO model MAC Medium Access Control The bottom sublayer of the data link layer which is layer 2 of the ISO model MIB Management Information Base A network management base supporting the monitoring and control of network elements MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group A Standard body defining compression techniques for motion pictures such as MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 NTSC MSS Multiprotocol Switched Services A component of IBM s Switched Virtual Networking SVN framework MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The maximum amount of user data that can be transmitted as a single unit frame on a communication link multicast Operation where a message is sent simultaneously to a number of stations Similar to broadcast in principle but usually only to a subset of the total number of stations on a network multipoint to point connection A multipoint to point connection consists of a simple tree topology considered as a root node connected to many leaves A multipoint to point connection has zero bandwidth 286 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only from the root node to the leaf nodes and a non zero return bandwidth from the leaf nodes to the root node multipoint to multipoint connection A multipoint to multipoint is a collection of ATM VC or VP links and their associated endpoint nodes A
239. l duplex token ring adapters such as the IBM Auto LANStreamer MC32 Adapter or the IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI Adapter we can enable the servers for full duplex operation connect them to a LAN switch port and let the LAN switch module automatically provide each server with 32 Mbps of dedicated bandwidth In addition if we choose we can take advantage of the 8285 switch s 155 Mbps ATM port by installing a high performance ATM adapter such as the IBM Turboways 155 Mbps adapter in our most heavily used server Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 77 78 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Next we can use microsegmentation to reduce the number of workstations that have to share the token ring s 16 Mbps of bandwidth The segment size is limited only by the granularity of the token ring concentrators you are using If you are using a port switching hub such as the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub you can make your segments any size from two devices up to the architectural limit of the token ring And for those users who need the most performance that token rings can provide simply connect them directly to a port on the LAN switch module This will provide them with up to 32 Mbps of dedicated bandwidth In this case since we have already used up 3 of our 24 available token ring ports for the servers we can have as many as 21 segments switched by the LAN Switching module Finally to further reduce the number of workstati
240. l state changed This variable is updated in relation with the following traps hello trap change trap JinkUp linkDown traps base 2 lock OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER secured 1 unlock 2 disabled 3 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The purpose of this variable is to protect the path between the hub and the network management station When set to secure 1 it is not possible to disable a port if the SNMP request was received on this port if a LAN Emulation or an IP ARP server is on this port isolate a module if the SNMP request was received on this port if a LAN Emulation or an IP ARP server is on this port When set to unlock 2 the parameters referenced above can be modified for a limited time 30 seconds When set to disabled 3 no protection is provided Trying to modify one of these parameters results ina genErr error code in the Get Response and a trap is returned to the agent base 3 ipArpServerAtmAddress OBJECT TYPE ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only SYNTAX AtmAddress ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ATM address of the ARP server used when communicating with the switch agent using Classical IP over ATM RFC 1577 base 4 base 5 intentionnally left unused systemState OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER reset 1 swit
241. lane input When an IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis is connected to the IBM 8285 Base Unit however this connection is disabled and the traffic from the IBM 8285 Base Unit uses the switch on a chip that is incorporated in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis 2 2 1 2 8285 ATM Control Point The 8285 ATM Control Point is integrated in the base unit and provides the following functions e Manages the functions of the IBM 8285 Base Unit as well as the optional 8285 Expansion Chassis and its inserted modules ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e Controls the ATM cell switching between appropriate ports and performs the functions associated with the establishment and management of ATM circuits e Provides a management interface via an SNMP manager or an ASCII TELNET terminal for monitoring configuration and microcode distribution e Provides an Forum Compliant LAN Emulation implementation which supports Integrated LAN Emulation Server LES Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS There are two instances of the LES BUS in the 8285 ATM Control Point allowing up to two Emulated LANs ELANs either token ring or Ethernet to be configure Integrated LAN Emulation Client LEC There are two instances of the LEC configurable in the 8285 ATM Control Point allowing the 8285 ATM Control Point to be accessible from up to two ELANs either token ring or Ethernet L
242. le and the switch on a chip Each port can support any of the following I O cards Table 3 ATM 155 Mbps Media Module Supported I O Cards Feature Part Number Interface Cable 8800 58G9667 SC Multi Mode Fiber 8801 58G9855 Single Mode Fiber 8802 58G9856 RJ 45 UTP5 STP 8803 58G9857 DB9 STP e Support either SONET STS 3C or SDH STM 1 on any port at speeds of 155 520 Mbps STS 3c Limitations The STS 3c implementation is a Lite implementation which although fully compliant with ATM Forum standards is lacking some of the management and overhead portions of a full SONET implementation It will interoperate with the 1 port OC3 I O card SMF and the 1 port OC3 I O card MMF that are installed in an ATM WAN Module However neither the 1 port ATM 155 Mbps Single mode Fiber I O card nor the 1 port ATM 155 Mbps UTP STP I O card RJ 45 are suitable for direct connection to a public bearer service other than dark fiber In addition there may be incompatibilities with certain adapters that expect a full SONET implementation STM 1 Limitations The STM 1 implementation is a Lite implementation lacking some of the management and overhead portions of a full SDH implementation It will interoperate with the 1 port STM1 I O card SMF and the 1 port STM1 I O card MMF that are installed in an ATM WAN Module However neither the 1 port ATM 155 Mbps Single mode Fiber I O card nor the 1 port ATM 155 Mbps
243. led information and or access configuration panels The following describes some of those areas on the view ATM Ports When you single click on any port the port is highlighted and the corresponding port configuration panel is displayed in the status area the description box just below the IBM 8285 graphic view When you double click on any port the port configuration dialog appears This dialog enables you to manage the selected port Console Port When you single click on the console port the port is highlighted Reset and the corresponding data is displayed in the status area When you double click on the console port the file transfer dialog panel appears for the IP address of the TFTP server and the path of the file name for the microcode module last downloaded to the managed device When you double click on the Reset button the switch reset dialog box appears enabling you to confirm the reset operation on the managed device Background surface of the managed device When you single click on the Refresh background surface of the managed device graphic the data describing the managed device will be displayed When you double click on the background surface of the managed device the general information dialog panel appears and the general information data about the managed device is displayed Selecting the Refresh button initiates a poll to the subsystem Once the poll is completed it displays the current configur
244. lementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Appendix C Part Numbers for Key Components Table 42 Spare Parts and Accessories Copyright IBM Corp 1996 Component 8285 Base Part 8285 Expansion Number Part Number Chassis 51H4028 47H2422 Power supply 51H4030 47H2424 Fan Unit 51H4031 29H4256 Planar 51H4036 58G9929 155 Mbps multimode I O card 51H4029 155 Mbps monomode 1 O card 51H3861 25 Mbps 4 Ports Expansion Card 51H4037 Rear Panel 58G9831 ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media 58G9863 Module ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration 51H4474 Module ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module 58G5845 ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module 51H3650 Video Distribution Module 37H7725 ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator 51H3829 Module ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 58G9858 ATM WAN Module 51H4328 ATM 1 Slot Carrier Module 58G9860 ATM 2 Slot Carrier Module 47H2402 1 port E3 I O card 51H4335 1 port DS3 I O card 51H4338 1 port OC3 I O card SMF 51H4558 1 port OC3 I O card MMF 51H4673 1 port STM1 I O card SMF 51H4557 1 port STM1 I O card MMF 51H4674 1 port ATM 155Mbps Multi mode Fiber 58G9667 I O card 1 port ATM 155 Mbps Single mode Fiber 58G9855 I O card 1 port ATM 155 Mbps UTP STP I O card 58G9858 RJ 45 Interposer 25 pin F M shielded 58G6756 Cable DTE DCE 3 0m 58G6757 Cable DTE DCE 13 5m 58G6758 181
245. ly This chapter provides an overview of the 8285 installation process This includes physical and logical planning information as well as details about the 8285 microcode and how to upgrade it e Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration This chapter provides information on how to configure and troubleshoot a network of 8285 switches Both Classical IP ATM networks and LAN Emulation ATM networks are discussed Actual console samples are included where appropriate to facilitate understanding e Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management This chapter provides a discussion of how to manage an 8285 network using either an ASCII console or an SNMP based network management platform Various operational aspects are discussed as well e Appendix A 8285 ATM Control Point Commands This appendix provides an overview of the 8285 console its functions and its supported commands e Appendix B Pinouts for Ports and Cables This appendix provides pin out diagrams for the ATM25 RJ 45 ports e Appendix C Part Numbers for Key Components This appendix contains a list of components and part numbers Appendix D Hints and Tips for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module This appendix contains information concerning the latest release of code for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module e Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs This appendix contains the latest version of the IBM campus ATM switch private MIB
246. mQ2931ConfTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmQ2931ConfEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains basic information on the Q2931 protocol for each signalling link defined per port Usually there is only one signalling channel per interface and thus one Q2931 protocol definition entry per interface atmQ2931 1 atmQ2931ConfEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmQ2931ConfEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of atmQ2931ConfTable Each entry corresponds to a pair of ATM interface signalling channel A signalling channel is uniquely defined on each interface Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 227 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only by the VPI and VCI values allocated to it INDEX atmQ2931Conf Index atmQ2931SiVpi atmQ2931SiVci atmQ2931ConfTable 1 AtmQ2931ConfEntry SEQUENCE atmQ2931Conf Index INTEGER atmQ2931SiVpi INTEGER atmQ2931SiVci INTEGER atmQ2931T303 INTEGER atmQ2931T308 INTEGER atmQ2931T309 INTEGER atmQ2931T310 INTEGER atmQ2931T316 INTEGER atmQ2931T317 INTEGER atmQ2931T322 INTEGER atmQ2931T398 INTEGER atmQ2931T399 INTEGER atmQ2931SetupRetry INTEGER atmQ2931ReleaseRetry INTEGER atmQ2931RestartRetry INTEGER atmQ2931StatusRetry INTEGER atmQ2931ConfIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifIndex value of the AT
247. mSaalConfEntry 1 atmSaalConfSiVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vpi value which with the Vci value specified in atmSaalConfSiVci defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmSaalConfEntry 2 atmSaalConfSiVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The Vci value which with the Vpi value specified in atmSaalConfSiVpi defines the signalling channel for this entry Usually there is one signalling channel per interface defined by Vpi 0 Vci 5 atmSaalConfEntry 3 atmSaalState OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION The state of the SAAL for this interface as defined in the Q 2110 Specification Chapter 7 3 atmSaalConfEntry 4 atmSaalTimerPol OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Timer POLL as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This timer is running in the active phase to assure that the peer receiver is polled often enough to return its status atmSaalConfEntry 5 atmSaalTimerKeepAlive OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Timer_KEEP ALIVE as defined in the Q 2110 Specificatio
248. mandatory DESCRIPTION The cause of the failure as defined by Q2931 atmPvcEpEntry 11 atmPvcEpFailures OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of times this PVC failed atmPvcEpEntry 12 The group atmLanEmulation defines the specific support for the lan emulation resources in the atm node 252 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only JanEmulation OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 11 JanEmulationServer OBJECT IDENTIFIER lanEmulation 1 lesConfTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF LesConfEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains the specific configuration parameters of the embedded LAN emulation servers lanEmulationServer 1 lesConfEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX LesConfEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of the lesConfTable Each entry corresponds to a Lan emulation server embedded in the atm control point INDEX lesIndex lesConfTable 1 LesConfEntry SEQUENCE les Index INTEGER lesMaxNumber0fClients INTEGER lesLecLastChange INTEGER lesIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A value which uniquely identifies a lan emulation server in the lesConfTable lesConfEntry 1 lesMaxNumberO0fClients OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCES
249. mber of point to point connection per media modules or base unit is 2048 with Version 1 4 was 992 The maximum number of parties for point to multipoint connections for the base unit or per media module is 1024 The maximum number of point to point connection per 8285 port is 2048 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e The maximum number of VPI connections supported per 25 Mbps port is 16 and 64 for the others 5 1 4 How PVCs Are Supported To support PVCs the 8285 maps them internally onto SVCs This allows the PVC to be automatically reestablished using an alternate path in case of a link or node failure on the original path supporting the PVC In addition the parameters specified for the setting of the PVCs are saved in the NVRAM of the 8285 to provide automatic reestablishment of the PVC after the 8285 power off or reset condition Note that the information about PVCs is only stored in NVRAM after the connection is activated This is to ensure that only the current and valid PVCs are restarted When an 8285 is restarted and an SVC is to be established before all the PVCs have been reestablished a problem could occur if that SVC is allocated a label that is owned by one of the PVCs To overcome this problem the 8285 always checks to see if a label is not reserved by a PVC before allocating it to an SVC 5 1 5 How to Configure PVCs PVCs can be set up using th
250. menting the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The result of the latest file transfer When one of the TFTP variables is modified this variable is reset to not initialized When a configuration file is downloaded the content of the configuration file is checked If the file is valid and if a reset is mandatory then the atm subsystem is reset automatically If the configuration file is not valid or if a reset is not required the following values are returned in transferResult config unreadable version the control point does not support the version of configuration file This configuration file has probably been built by a further version of control point config file empty the configuration file is not valid config impossible the configuration file cannot be applied internal error or file corrupted config internal error internal error detected while checking the configuration file config applied ok the configuration file is valid and a reset is not mandatory tftp 7 Service service OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 7 Traces traces OBJECT IDENTIFIER service 1 sysTrace OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER on 1 off 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION When on the hub general trace facility is started Messages are stored in the hub in a file that can be retrieved through TFTP When off the general trace facility is stopped and messages are no
251. mmonly used to connect a telephone to its wall jack Also referred to as unshielded twisted pair U UBR Unspecified Bit Rate ATM Forum Service category in relation to traffic Management on ATM networks The UBR service is for best effort delivery of data UTP unshielded twisted pair See telephone twisted pair UNI User to Network Interface The connection that links a user device to an ATM switch hence attaches it to the ATM network V VC Virtual Channel A concept used to describe unidirectional transport of ATM cells associated by a common unique identifier value VCC Virtual Channel Connection A concatenation of virtual channel links that extends between two points where the adaptation layer is accessed VCI Virtual Channel Identifier The VPI VCI pair uniquely identify a specific ATM connection on a given link virtual channel link A means of unidirectional transport of ATM cells between a point where a virtual channel identifier value is assigned and the point where that value is translated or removed VLAN Virtual Local Area Network A logical collection of ATM stations grouped into a single domain and independent of physical location A VLAN is often based on end stations having common access to a LAN emulation server or Classical IP ARP server VP Virtual Path A concept used to describe the unidirectional transport of ATM cells belonging to virtual channels that are associated by
252. monitoring 151 165 ATM network topology management 150 156 157 158 ATM resource configuration 150 161 163 165 ATM statistics management 151 ATM view 160 hardware requirements 154 LAN Emulation Management 152 166 MAT 149 PSM 149 152 163 software requirements 155 submap 156 157 158 Nways Campus Manager ATM for HP UX 148 Nways Manager for Windows 148 167 168 hardware requirements 170 PSM 168 software requirements 170 P PAL 48 S SSI 38 42 43 46 capacity 101 Switching Modules LAN and ATM LAN 8271 Ethernet Switch Module Plug and Play capabilities 75 bandwidth aggregation 75 features 74 sample scenario Ethernet congestion relief 79 statistics gathered 75 UFCs 74 8272 Token Ring Switch Module Plug and Play capabilities 73 bandwidth aggregation 73 features 72 maximum frame size 74 sample scenario token ring migration 77 source route bridging 73 source route switching 73 statistics gathered 73 UFCs 72 ATM UFC features 76 limitations 76 common features 71 filters 72 limitations 76 management interfaces 76 port mirroring 72 switching modes 72 virtual switch capabilities 72 Index 297 T TCP IP SLIP setup 186 SLIP using UART considerations 186 with bridge module 63 with Chameleon TCP IP 188 with DOS TCP IP 187 with modem connections 192 with OS 2 TCP IP V2 0 188 with OS 2 TCP IP V3 0 189 Topology and Routing Services 5 Troubleshooting ATM parameters 141 ELAN name 143 Ethernet t
253. mployees only Index Numerics 100 Mbps MIC SC Fiber Module 4 Port features 46 power requirements 94 redundant links 47 sample scenario access node 47 sample scenario workgroup 46 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module 3 Port features 42 I O cards 42 overview 42 power requirements 94 redundant links 41 45 reserved bandwidth 43 sample scenario access node 45 155 Mbps Media Module 2 Port features 42 I O cards 42 overview 42 power requirements 94 redundant links 41 reserved bandwidth 43 sample scenario workgroup 44 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module 12 Port features 38 overview 38 power requirements 94 sample scenario access node 41 sample scenario low cost networking 40 sample scenario workgroup 39 VPC VCC modes 36 8260 Multiprotocol Switching Hub 22 8285 Base Unit 10 155 Mbps ATM I O Card 13 bandwidth capacity 99 CAP CAD capacity 97 functions 19 connectors 12 13 environmental specifications 92 front panel 11 latency 97 LEDs 12 13 mechanical specifications 93 Model OOP 40 ports 12 power supply 93 power supply future 93 reset button 13 shipping group 91 switching capacity 97 switching fabric 22 functions 24 internal cell 22 33 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 8285 Console access mode 173 command list 172 176 functions 105 107 normal mode 106 password 173 174 setup 106 107 171 SLIP mode 107 8285 Control Point capacity 31 82 CIP capacity 88 functions 10 19 28 30 31 LEC 104 capacity
254. n This timer is started when entering the transient phase atmSaalConfEntry 6 atmSaalTimerNoResponse OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Timer_NO RESPONSE as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This timer indicates the maximum time interval during which at least one STAT PDU needs to be received atmSaalConfEntry 7 atmSaalTimerCC OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Timer_CC as defined in the Q 2110 Specification Transmission of PDUs is protected by this timer during establishment and release of a connection and during resynchronization or recovery atmSaalConfEntry 8 atmSaalTimerIdle OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Timer_IDLE as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This timer is started upon receipt of a STAT PDU when entering the idle phase no POLL PDUs sent atmSaalConfEntry 9 atmSaalMaxCC OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 241 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION MaxCC as defined in the Q 2110 Specification This is the maximum value for the state variable VT CC corresponding to the maximum number of transmissions of a BGN END ER or RS PDU atmSaalConfEntry 10 atmSaalMaxPD OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only S
255. n 8260 base 8 Traps Control traps OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 2 hello OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER enabled 1 disabled 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION When disabled the hello trap is neither sent When enabled the hello trap can be sent by the agent when the appropriate trap condition is detected traps 1 Physical Description physical OBJECT IDENTIFIER node 3 Switch Control switchTable OBJECT TYPE ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SwitchEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table controls slot attachement to the ATM switch An ATM module is operational only when inserted in a slot which is defined as attached to the switch physical 1 switchEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SwitchEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of switchTable Each entry corresponds to a slot that is physically wired to the switch These slots may be attached to or isolated from the ATM switch INDEX switchSlotIndex switchTable 1 SwitchEntry SEQUENCE switchSlot Index INTEGER switchAdminState INTEGER switchOperState INTEGER switchSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 1 64 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A slot number controlled by the switch s
256. n EFCI Yes Full packet level discard Yes Network parameter control No Random early detection RED No Selective cell discarding No Dynanic discard control No 90 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use b y IBM employees only Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing This chapter contains the following sections describe the planning and installation of the 8285 switch e Physical Planning Installation Considerations Environmental considerations Mechanical considerations Power considerations Cabling considerations Availability considerations e Logical Planning Network Design Considerations e Installation Considerations e Microcode Picocode Considerations Reasons for upgrading the microcode How to acquire the latest microcode How to update the microcode 6 1 Physical Planning 6 1 1 Packaging Copyright IBM Corp 1996 This section discusses the following installation considerations that might affect how and where you choose to install the 8285 switch e Packaging e Physical specifications The 8285 switch shipping group provides everything necessary to install and configure the 8285 switch including the following items 6 1 1 1 Base Unit The base unit shipping group contains e An IBM 8285 Base Unit with mounting brackets attached A cable management bracket e An RS 232 wrap plug e An RJ45 wrap plug
257. n unit the switching is done as follows a The connection between CAD_Up and CAD_Down has been enabled because the IBM 8285 does not have the switch chip b The cell is switched from CAD_Up to CAD_Down immediately When the IBM 8285 is installed with the expansion unit the switching is done as follows a When the expansion unit installed all connections between the switch chip and the CAP CADs are enabled And then the direct ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only d connection between CAD_Up and CAD_Down in the base unit is disabled When the switch chip indicates to CAD_Up to give the next cell CAD_Up gives the first cell from the appropriate queue based on its priority mechanism RB over NRB Queue The cell is delivered to the switch chip and the pointers of that queue are updated The switch chip switches the cell based on TB 5 Receive the cell into the target blade a b C CAD_Down has prepared a location in advance for the next cell CAD_Down receives the cell into CAD_Store in the general queue CAD_Down dequeues the cell and sends CAP_Down a copy of the RH which contains the LCBAup and the source blade 6 Place the cell in the correct output queue and prepare it for transfer to SFE_Down a Using SB and LCBAup CAP_Down determines LCBAdown LCBAdown points to the LCB for the connection in the outbound blade The LCB
258. n Number ATM25 ATM25 Token Ring Ethernet Forum Pre Standard 10Base T Compliant 1 RD TD 2 RD TD 3 RD 4 5 6 RD 7 TD 8 TD B 2 Other Cabling Considerations Special cables are required in two specific instances e When connecting to pre standard devices e When connecting between two ATM switches Both of these instances are discussed below Copyright IBM Corp 1996 179 B 2 1 Converter Cables Some early ATM 25 Mbps adapters such as the IBM TURBOWAYS 25 ATM adapter P N 04H7370 use a pre standard pin assignment schema based on the token ring network cabling standard To make these adapters compatible with the Forum compliant ports of the 8285 switch it is necessary to use a token ring to ATM converter cable available from IBM as P N 10H3904 The pinouts for this cable are shown in Table 40 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only B 2 2 Crossover Cables The 8285 ports are designed to connect user devices and require a switch to switch crossover cable to connect to other ATM switches just as a 10Base T hub does The pinouts for this cable are shown in Table 41 180 Table 40 Pin Assignments for Converter Cable P N 10H3904 Signal Port Pin Adapter Pin RD 1 4 RD 2 5 TD 7 3 TD 8 6 Table 41 Pin Assignments for Switch to Switch Crossover Cable Signal Port Pin Adapter Pin RD 1 7 RD 2 8 TD 7 1 TD 8 2 ATM Workgroup Solutions Imp
259. n Publications 279 G 2 Redbooks on CD ROMs 020002000 279 G 3 Other Publications eo 4 Baie A ee Bae LO Re ee ee a a K tA 279 How To Get ITSO Redbooks 2 0 2 00000 281 How IBM Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks 281 Contents V vi This soft copy for use by IBM employees only How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks 282 IBM Redbook Order Form 2 2 2 a 283 Glossary 28 os ena eee ae oe oe Oe ee Ae ee ee i ee 285 List of Abbreviations 0 a 291 Idex 2 44 Pe Oe Eee E oie eS BE Se eA oe eed 2 ad ee eee 295 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Figures OP OV POON E co N 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 ATM Addressing Format Cell a ATM UNI NNI Format Data Cells ATM Call Establishment 2 002000 000200 ATM Classical IP using ARP Server 04 Front Panel of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base Unit Front Panel of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Expansion WOT Sy B98 tee A te oe ca eds dd Moe ed ae Go Pk legs Mele oh ce cea wh oe dae oh tn Inserting a Module in the Expansion Unit A
260. n of the 8281 requires version 1 0 5 or above of the 8281 PSM to provide device management under NWays Campus Manager for Windows NWays Campus Manager for AIX and NWays Campus Manager for HP UX 1 9 Problems with older ATM adapter code The first GA code for the IBM Token Ring FC LAN Emulation ATM adapters had a bug that caused RI fields to be incorrectly constructed This error resulted in token ring connectivity problems across the 8281 bridge You should obtain the latest GA drivers for the adapters 1 10 Migrating from Release 1 to Release 2 code If you have an 8281 bridge which has Release 1 code and configuration perform the following steps to migrate to Release 2 Forum Compliant code Download Release 2 operational code Reset the 8281 bridge to activate Release 2 code Setup Release 2 configuration using Release 2 Configurator Send Release 2 profile using Release 2 Configurator Reset the 8281 bridge to activate Release 2 configuration 2 1 Prerequisites 2 1 1 8285 Microcode Version The 8285 boot microcode must be at version 1 2 or higher and the 8285 operationalmicrocode must be at version 1 2 or higher Use the SHOW DEVICE command on the CPSW console and contact your IBM service representative if required 2 1 2 ATM server with IBM 100M bits adapter TURBOWAYS 100 OS 2 driver If this adapter is used on the ATM server with the 0S 2 device driver the CSD level of the driver must be 1 22 or higher If this is
261. n shown in Figure 33 on page 86 szo5iese pvc 2 7 100 1 9 2 path 14 15 best_effort Note that in this example the following attributes are defined for PVP e Slot port on the local 8285 2 7 e Slot port on the remote 8285 1 9 e PVP_id 100 This is an arbitrary number that you can use to identify the PVP on various displays e Remote hub identifier 2 This identifies the hub number HN of the remote hub the hub on which the PVP terminates within the cluster VPI on the local hub 14 e VPI on the remote hub 15 e PVP type best_effort The VPI values chosen for each port must be free at the time of defining the PVP You can find out the VPI values that are currently allocated to the other connection on the ports by using the Nways Campus manager ATM for AIX If you are not sure which VPI is available for allocation you may use the following command which will allow the 8285 Control Point to select the VPI value that is assigned for the PVP on each port szasirse pvc 2 7 100 1 9 2 path best_effort Chapter 5 8285 ATM Network Specifications 85 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only HN 1 Local VPI 15 HN 2 sre j Remote Figure 33 Sample PVP Configuration You display configuration information about PVPs using the SHOW PVC command as described in 5 1 5 How to Configure PVCs on page 83 The
262. n the physical installation procedure is completed you have to make sure the system is operating properly and start customizing the IBM 8285 Although some valuable information can be determined by observing the front panel LEDs you really need to connect the 8285 console to check the detailed status and to start the customizing process The following sections describe the console setup procedure and the basic console functions required to check the status of the IBM 8285 e Overview e Setup Procedure e Basic Console Functions 6 3 2 1 Overview The configuration console supports both out of band and inband access However out of band access is required for the initial setup since some parameters such as the IP address need to be configured before the console can be reached via an inband connection The out of band console is connected to the console port on the base unit and the connection is supported by direct attachment or remote attachment via modem telecommunication link The out of band console supports two access modes nrmal ASCII mode and SLIP mode The normal mode is very popular as a LAN device console interface It uses a simple ASCII terminal interface normally and uses XMODEM file transfer protocol when downloading microcode The SLIP mode uses a Telnet session normally and uses TFTP when downloading the microcode Both TCP IP protocols use SLIP as the protocol stack The IBM 8281 and 8282 also use a SLIP interface as
263. nal notInService the PVC is failing notReady values are missing to be able to activate this PVC Actions active this requests to re start a failing PVC which status was notInService destroy this requests to delete a PVC createAndWait this requests to create a PVC To create a new PVC this variable must be set to createAndWait with an index where atmPvcIndex is the number of the interface from where the PVC is created atmPvcIdentifier is an unused PVC identifier for this interface To activate a PVC this variable must be set to active Default values are provided for all attributes except for the atmPvcEpRemIndex If this attribute is not set the PVC will remain in the notReady state To delete a PVC this variable must be set to destroy atmPvcEntry 3 atmPvcType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER point2pointVP 1 point2pointVC 2 point2multipointVP 3 point2multipointVC 4 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A unicast PVC is defined between two endpoints using either a VP or a VC connection A Multicast PVC is defined first between a source endpoint and a target endpoint then adding endpoints thanks to the PvcEpTable using either VP or VC connections The source endpoint is called Root while target endpoints are called multicast parties DEFVAL point2pointVC atmPvcEntry 4 atmPvcEndPoint OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER primaryRoot 1 secondaryLeaf 2
264. nal FPGA version B3F3 BAD LEVEL H Backup FPGA version B40 gt paak Note Ff C10 indicates that the correct FPGA code is in the backup FPGA ready to be swapped Other possible values include e None indicating that no valid code is available to be swapped This may occur on both the IBM 8285 Base Unit and the ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module The correct action to take is to download the FPGA code for that module again Do not proceed with swapping microcode until you have valid microcode in the backup FPGA for each module to be swapped H BAD LEVEL is indicated because the current and backup microcode levels are incompatible Note that the correct code level is in the backup FPGA ready to be loaded Please note that it is the backup FPGA that is updated not the operational FPGA ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Symptom Table 30 Download Errors and Suggested Fixes Possible Cause Suggested Actions Ping failure TFTP server unreachable via a TCP IP connection e Check if server is on e Check if server has TCP IP running e Validate all cable connections continuity polarity etc Make sure ports are properly enabled e Check if ARP server has registered 8285 See section for how to do this e Check IP subnetting to ensure both devices are in the same subnet Download fa
265. narios The ATM 155 Mbps Media Modules are high performance cards that are ideal for connecting high bandwidth users and servers into either a workgroup or an ATM network In addition they can be used to provide redundant links to a backbone or server to provide higher bandwidth and improved reliability Figure 15 on page 44 shows how the ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module can be used as a concentrator for a high performance workgroup Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 43 44 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Up to Up to 12 ATM25 6 ATM155 ATM Server users users amp servers 155 Mbps Figure 15 ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module High Performance Workgroup In this scenario six users are connected to the 8285 via a high performance ATM 155 Mbps adapter such as the IBM Turboways ATM 155 Mbps Adapter connected in to ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Modules installed in the 8285 Expansion Chassis This allows all six users to access the ATM 155 Mbps server connected to the ATM 155 Mbps port on the base unit for such bandwidth intensive applications as CAD CAM video playback etc In addition 12 ATM25 users can access the same high performance ATM server for such applications as video conferencing and traditional LAN server applicati
266. nd 512 Mbps 16 MHz x 32 bit CAD_Up Down parallel FDX H expansion unit CAD_Up Down and the switch chip ATM backplane across the 256 Mbps FDX Note FDX means each up inbound and down outbound works simultaneously and the maximum capacity should be double 256 Mbps FDX 512 Mbps As described above the internal bandwidth for each blade should be 256 Mbps However we have to consider that the IBM 8285 uses a 64 byte internal cell instead of a 53 byte ATM standardized cell As a result the available ATM bandwidth for the ATM cell transfer should be decreased from the internal bandwidth 256 Mbps per blade to 212 Mbps 256 Mbps x 53 64 per blade by the overhead of the internal cell header trailer 3 5 LAN Emulation Server Functions The IBM 8285 integrates a Forum compliant LAN Emulation Server LES and Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS functions in the control point The LES BUS functions are performed with or without external a LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS The IBM 8285 can support up to two sets of the LES BUS functions with any combinations of the types of LAN emulation token ring IEEE 802 5 and Ethernet Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 33 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only IEEE 802 3 The maximum number of the LAN Emulation Clients LECs is 128 regardless the number of the LES BUS so it should be the sum of the LECs supported by the IBM 8285 when t
267. nections supported by the IBM 8285 Table 12 Supported Connection Type by the A CPSW Module Connection Type Supported Unidirectional point to point No Bidirectional point to point with symmetric bandwidth Yes Bidirectional point to point with asymmetric bandwidth No H Unidirectional point to multipoint Yes Bidirectional point to multipoint No multipoint to multipoint No If a call setup request with asymmetrical bandwidth requirement is received the 8285 will establish the call with the higher peak rate used for both directions 5 1 3 Maximum Number of Connections Supported The maximum number of supported connections depends on their type point to point or point to multipoint and for point to multipoint connections on the number of parties per connection The following are the rules you can use to determine the number of connections supported in your environment 82 The IBM 8285 has 4 096 connection control blocks Each point to point connection requires two control blocks Each party on a point to multipoint connection requires one connection control block The maximum number of point to point connections supported by an IBM 8285 with its expansion is 2 048 regardless the expansion unit installation The maximum number of point to multipoint trees supported is 127 The maximum number of parties supported for all the point to multipoint trees is 1024 The maximum number of PVCs is 100 The maximum nu
268. nel 166 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Figure 57 on page 167 displays the new LAN Emulation application Figure 57 ELAN View 8 4 Nways Manager for Windows The following sections describe the information about Nways Manager for Windows especially for the IBM 8285 management 8 4 1 Overview Nways Manager for Windows provides a low cost easy to use network management solution that allows you to proactively manage your campus network Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 167 168 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only As described above Nways Manager for Windows provides very limited functions compared with Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX to manage an ATM network but would be a good solution for management of stand alone ATM workgroup switches The new version of Nways Manager for Windows V2 which supports IBM 8285 was announced in October 1996 and is now available in addition to V1 8 4 1 1 Nways Manager for Windows V1 The Nways Manager for Windows V1 is a competitively priced integrated suite of network management applications that work seamlessly with the IBM NetView for Windows management platform to remotely control and monitor the following networking devices e IBM 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub e IBM 8230 Token Ring Concentrator Models 003 013 213 04A 04P e IBM 8271 Ethernet LAN Switch Model 001 e IBM TURBOWAYS 8282 A
269. nfigurator via RS 232 null modem cable to the bridge and examine the software Vital Product Data VPD returned by the bridge Go to Utilities gt Additional Utilities gt Retrieve Bridge Status Report and view the status report which contains the VPD The software versions are identified primarily by a Release and Subrelease For example Release 2 Subrelease 1 would be identified by the dot decimal number v2 1 If the software VPD returned to the Configurator from the bridge shows Release and Subrelease information that is vastly different eg 4 15 from the version information on the Operational Software and MIB diskette label then new Operational Software needs to be loaded onto the bridge The existing code is under a different older versioning scheme If the software VPD returned to the Configurator from the bridge has the same Release information as on the diskette but the Subrelease is higher then the bridge has the later version The version of code already on the bridge is more recent than the version of code on the diskette You should acquire backup copies of the most recent version of Operational Software See 1 1 1 Where to Get Updates 1 Where to Get Updates The most recent versions of the ATM LAN Bridge module software Configurator and Operational can be gotten from the following sources 1 The ATMBIN disk on ATMPE user at LGEVMA system Consult your IBM service representative 2 The
270. ng connection it issues a CONNECT response to the network which forwards it back to the requesting workstation where it is acknowledged by issuing a CONNECT ACK response to the network which forwards it to the destination endstation to complete the call set up process Connection Tear Down When an endstation wishes to end a connection it issues a DISCONNECT request to the network The network acknowledges the request by returning a RELEASE response instructing the requesting endstation to drop all resources associated with the call and by forwarding the DISCONNECT on to the destination workstation which acknowledges the request by returning a RELEASE command to the network The process is completed when the requesting endstation returns a RELEASE COMPLETE to the network which forwards it to the destination endstation indicating that the call has been dropped and the associated resources freed up 1 1 4 2 ATM Forum Compliant LAN Emulation LANE LAN emulation simplifies a migration from a traditional LAN environment to an ATM switched environment by superimposing LAN interfaces on top of the underlying ATM transport and by supporting traditional LAN addressing at the media access control MAC layer as well as broadcast and multicast capabilities This means that LAN based applications run unchanged yet now have access to to the network and to network attached resources at scalable speeds from 25 Mbps to 155 Mbps and beyond The sign
271. ng of Octet Strings OS 2 Japan NWays Campus Manager Problems with older ATM adapter code 10 Migrating from Release 1 to Release 2 code 2 Release Notes 2 1 Ph MH PH PY Po OORUN Copyright IBM Corp 1996 Prerequisites 2 1 1 8285 microcode version 2 1 2 ATM server with IBM 100Mbits adapter TW100 Ballpeen OS 2 driver Network Management Problems with memory dump utility on PCs with less than 8M RAM User filter clarification How to connect to the bridge using a modem Problem w Configurator when bridge Max Frame Size is reduced 183 184 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 2 7 Recovering from corrupted 8281 configuration I Le 1 m WARNING PLEASE NOTE THAT BOTH THE CONFIGURATION UTILITY PROGRAM DISKETTE IMAGE AND THE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE FILE FOR THE NWAYS 8285 ATM LAN BRIDGE MODULE ARE DIFFERENT FROM THE STAND ALONE 8281 ATM LAN BRIDGE MODULE IN ORDER TO CLEARLY DISTINGUISH BETWEEN BOTH PRODUCTS ALL THE NWAYS 8285 ATM LAN BRIDGE MODULE FILES ARE PREFIXED WITH AN H LIKE HUB THE CONFIGURATION UTILITY DISKETTE IMAGE FILE IS NAMED H8281CXY DSK X Y being the release and subrelease levels AND THE BRIDGE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE FILE IS NAMED HX_YY OPR same notice for X Y Operational Software Versions For logistical reasons the version of software loaded on the bridge may differ from the version shipped on the accompanying diskette You will need to locally attach the Co
272. nnectors and the reset button refer to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and User s Guide SA33 0381 2 2 3 155 Mbps ATM I O Card The 155 Mbps ATM I O Card is an optional card installable in the 155 Mbps Feature I O Card Slot of the base unit There are two types of 155 Mbps ATM I O Cards available Multimode Fiber FC 5500 and Single Mode Fiber FC 5501 It becomes the 13th port of base unit and can be linked to an ATM station or to another ATM switch that supports ATM 155 such as another 8285 switch or an 8260 hub 2 2 3 1 Connectors Both I O cards have SC connectors 2 2 3 2 LEDs The 155 Mbps ATM I O Card has the following LEDs e Status e Output Activity e Error 2 3 Expansion Unit FC 5502 The 8285 Expansion Chassis provides three slots to receive IBM 8260 8285 ATM modules extending the 8285 switch s functions and capacities The IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis consists of the following e Internal Features An ATM backplane that is similar to the one used in the 8260 hub A planar containing a switch on a chip which connects the base unit ATM ports to each other and to other ATM modules in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis e External Features Slots Connectors LEDs A rack mountable chassis with an integrated auto sensing universal power supply Chapter 2 Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 13 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 2 3 1 I
273. nology that is rapidly becoming the standard for high speed LAN and WAN networks both public and private It combines the flexibility and resiliency of connection less protocols such as TCP IP with the efficiency and manageability of session oriented protocols such as SNA This is because ATM uses small fixed size packets called cells which are transported across the network hop by hop along a pre determined virtual path that can be quickly changed to avoid congestion or failures Both of these concepts are discussed below 1 1 1 ATM Cells ATM uses the concept of cells as its basic delivery vehicle These cells are similar to the packets or frames used in traditional networks except for two distinguishing features 1 Fixed Cell Size All ATM cells are 53 bytes long of which 48 bytes are payload and 5 bytes are header information This payload size provides the best combination of efficiency favoring large payloads for data and latency favoring small payloads for time sensitive applications such as voice and video The header contains all the information necessary for the cell to enter the network to be carried to its next intermediate destination and to identify simple errors single bit that might occur The most important thing about the fixed cell size however is that it enables cells to be switched simply and efficiently in hardware without costly in time and money large buffers 2 Minimal Routing Information
274. not available 0 0 0 0 is returned Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 221 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only nbrEntry 2 nbrIpAddress2 OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX IpAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION One of the IP addresses of the ATM SNMP agent of the node attached to the port slot defined by this entry When not available 0 0 0 0 is returned nbrEntry 3 nbrAtmAddress OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AtmAddress ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ATM identification of the node attached to the port slot defined by this entry When not available a null string is returned nbrEntry 4 nbrIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The interface number of the adjacent node to which the connection defined by this entry is attending When not available 0 is returned nbrEntry 5 nbrDescriptor OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The value of the MIB II sysDescr as reported by the device attached to this port When not available a null string is returned nbrEntry 6 nbrOid OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OBJECT IDENTIFIER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The value of the MIB II sysOID as reported by the device attached to this port When not available a null string is returned nbrEntry 7 nbrName OBJECT T
275. not be used and the UNI specification allows you to restrict the number of active VPI and VCI bits The IBM 8285 supports a 14 or 12 bit address range for VPI VCI depending on which port is used And prior to the control point V1 3 the range was fixed to a 2 bit VPI 0 through 3 and 10 bit VCI 0 through 1023 for the 25 Mbps ports base unit and 25Mbps module and 4 bit VPI O through 15 and 10 bit 0 through 1023 for the other ports The control point V1 4 supports variable range of VPC VCC This function allows you to have more virtual path connections VPCs or virtual channel connections VCCs than previous levels along with the customer requirement The range supported on an ATM port depends on which port is used For the 25 Mbps ports One of the following three patterns of range can be selected VPI VCI 0 bit 12 bits VPI 0 VCI 0 through 4095 VPI VCI 2 bits 10 bits VPI 0 through 3 VCl 0 through 1023 VPI VCI 4 bits 8 bits VPI 0 through 15 VCI 0 through 256 For the other ports One of the following three patterns of range can be selected VPI VCI 0 bit 14 bits VPI 0 VCI 0 through 16383 VPI VCI 4 bits 10 bits VPI 0 through 15 VCI 0 through 1023 VPI VCI 6 bits 8 bits VPI 0 through 63 VCI 0 through 256 In addition the network administrator can define upper limits for VPI VCI values to meet specific ranges supported by some ATM UNI devices The ATM Forum Compliant UNI stations inform the ATM switch
276. nsole is left unattended The default value is 0 which means that the terminal will never time out An example of this command is as follows sz set terminal time_out 10 Figure 66 Changing the Terminal Timeout The value previously specified is in minutes and can go up to 30 After setting all the parameters for the terminal you must ensure that you save them using the following command E save terminal Figure 67 Saving the Terminal Settings You can display the current settings for the terminal using the following command c show terminal Figure 68 Showing the Terminal Settings An example of the output you could get is shown in Figure 69 M Terminal Parameters Baud 9600 Data bits 8 Hangup DISABLE Parity NONE Stop bits 1 Timeout time 0 8285 gt Figure 69 Output from Show Terminal Command IBM 8285 ATM Command List Table 38 on page 177 shows the list of ATM commands supported by the IBM 8285 For more information about the commands refer to the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ATM Command Reference Guide SA33 0385 and the release note for ATM switch microcode you are using The release note includes the latest information not described in the manual ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 38 Page 1 of 2 IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ATM Command List
277. nternal Features The IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis has two primary internal features 2 3 1 1 ATM Backplane The IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis contains an ATM backplane that is effectively a three slot version of the 8260 hub s ATM backplane That is to say itis a completely passive backplane with female connectors It is capable of supporting most 8260 hub ATM modules Note However there are some differences between the ATM backplanes of the IBM 8285 and IBM 8260 Specifically the IBM 8260 ATM Control Point and Switch Module cannot be used in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis For more information refer to Chapter 3 Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 on page 17 2 3 1 2 ATM Planar The IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis contains a planar which has a switch on a chip switching module When connected to the IBM 8285 Base Unit with the expansion interface cable the switch on a chip performs all the port to port cell switching e Between ports in the IBM 8285 Base Unit e Between ports in the IBM 8285 Base Unit and ATM modules in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis e Between ports on ATM modules in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis 2 3 2 Front Panel Figure 6 shows the front panel of the IBM 8285 expansion unit ATM Dummy Media Modules Module AC Power Status Base Unit Input LEDs Connector Figure 6 Front Panel of the IBM 8285 Nways A
278. nteroperate with the widest number of vendors The latest microcode levels for the 8285 ATM Control Point are e Release 1 3 0 Support for the AO3 MB155 module Additional LANE support including support for external LECS via either configured address or dynamic discovery e Release 1 4 0 Release 1 4 0 is a major upgrade It includes new operating code as well as new microcode for the base unit and all available 8285 modules New and enhanced features include Increases the number of connections available per module from 992 to 4064 Allows for variable VPC VCC value ranges enabling either more paths with fewer channels each or fewer paths with more channels each Supports ATM Forum Available Bit Rate ABR Service on the ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module and on the 12 port 25 Mbps base unit 110 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Adds PVC support to its multipoint capabilities which were previously SVC only This includes both permanent virtual circuits and permanent virtual paths Configuration requires only root and leaf addresses intervening switches need not be changed 6 4 2 Acquiring the Latest Microcode The IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch is designed to easily accommodate evolving standards and additional capabilities All operating code can be easily upgraded by
279. ny information sent on the connection by a node is received by all of the other nodes A receiving endpoint node cannot distinguish which other endpoint sent the information unless some higher layer information is present for the purpose N network node interface The interface between two ATM switches NTSC National Television Standard Committee Video resolution 525 rows x 700 vertical lines 29 97 frames per second transmitted as fields frame Used in US Japan parts of South Africa O OSPF Open Shortest Path first A link state routing protocol specified by the IETF Link state routing protocols scale better than vector distance routing protocol as RIP P packet In data communication a sequence of binary digits including data and control signals that is transmitted and switched as a composite whole Synonymous with data frame In ATM An information block identified by a label at layer 3 of the OSI reference model PAL Phase Alternation by Phase Video resolution 625 rows x 700 vertical lines 25 frames per second Standard used in most the world PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association An association involved in establishing hardware standards that are often associated with miniaturized peripherals PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit A logical connection between end stations defined through administrator configuration that is established at all times that the network
280. om the root Downstream means that the connection was set up from the in parameters interface VPI VCI to the out parameters interface VPI VCI In particular for a multicast SVC this means that the call initiator the root in this case is on the interface side labeled vcXInIndex Upstream means that the connection was set up from the 218 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only out parameters interface VPI VCI to the in parameters interface VPI VCI As a result any cross connection is modeled in this table as two entries depending on whether it is seen in the up or down stream vcXConnectEntry 8 VPL Cross Connect Table vpXConnectTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF VpXConnectEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table contains the cross connections set up in the switch for all existing VPL based PVCs and SVCs connections 2 vpXConnectEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX VpXConnectEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Entries of vpXConnectTable INDEX vpXInIndex vpXInVpi vpXOut Index vpXOutVpi vpXConnectTable 1 VpXConnectEntry SEQUENCE vpXInIndex INTEGER vpXInVpi INTEGER vpXOut Index INTEGER vpXOutVpi INTEGER vpXType INTEGER vpXDirection INTEGER vpXInIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCR
281. ommands In this case the TARGET_MODULE number will be slot number that each card is installed in Be sure to check the current FPGA code first using the SHOW MODULE n VERBOSE where n is the blade s slot number 116 atT Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8285 gt set tftp server_ip_address 9 100 86 130 TFTP server set 8285 gt set tftp file_type boot File type set 8285 gt set tftp file_name Enter file name usr binatm boot140 bin File name set 8285 gt show tftp TFTP Parameters Server IP address 9 100 86 130 File Name usr binatm boot140 bin File type Boot Last Transfer Date 19 Mar 96 Last Transfer Result This file has not been transferred yet 8285 gt show device Manufacture id 53 Part Number 58G9605 EC Level C38846 Serial Number LAGO50 Boot EEPROM version g 1 0 6 Flash EEPROM version v 1 0 0 Flash EEPROM backup version Y 1 0 0 Last Restart 13 30 25 Tue 1 Oct 96 Restart Count 93 8285 gt ping 9 100 86 130 Starting ping hit CTRL C to stop Ping 9 100 86 130 1 packets sent 1 received Ping 9 100 86 130 2 packets sent 2 received 8285 gt download inband You are about to download a new version Are you sure Y N Y Download successful 8285 gt show tftp TFTP Parameters Server IP address 9 100 86 130 File Name usr binatm boot140 bin File type Boot Last Transfer Date
282. onal components 18 at Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e Management and Control Components Control Point components Processing Components Flash memory to store the microcode e 8M byte DRAM for operational code and tables Motorola M68040 processor to execute the microcode Management Components e M360 processor to handle the console interface the same as the IBM 8260 e Data Handling Components CAP CAD components to process cells both inbound and outbound Specific Front End SFE components to handle the physical interfaces inbound and outbound for all ATM ports including ATM 25 Mbps ports ATM 155 Mbps port While this SFE is physically located on the optional 155 Mbps ATM I O Card it can be treated as functionally part of the base unit ATM control point port 3 1 1 1 8285 ATM Control Point The 8285 ATM Control Point has a processor and flash memory The flash memory holds the boot strap code and also the operational code The control point performs the following functions e Signalling entities e Resource management e Address mapping e Topology and route selection e Node management and inband or out of band console interface e Integrated LES BUS The control point manages the rest of the ATM subsystem by sending control cells via an internal port connected to the 25 Mbps HS SFE 3 1 1 2 CAP CAD and SFE
283. onal Business Machines Corporation Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet Engineering Task Force interim inter switch signaling protocol interim local management interface inverse address resolution protocol internet protocol Internetwork Packet eXchange industry standard architecture integrated services digital network International Organization for Standardization International Technical Support Organization International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication kilobyte kilobits per second locally administered address 291 LAN LE LEC LECS LES LIS LLC LNNI LPDU LSU LUNI MAC MAT MB Mbps MIB MPOA MSS MTU NBBS NDIS NetBIOS NIX NNI NSAP NRB OC n ODI OID oSI OSPF PC PCR PCI PCM local area network LAN emulation LAN emulation client LAN emulation client server LAN emulation server logical IP subnetwork logical link control LAN emulation network node interface logical link control protocol data unit link state update LAN emulation user to network interface medium access control mamangement application transporter megabytes megabits per second management information base multiprotocol over ATM Multiprotocol Switched Services maximum transmission unit Networking BroadBand Services network driver interface specification network basic input output system network information exchange
284. onfiguring the Video Distribution Module Video conferencing and transmission using M JPEG is not standardized Proprietary implementations cause interoperability problems The Video Distribution Module is a relatively simple module to configure since it is merely a target for an ATM stream from another source The process is as follows e Enable the VDM port as a UNI interface In the following example The second port of the VDM for our video output is set ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only VPI 4 and VCI 10 values are used UNI signalling is set Flow control is disabled ILMI handshaking is disabled forcing UNI 3 1 signalling 8285 gt set port 3 2 disable 8285 gt set port 3 2 enable vpi_vci 4 10 uni flow_control off ilmi off_sig_3 1 e Configure one PVC between the VDM port and the video source port either local or remote using the SET PVC command SET PVC local_slot port pvc_id remote_slot port remote_hub_number path_type local_vpi remote_vpi bw_alloc bandwidth local_slot port The slot and port number for a local end of the PVC pvc_id This allows you to define multiple PVCs per port remote_slot port The slot and port number for the other end of the PVC remote_hub_number The hub number 13th byte of the ATM address of the other hub Can match the local hub number for local PVCs path_type Specifies the t
285. only Each NNI connection requires that a static route be configured so that the routing mechanism is aware of the destination network The maximum number of static route definitions is 50 per control point e Maximum number of NNI links per port The maximum number of NNI logical links per port is only restricted by the maximum number of VPCs since an NNI logical link needs a unique VPI value to distinguish it from the others Therefore the maximum number of NNI logical links per port is 15 on the 25 Mbps ports and 63 on the other ports The maximum number of NNI logical liks per 8285 is 64 Note Prior to the control point code V1 0 1 static routes could not be defined to nonadjacent clusters This limitation has been removed 102 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ATM Subnetwork Cluster Figure 35 Complex ATM Network Using ATM 8285 Figure 35 shows an ATM network mixing private and public environments Grouping ATM switches into separate clusters limits your network restart time limits the number of topology updates sent as topology information remains within a cluster and reduces the resources required on each node to maintain the network topology ATM clusters in Figure 35 are interconnected in a bigger structure called a subnetwork to improve performances Clusters are interconnected by parallel NNI connections increa
286. only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The interface number for this ATM port vcXConnectEntry 1 vcXInVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VPI value for this connection vcXConnectEntry 2 vcXInVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 217 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VCI value for this connection vcXConnectEntry 3 vcXOutIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The interface number for this ATM port vcXConnectEntry 4 vcXOutVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VPI value for this connection vcXConnectEntry 5 vcXOutVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VCI value for this connection vcXConnectEntry 6 vcXType OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unicast 1 multicast 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Whether this cross connection is part of a unicast or a multicast connection vcXConnectEntry 7 vceXDirection OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER upstream 1 downstream 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Whether this entry identifies this cross connection in the upstream or downstream flow as seen fr
287. onment The Configurator should be installed on the workstation the same way as any other Windows application This is accomplished by invoking WIN OS 2 fullscreen or Windows on 0S 2 desktop and installing according to the instructions in 1 2 Configuration Utility Installation section of this README file Once installed certain WIN OS 2 DOS settings need to be set The below steps are applied in the context of the WIN OS 2 Fullscreen icon 1 From the WIN OS 2 Fullscreen icon open the Settings dialog by double clicking the right mouse button and selecting the Settings popup menu item N lt From the Settings dialog select the Session tab From the Session dialog select the All DOS and WIN OS 2 Settings radio button and click OK w From the All DOS and WIN OS 2 Settings dialog select the DOS DEVICE item from the settings list on left and set the value on right to C TCPIP BIN VDOSTCP SYS Click on Save The above steps should also be applied if you desire to run the Configurator in the context of a 0S 2 program icon directly on desktop or Windows on 0S 2 desktop icon Be sure to read and follow the 1 4 Configuration Utility Program and 0S 2 section of this README in order to insure TCP IP communication over SLIP ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 1 8 NWays Campus Manager The ATM Forum Compliant versio
288. ons ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Up to Up to 12 ATM25 8 ATM155 users users amp servers ATM Campus Backbone 155 Mbps Redundant Links 155 Mbps Figure 16 ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module with Redundant Backbone Links Figure 16 shows how you can use the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module to connect a high performance workgroup into the backbone network to access additional high speed resources In this case up to eight users using workstations with high performance ATM 155 Mbps adapters such as the IBM Turboways ATM 155 Mbps Adapter are connected in to ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Modules installed in the 8285 Expansion Chassis This enables each user to access resources across the ATM backbone network By providing redundant backbone links preferably to separate backbone switches the ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module also provides aggregate backbone access bandwidth as high as 310 Mbps and ensures availability to the workgroup should one of the links fail Up to 12 ATM25 users can also take advantage of this increased bandwidth and availability Whether as a workgroup solution or as a backbone solution the ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media
289. ons sharing token ring bandwidth you can begin to move some of your power users directly to the ATM network by installing ATM25 adapter cards such as the IBM Turboways 25 adapter in their workstations running the simple migration utility and connecting them to an ATM 25 Mbps port on the IBM 8285 Base Unit They now have dedicated bandwidth of 25 Mbps to their desktop and access to all of the resources of the ATM network while still retaining access to the shared media resources such as the full duplex token ring servers We do that with 12 of our workstations reducing the number of workstations on shared token ring segments to 68 Table 10 illustrates the before and after effects of our changes on the available bandwidth Table 10 Bandwidth Improvement with Token Ring LAN Switch Module Device Maximum Bandwidth Available Bandwidth After Kbps Improvement Server ATM Micro ATM25 Ratio Offload Server segment Offload ation Primary Server 155000 155000 155000 811x Secondary Server 32000 32000 32000 167x Token Ring 4000 4942 25x Desktop ATM Desktop 4000 25000 130x Note Ef In this case assuming an even distribution of four workstations per segment on each of 21 available token ring segments Calculated by dividing the total bandwidth available after the change by the original bandwidth available per device which was calculated by dividing the total bandwidth available by the number of devices sharing
290. or managing ATM based interfaces devices networks and services The following are descriptions of the various groups The ATM Interface Configuration Group This group describes the type of ATM traffic on a particular interface It contains ATM interface configuration parameters such as the status of the interface maximum number of VPCs and VCCs supported on an interface the number of configured VPCs and VCCs the number of active VPI and VCI bits VPI VCI of ILMI if at all and the ATM address type The DS3 PLCP Group This group has configuration and state information for those ATM interfaces that use DS3 for carrying ATM cells The ATM Traffic Descriptor Parameter Group This group has information relating the ATM traffic parameters including the QoS class ATM Virtual Path Link VPL Group This group contains configuration and state information of a bi directional VPL Here VPs can be created deleted or modified ATM Virtual Channel Link VCL Group 145 146 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only This group contains configuration and state information of a bi directional VCL Here VCs can be created deleted or modified here Also information can be found on the AAL that is in use on a VC specific information can be found if AAL5 is used such as the type of data encapsulation The Virtual Path VP Cross Connect Group This group contains configuration and state information of all
291. ossible that 8281 configuration is corrupted To return the bridge into it s uninitialized state use the configurator utilities menu to erase the configuration Appendix D Hints and Tips for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 193 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 194 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs This appendix shows the latest version Version 1 6 Oct 1996 of IBM ATM campus switch private MIBs IBM Hub Specific MIB Extensions IBM Signalling Extensions IBM PVC Management Extensions IBM ATM Statistics MIB Extensions Copyright c 1995 International Business Machines Corp All Rights Reserved Copyright IBM Corp 1996 Version 1 1 07 07 95 agents OID for different products administrative OID for test types interface new administrative state wrap reply interface new operational states for wrap amp failing interface clocking scrambling subslot interface available and reserved bandwidth swap microcode switch statistics te tetett Version 1 2 08 17 95 interface new operational states for bandwidth configuration switch max bandwidth version of backup microcode Version 1 3 new tftp error code file already exists new interfaceMediaType coaxial cable and backplane switchStatistics rename into globalThroughput atm kit utopia carrier module
292. oting and cable management issues as well Should you choose to use different types diameters of fiber use the tables in the appendices of IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and User s Guide SA33 0381 to determine if the optical budget for each port is adequate E3 COAXIAL BNC Ports Cable type RG59 Impedance 75 Ohms Attenuation 25dB MAX per 100m Maximum distance 100m D3 COAXIAL BNC Ports Cable type RG59 Impedance 75 Ohms Attenuation 25dB MAX per 100m Maximum distance 68m by default 135m using an option setting see BM 8260 8285 ATM WAN Module Installation and Users Guide SA33 0396 at DS3 parameter Line Buildout ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 6 1 4 Planning for Availability The 8285 switch is designated as a customer setup device If you choose not to have the switch covered under an IBM maintenance plan you may choose to provision one or more spares for key components to improve network availability For your convenience a cross reference of components and part numbers is included in Table 42 on page 181 6 2 Logical Planning The following sections contain information about various aspects of IBM 8285 logical planning Capacity planning Switching capacity ATM bandwidth capacity Integrated LES BUS capacity SSI connection TRS capacity NNI connection Othe
293. oyees only Note There is a well known restriction that the IP interfaces of the IBM 8285 and the IBM 8260 should not use IP network number 10 because it is use d on their internal network This restriction applies not only to the CIP interface of the IBM 8285 but also to that of the LECs It is planned to remove this restriction when the control point code supports PNNI phase 1 expected in 1997 Subnet Mask The mask used to allocate the IP address bits Must match the mask used by the default gateway Default Gateway Specify the address to forward packets to to reach other IP networks when communicating with an IP device beyond the IP network In the LANE network the default gateway should be an IP router on the same ELAN of the IP device or on a legacy LAN via a LANE bridge on the same ELAN Individual MAC Address Specify the individual MAC address of the LEC The address format should be canonical for Ethernet ELAN and non canonical for token ring ELAN and both universal and local administered address UAA LAA are supported It should be unique throughout the transparent bridging network and in a source routing bridging segment just like the MAC address on a legacy LAN Associated LES or LECS ATM address Specify the ATM address of the LES with which to register or the LECS which knows the ATM address of a designated LES The LES will be used for resolving ELAN MAC addresses in to ATM addresses To get the d
294. pgrades You can find the specific steps detailed in the Installation Instructions for your upgrade 1 Upload the files to your TFTP server If using a UNIX server be sure to set the permissions properly using the chmod command E a r lt filename gt Upload your current configuration to the TFTP server to ensure that there is a backup copy available Reminder It is recommended that the following steps be performed with No operational traffic flowing in through the 8285 Normally this operation would be done during a scheduled maintenance period Download the new microcode from the TFTP server by issuing the appropriate SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESSS SET TFTP FILE_TYPE SET TFTP FILE_NAME SET TFTP TARGET_MODULE and DOWNLOAD INBAND commands for each of the following e BOOT microcode e OPERATIONAL microcode e FPGA microcode For the 8285 Base Unit the TARGET_MODULE will be 1 Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 115 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Attention The BOOT and OPERATIONAL code load very quickly approximately 1 minute each However because of extensive error checking on the FPGA code it can take more than 10 minutes Be patient 4 Download the new microcode for any media modules installed in the 8285 Expansion Chassis by issuing the appropriate SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESSS SET TFTP FILE_TYPE SET TFTP FILE_NAME SET TFTP TARGET MODULE and DOWNLOAD INBAND c
295. ported by the 8285 are depending the control point version Version 1 3 For the 25 Mbps port VPIs are in the range 0 3 VCls are in the range of 32 1023 For the other ports VPIs are in the range 0 15 VCls are in the range of 32 1023 Note that certain workstation adapters have limited addressing capability as far as the supported VPIs and VCls are concerned These limitations are based on the number of bits in the ATM header that are recognizable by the workstation adapter and are defined in the ILMI packets exchanged by the adapter The 8285 dynamically adjusts the supported VPI and VCI range on a port to the capability of the attached workstation at the ILMI exchange Version 1 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 For the 25 Mbps ports One of the following three modes ranges can be selected VPI VCI 0 bit 12 bits VPI 0 VCI 0 through 4095 VPI VCI 2 bits 10 bits VPI 0 through 3 VCI 0 through 1023 VPI VCI 4 bits 8 bits VPl 0 through 15 VCI 0 through 2556 81 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only For the other ports One of the following three modes ranges can be selected VPI VCI 0 bit 14 bits VPI 0 VCl 0 through 16383 VPI VCI 4 bits 10 bits VPI 0 through 15 VCl 0 through 1023 VPI VCI 6 bits 8 bits VPIl 0 through 63 VCI 0 through 256 For more details refer to 3 3 4 Control Point V1 4 on page 31 5 1 2 Supported Virtual Connection Types Table 12 shows the type of virtual con
296. ports up to two LES BUSe simultaneously with any combinations of ELAN types such as two token ring ELANs TR LEs two Ethernet ELANs ETH LEs and one TR LE and one ETH LE In addition it supports both TR and ETH LECs simultaneously but it cannot have two LECs with the same ELAN type 7 2 2 LAN Emulation Parameters The only parameters you will need in order to configure LAN Emulation functions are ATM Address This is the 20 byte ATM address to be assigned to the switch s LEC and LES BUS components as well as its to CIP interface This address is comprised of five basic parts 1 ATM network prefix bytes 1 11 2 ATM cluster number ACN byte 12 3 ATM hub number HN byte 13 4 End station identifier ESI bytes 14 19 5 ATM selector field SEL byte 20 In the IBM 8285 there is only one command SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS to define the ATM address and it is to configure the ATM address for the CIP interface The addresses of LAN Emulation components are automatically assigned based on the CIP interface address by changing the selector field of it Table 35 on page 132 shows the Forum Compliant LAN Emulation addresses are assigned Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 131 132 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 35 Address Assignment Rule for the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch LAN Emulation Components ATM Component Selector Value Example CIP address 00 39999999999999000099
297. r Aia aan Ra EN ENA LRA eT enh AE oD Sakae sie Ces de geet a athe Power Supply Specifications of the 8285 Power Supply Specifications of Future 8285 Models Power Budget of the 8285 Expansion Chassis Connection Capacity of IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Transmit Delay Latency per Port 0 Bandwidth Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch LES BUS Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch TRS Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch and IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub 2 References and Process Quick Guide Filenames for System Upgrade Microcode Release 1 0 1 2 Filenames for System Upgrade Microcode Release 1 3 1 4 Filenames for Module Upgrade Microcode Release 1 4 Download Errors and Suggested Fixes Swap Errors and Suggested Fixes Necessary Parameters for 8285 1 2 2 2 Necessary Parameters for 8285 2 laaa aaa a IX Status Messages and Causes Address Assignment Rule for the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch LAN Emulation Components Necessary Parameters for 8285 1 8285 Configurations SET Commands Quick Reference List IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ATM Command List RJ 45 Pin Assignments by Network Type P
298. r Planning Compliance to the standards 6 2 1 Capacity Planning The following sections describe several aspects of capacity planning for the 8285 switch such as Switching Capacity Bandwidth Capacity LES BUS Capacity ATM Topology Management Limitations Note that the values described in the following sections are theoretical maximums and may be different from the practical maximums that apply to your network 6 2 1 1 Switching Capacity Maximum Number of Connections In most cases the maximum number of connections per switch would be constrained by storage such as the number of control blocks rather than by the switch component capacity itself Consequently it may be possible to attain the maximum number of connections supported by the switch on an actual network if the traffic volume is not too much Transmit Delay Latency per Port This value is sometimes used as a measure of the switch s capacity However care should be used in using this value as a proxy for overall throughput in a real world environment It depends on several factors some of which can be unrealistically tuned in a test environment to generate misleading results It is especially affected by the utilization of those components that cause the increase in service waiting time buffer shortages and so on Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 97 98 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The system switching capacity maximum
299. r the maximum SDU size when your ATM network attached to a real Ethernet network via an ATM bridge which doesn t have fragment capability ELAN Name Specify the Emulated LAN name The default value is IBM_lantype_LANn with lantype set to ETHERNET or TOKEN_RING based on the ELAN type and n set to 1 or 2 based on the server ID For example the default ELAN name for the Ethernet LES BUS with server ID 1 is IBM_ETHERNET_LAN1 LEC Parameters The integrated LEC function supports the TCP IP protocol over Forum Compliant LAN Emulation and provides a node management interface to a Telnet station or to a SNMP manager To configure the LEC use the SET DEVICE LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT command with the following parameters ELAN Type Specify the ELAN type to which the LEC belongs The valid options are ETH Ethernet LANE or TR token ring LANE Ethernet Type Specify the Ethernet type when the ELAN type is Ethernet The default setting is 802 3 and the Ethernet type should be the same as the communicating device Note that there are many devices that have the other Ethernet type DIX Ethernet V2 as the default IP Address The IP address to be assigned to the switch This must be unique And if the IBM 8285 is configured with multiple IP addresses they have to be on different IP networks because they are treated as the IP interfaces of an IP node Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 133 134 This soft copy for use by IBM empl
300. re and manage the 8285 and the ATM media modules installed in the expansion unit the 8285 provides a command line interface that can be accessed via an ASCII terminal connected locally or via a modem to the RS 232 port on the front panel of the module The command line interface allows you to configure and display the status of the various components of the 8285 ATM switch system Additionally it allows you to maintain the various software components of the 8285 by downloading new levels of microcode for these components Finally the command line interface provides you with the ability to collect traces and dumps of the various components in the event of problems that may occur in the ATM switching subsystem A 1 1 How to Access the Command Line Interface To be able to access the command line interface you need to connect an ASCII terminal VT100 or compatible to the RS 232 port on the 8285 base unit This connection can be either a local connection or through a telecommunication line using a pair of modems In the 8285 shipping group you will find an attachment cable with adapters to be used for connecting the ASCII terminal to the RS 232 port You must ensure that the ASCII terminal is configured according to the following factory default settings for the RS 232 e 9600 baud e 8 data bits e No parity e 1 stop bit These settings can be changed once a terminal with the previous configuration is connected The process of how to change th
301. re those requested when creating the PVC The actual values used by the network to satisfy these requirements may slightly differ These values are attached to virtual links and are available in virtual link tables such as the RFC 1695 VPL VCL tables INDEX atmPvcIndex atmPvcIdentifier atmPvcTable 1 AtmPvcEntry SEQUENCE atmPvcIndex INTEGER atmPvcIdentifier INTEGER atmPvcRowStatus RowStatus atmPvcType INTEGER atmPvcEndPoint INTEGER atmPvcVpi INTEGER atmPvcVci INTEGER atmPvcBackwardQos INTEGER atmPvcForwardQos INTEGER atmPvcBackwardType INTEGER atmPvcForwardType INTEGER atmPvcBackwardParm1 INTEGER atmPvcForwardParml INTEGER atmPvcIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifIndex value of the ATM interface used by this PVC atmPvcEntry 1 atmPvcIdentifier OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A value used to uniquely identify this PVC on this interface To create a new PVC on a given interface an unused PVC identifier must be found atmPvcEntry 2 atmPvcRowStatus OBJECT TYPE ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only SYNTAX INTEGER active 1 notInService 2 notReady 3 createAndWait 5 destroy 6 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION States values active the PVC is operatio
302. rmation 159 8 4 Nways Manager for Windows 0 00020505 167 8 41 OVERVIOW osia Gog iara p Soe i a Ae eee dee e d te ia 167 8 42 Prerequisites seinaka Swe Bate be ole ata Ge Moe BP 170 8 4 3 Using Nways Manager for Windows with IBM 8285 170 Appendix A 8285 ATM Control Point Commands 171 A 1 Command Line Interface 0 00000002 ee 171 A 1 1 How to Access the Command Line Interface 171 A 1 2 Access Mode 00 pee 173 A 1 3 How to Change Administrator and User Password 173 A 1 4 Resetting the Password to Factory Default 174 A 1 5 How to Change Terminal Settings 174 A 2 IBM 8285 ATM Command List 02 200200 176 Appendix B Pinouts for Ports and Cables 179 B 1 Pinouts for ATM25 and Other Common Network Connectors 179 B 2 Other Cabling Considerations 0 0000 179 B 2 1 Converter Cables 0 2 000002 eee 180 B 2 2 Crossover Cables 0 0000 ee ee 180 Appendix C Part Numbers for Key Components 181 Appendix D Hints and Tips for the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module 183 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBS 195 Appendix F Special Notices 2 277 Appendix G Related Publications 2 2 2 279 G 1 International Technical Support Organizatio
303. ro ssLastChangedEntry 3 ssTimeLastChanged OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX TimeTicks ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The value of SysUpTime at the time that the last change was detected to any of the information included in the summary table entry for this slot and subslot A change in the value of this object signals the management station to re get the corresponding summary information ssLastChangedEntry 4 ssLastChangedSummary OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX OCTET STRING ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This object contains the value of ssTimeLastChanged for each slot subslot in the concentrator The first two octets contain the version of this object The data following the version begins with the first slot and all of its sub slots before continuing with the next slot staticSummary 3 IBM 8260 Power Group This group is used for managing the power in the IBM 8260 hub Hub power mode ocPowerModeAdminStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER fault tolerant 1 not fault tolerant 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current desired state of hub power fault tolerant mode Setting this object to fault tolerant 1 will reserve one power supply s worth of power from the power budget for fault tolerant operation provided sufficient power is available Setting this object to not fault tolerant 2 returns the reserved power to the power budget
304. rocedure for doing so is described below in 7 1 3 1 Checking ARP Server for Registration on page 127 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e If so check the IP parameters you configured on the 8285 ATM Control Point to ensure that they are correct Pay particular attention to your IP subnet and your IP subnet mask e If you are not registered with the ARP server try the steps outlined in 7 1 3 2 Correcting ARP Registration 7 1 3 1 Checking ARP Server for Registration If you are unable to ping the ARP server or any other IP device check to see if the ARP server is properly registering your IP and ATM addresses For AlX ARP servers this can be checked in two ways 1 Using SMIT the Systems Management Interface Tool 2 Using the fast path command arp t atm a Checking ARP Registration via SMIT To check ARP registration via SMIT perform the following steps 1 Log on to the server as root 2 Key in smit or smitty the character based version and press Enter 3 Select the following menu items in sequence e Communications Applications and Services e TCP IP e Further Configuration e Network Interfaces e List SVCs over an ATM 100 Network or List SVCs over an ATM 155 Network depending on your interface Checking ARP Registration via Fast Path Command To check ARP registration via the fast path command perform the following steps 1 Log
305. rocode 110 6 4 2 Acquiring the Latest Microcode 111 6 4 3 Upgrading the Microcode 2 020004 115 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 123 7 1 Configuring Classical IP 0 2 0000000002 ae 123 7 1 1 Classical IP Parameters 0 0 000 00004 123 7 1 2 Configuring a Simple CIP Network 123 7 1 3 Troubleshooting Your CIP Network 126 7 1 4 Configuring a Local Multi Switch Network for CIP 128 7 2 Configuring LAN Emulation 000000000200 131 7 2 1 8285 LAN Emulation Functions Overview 131 7 2 2 LAN Emulation Parameters 0044 131 7 2 3 Configuring a Simple LANE Network 135 7 2 4 Troubleshooting Your LANE Network 139 Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 145 8 1 Management Information Bases MIBs 145 8 2 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM Overview 148 8 3 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX 149 8 321 Overview ok nck detent p amp doe Bh ee Bet Ad settee heen ee ete 149 8 3 2 Prerequisites sins as 4 ace Bed es 4 os oe Bd Ge Mek ed 154 8 3 3 Using Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX with IBM 8285 156 8 3 4 IBM 8285 Node Related Info
306. rotocol 1 A set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the behavior of functional units in achieving communication 2 In SNA the meanings of and the sequencing rules for requests and responses used for managing the network transferring data and synchronizing the states of network components 3 A specification for the format and relative timing of information exchanged between communicating parties protocol data unit PDU A unit of data specified in a layer protocol and consisting of protocol control information and layer user data R RIP Routing Information Protocol A vector distance routing protocol Versions of RIP are used with IP and IPX S SAP Service Advertising Protocol An IPX protocol used to advertise the location of available services SECAM Sequentielles Couleurs Avec Memoire Video resolution 625 rows X 700 lines 25 frames per second Glossary 287 Standard used in France and Russia SDU Service Data Unit Data as it appears at the interface between a layer and the layer immediately above segment A single ATM link or group of interconnected ATM links of an ATM connection signaling virtual channel A virtual channel for transporting signaling information SLIP Serial Line IP An IETF Standard for running IP over serial line communication links SNA System Network Architecture A networking architecture developed by IBM currently used for large systems SNAP S
307. rporation in the United States and or other countries AIX IBM LANStreamer NetView Nways OS 2 Copyright IBM Corp 1996 277 278 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only PROFS SystemView TURBOWAYS 400 The following terms are trademarks of other companies C bus is a trademark of Corollary Inc PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company and is used by IBM Corporation under license UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Microsoft Windows and the Windows 95 logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation ObjectStore is a trademark of Object Design Inc Java and HotJava are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc Other trademarks are trademarks of their respective companies ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Appendix G Related Publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this redbook G 1 International Technical Support Organization Publications For information on ordering these ITSO publications see How To Get ITSO Redbooks on page 281 ATM Campus Introduction Planning and Troubleshooting Overview GA27 4089 Campus ATM Design Guidelines SG24 5002 Local Area Network Concepts and Products Adapters
308. rt 0 0 OPERATIONAL NonProxy 00 20 35 34 20 87 81 port 1 1 OPERATIONAL NonProxy 02 00 88 88 88 88 81 port 1 8 OPERATIONAL NonProxy 8285 gt Figure 46 The Sample Console Screen to Check the LANE Registration Notes This SHOW LAN_EMUL SERVERS command was issued when the server was up and the clients have requested to be registered 2 The number of clients registered with the IBM 8285 integrated LES are shown on this line The clients registered with the IBM 8285 integrated LES are shown in these lines This information only appears when you specify either of the servers using the server ID Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 141 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8285 gt show device E 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Name 8285 Location For assistance contact Manufacture id 53 Part Number 58G9605 EC Level C38846 Serial Number LAGO50 Boot EEPROM version v 1 4 0 Flash EEPROM version v 1 4 0 Flash EEPROM backup version v 1 0 0 Last Restart 14 57 56 Thu 17 Oct 96 Restart Count 1 ATM address 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 01 00 gt Subnet atm IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet mask 00 00 00 00 gt Subnet lan emulation ethernet 802 3 Up Name IBM ETHERNET _LAN1 MAC Address O200CCCCCCCC IP address 9 100 86 200 Subnet mask FF FF FF CO ATM address 239 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 00 Config LES addr 39 99 99 99 99 99
309. rt Plug and Play installation by automatically initializing as a multiport transparent bridge This allows the module to learn the network addresses and eliminates all pre installation configuration requirements In most cases however you will eventually want to customize this initial configuration with such parameters as an IP address SNMP parameters and port filters Each port automatically identifies what kind of token ring connection it has determining whether it is Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 73 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only A lobe port to another concentrator A dedicated connection to a single device A connection to another token ring switch Operating at 4 or 16 Mbps Operating in half or full duplex mode These automatic configuration capabilities can be disabled for instance when connecting to an auto speed sensing adapter Support a transparent spanning tree configuration fully compliant with IEEE 802 1d standards This ensures that there is only one path active to any segment in the network The spanning tree function has configurable parameters for both port cost and port priority enabling more accurate management of your network topology Support a maximum frame size of 4540 bytes In cut through mode frames larger than 4540 bytes will be truncated and terminated with an abort sequence In store and forward mode the switch port will reject frames larger than 4540 bytes and will g
310. s Statistics Group Statistics for individual VP and VC connections are found here e IBM Signalling Extensions This IBM MIB extension defines ATM signalling support on the device Below is a brief list of the information that can be accessed via this MIB Number of supported signalling channels Range of reserved VPs and VCs VPI VCI used for the signalling channel on a port The state of the Q2931 interface Q2931 statistics such as the number of call attempts and rejections Information about Q2931 calls in progress such as calling and called party Details of cleared called including the ATM interface involved calling and called party date and time cause of clearing QoS requested and the bandwidth requested Details and statistics on the SAAL e IBM PVC Management MIB Extensions Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 147 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only IBM ATM Statistics MIB Extensions These IBM MIB extensions are fully listed in Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs on page 195 8 2 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM Overview 148 This chapter describes an introduction to the Nways Campus Manager ATM This is a state of the art network manager for ATM campus network Nways Campus Manager ATM is a fully integrated package of network management applications for campus ATM networks This application provides a complete ATM topology and management package for all ATM capable IBM devices such
311. s Guide SA33 0361 279 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only IBM 8260 8285 ATM WAN Module Installation and Users Guide SA33 0396 e 8260 8285 ATM 25 MBps Concentration Module Installation and User s Guide SA33 0383 280 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only How To Get ITSO Redbooks This section explains how both customers and IBM employees can find out about ITSO redbooks CD ROMs workshops and residencies A form for ordering books and CD ROMs is also provided This information was current at the time of publication but is continually subject to change The latest information may be found at URL http www redbooks ibm com How IBM Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks Employees may request ITSO deliverables redbooks BookManager BOOKs and CD ROMs and information about redbooks workshops and residencies in the following ways PUBORDER to order hardcopies in United States GOPHER link to the Internet type GOPHER WTSCPOK ITSO IBM COM Tools disks To get LIST3820s of redbooks type one of the following commands TOOLS SENDTO EHONE4 TOOLS2 REDPRINT GET SG24xxxx PACKAGE TOOLS SENDTO CANVM2 TOOLS REDPRINT GET SG24xxxx PACKAGE Canadian users only To get lists of redbooks TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS REDBOOKS GET REDBOOKS CATALOG TOOLS SENDTO USDIST MKTTOOLS MKTTOOLS GET ITSOCAT TXT TOOLS SENDTO USDIST MKTTOOLS MKTTOOLS GET LISTSERV PA
312. s are listed in Table 21 on page 98 below Table 21 Connection Capacity of IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Maximum Bidirectional Connections IBM 8285 Base Unit With ATM firmware upgrade kit 2 016 2 Without ATM firmware upgrade kit 992 ATM Module Maximum Bidirectional Connections Maximum Multipoint Parties per IBM 8285 With ATM firmware upgrade kit 2 016 2 Without ATM firmware upgrade kit 992 IBM 8285 with Expansion Unit With ATM firmware upgrade kit 2 016 Without ATM firmware upgrade kit 2 016 PVCs per IBM 8285 100 H 1 024 Defined here as the sum of point to point PTP and point to multipoint PTM connections 2 The module CAP CAD is capable of supporting up to 4 064 bidirectional connections but the number is restricted to 2016 due to the 8285 ATM Control Point s capacity 2048 PVC 32 PVC reserved Due to the IBM 8285 control point capacity The number is 6 000 on the IBM 8260 A CPSW g Sum of PtP and PtM and also sum of PVP and PVC connections In the case of the 8285 switch the transmit latency is dependent on whether the switching is done in the base unit via CAP CAD or when it is installed in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis with its switch on a chip Table 22 shows the maximum latency for both switching modes under both normal and high utilization Table 22 Transmit Delay Latency per Port Switching Mode CAP CAD switch on a chip
313. s equal to interfaceMediaSpeed The interfaceMaxBandwidth is given in bits per second The interfaceMaxBandwidth can be modified only when the Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 213 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only port is disabled interfaceEntry 16 interfaceFrameFormat OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER none 1 sonet sts 3c 2 sdh stm 1 3 ds3 4 e3 5 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The format of the frames exchanged on this port For a 155 Mbits LAN port 2 formats are supported sonet sts 3c and sdh stm 1 It can only be modified if the port atm access is UNI or NNI The frame format of a wan port cannot be modified For the other ports the frame format cannot be modified and is always returned as none The frame format can be changed only when the port is disabled interfaceEntry 17 switch statistics globalThroughputStats OBJECT IDENTIFIER physical 5 global ThroughputMonitoring OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER on 1 off 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION When on the switch throughput is monitored When off the switch thoughput is not monitored Note that the monitoring decreases the system overall performances globalThroughputStats 1 global ThroughputAggregateOutCells OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The total number of cells transmitted from the s
314. s matched with the left I O card while the right or bottom socket is matched with the right I O card Arrows have been placed on both sockets pointing to their respective I O cards There is only one correct way to insert the VPD PROM in each socket This can be done by aligning the notch on the chip with the notch on the socket However inserting the chip backwards will not damage it the port simply will not be able to register properly with the 8285 ATM Control Point Reversing the chip should solve the problem Any VPD PROM that ships with an A02 WAN I O card can be used with any of the other I O cards without affecting card function However the card will not be listed properly in the configuration which could be very confusing to someone managing the network It is strongly advised that you carefully match the VPD PROM part numbers with their respective I O cards as listed in Table 7 on page 69 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 7 A02 WAN I O Card VPD Part Numbers 4 8 3 Sample Scenario The ATM WAN Module is designed to provide high speed access to the WAN Card Name Feature Code Part Number VPD Part Number 1 port E3 I O card 8501 51H4335 51H4570 51H4604 Switzerland 51H4605 Sweden 51H4605 UK 51H4606 New Zealand 1 port DS3 1 O 51H4338 51H4571 card 1 port OC3 I O 8503 51H4558 51H4572 card SMF 1 port OC3 I O 51H
315. s module moduleEntry 9 moduleMaxVpc OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The maximum number of VPC supported by this module The current number of VPC that can be used is the difference between moduleMaxVpc and moduleUsedVpc moduleEntry 10 moduleUsedVpc OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of VPCs currently in use for this module The current number of VPCs that can be used is the difference between moduleMaxVpc and moduleUsedVpc moduleEntry 11 moduleMaxVcc OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The maximum number of VCCs supported by this module The current number of VCCs that can be used is the difference between moduleMaxVcc and moduleUsedVcc moduleEntry 12 moduleUsedVcc OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The number of VCC currently in use for this module The current number of VCC that can be used is the difference between moduleMaxVcc and moduleUsedVcc moduleEntry 13 Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 205 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only ATM ports portTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF PortEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table provides the list of ports attached to the ATM switch ATM ports These ports belong to ATM modul
316. s the VPI VCI When CAP_Up receives the first 4 byte block with SP it now has all the information it needs to identify a particular connection SP VPI and VCI From these three values CAP_Up determines the inbound leaf control block address LCBAup which is the pointer to the leaf control block LCB for this connection b The LCB contains the target blade TB TB LCBAup and source blade SB and RB NRB connection parameter are given to CAD_Up to be written to the header of the internal cell in CAD_Store CAP_Up knows the address of the beginning of this cell so that the address is also given to CAD_Up to ensure that the information is written in the correct place in CAD_Store In the case of an unknown SP VP VC the cell is released by CAP_Up by sending to CAD_Up the cell buffer address which can be used for another data movement CAP_Up also performs smart discard on NRB AALS frame flows which purges cells on an AAL5 frame basis in the case of NRB node congestion 3 Place the cell in the queue The cell is put by CAD_Up into the appropriate output queue with the RB NRB indication so that prioritization of traffic can occur There is an RB queue and an NRB queue The cell is now ready to be switched Switch the cell This step depends on whether or not the IBM 8285 has an expansion unit In other words whether the switching is done by the CAP CAD or by the switch chip When the IBM 8285 is installed without the expansio
317. sConfigured 9 wrongNetworkPrefix 10 wrongNodeNumber 11 disabled failing 12 failing line 13 wrap no signal 14 wrap idle 15 wrap failing internal 16 wrap failing line 17 idle no bandwidth 18 idle internal error 19 disabled no bandwidth 20 wrap far end no signal 21 wrap far end idle 22 wrap far end failing 23 wrap far end failing line 24 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The operational state for this port unknown the status of this port is unknown this can be the result of a module in error disabled nosignal no activity is detected at the physical layer while the port is disabled If the port is a SSI port the bandwidth configuration is valid disabled idle activity from the remote device attached to this port has been detected by the physical layer The port is disabled If the port is a SSI port the bandwidth configuration is valid failing an internal hard error has been detected on this port while the port is enabled no signal no activity is detected at the physical layer while the port is enabled idle activity from the remote device attached to this Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 209 210 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only port has been detected by the physical layer The port is enabled in service the remote device successfully acknowledges ILMI polling requests and SVC registration pv
318. sary to understand the internal frame format it uses This format is described below 3 2 1 1 Internal Cell Format The 8285 switch uses the same internal frame format a 64 byte extension of the standard 53 byte ATM cell as the 8260 hub This cell is constructed by the following process e The ATM cell received from a port by the SFE e The SFE calculates a header error check value and compares it to the HEC that arrived in the cell s header e If no error is detected the calculated and transmitted HEC values match the SFE strips the HEC from the cell s header and sends the resulting 52 byte ATM cell to the CAP CAD 22 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The CAP CAD adds a 2 byte internal header called a routing header RH and 1 byte trailer The RH contains the information necessary to route the internal cell Basically the switching information is contained in the Source Blade SB and Target Blade TB fields which correspond to ports on the switch on a chip and which the switch uses in order forward the cell to the correct blade s The switch itself does not use destination port or VPC VCC number when switching the cell However at the module level the CAP CAD would forward the cell to the appropriate port s based on the target port TP contained in the format field of the RH Note In this context blade refers to the set of components that s
319. se either direct or LAN ATM connections to access the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module for subsequent configurations The Configuration Utility Program provides a set of windows that allow you to configure and manage the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Figure 28 on page 65 shows how you can navigate between various windows provided by the Configuration Utility Program ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Profile Template Selection Select T R or Ethemet Bridge Configuration Bridge Wide Configuratio ATM SNMP Trap IP Physical Configuration Management Configuration Transparent Bridging Port Ethernet SNMP Views Bridge Wide Settings Port Specific Settings Ethemet Port Configuration Token Ring Port Configuration Spanning Tree Configuration Token Ring Ethemet Bridging Configuration Configuratio Filters SSAP Ethernet Spanning Spanning Filters Type Tree Tree Filters SNAP ATM ATM Filters MAG Physical Physical MAG Address Port Port Bridgi SSAP daca Ring Filters LAN LAN Number Emulation Emulation LAN Filters Filters LAN Emulation Emulation Settings Settings Figure 28 Windows Displayed by the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Configurator For more information about how to install and use the Configuration Utility Program please refer to Nways 8285 ATM TR Ethernet LAN Bridge Module In
320. se of higher bandwidth requirements e Higher resolutions up to HDTV levels e Tremendous flexibility in compression rates MPEG 2 provides the standard for high quality motion video compression It is accepted by all segments of the entertainment broadcasting and video editing industry 4 6 1 1 MPEG 2 Data Streams MPEG 2 allows for the multiplexing of many independent audio and video streams called Elementary Streams into a System Stream with synchronization information and audio video correlation information There are two types of system stream 1 Program data stream This is suitable in environments where reliable storage is ensured 2 Transport data stream This is designed to transmit audiovisual content over networks The MPEG 2 transport data stream carries video and audio in the same data stream within separate fields All video and audio material is stamped with presentation time stamps at the time of encoding These time stamps are synchronized during the decoding process This ensures synchronization of data without perceivable jitter 4 6 1 2 Multiplexing and Synchronization MPEG 2 defines a system layer that provides the ability to multiplex and synchronize multiple video and audio streams and other private data The system layer includes clocking information between the encoder and decoder Even when an MPEG 2 stream is stored the decoder may read the clock values to accurately recreate the motion picture The
321. sed by a connection can be graphically displayed Nways Campus Manager ATM allows you to perform the following connection tracking functions e List and delete SVCs e Show the characteristics of SVCs such as the calling and called party and QoS parameters e List delete and create PVCs e Show the characteristics of a PVC e Track the connection including the VPI VCI labels of each segment of the connection and what physical ports the connection goes through Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 151 152 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Product Specific Module PSM Support The following PSMs are supported corresponding with MAT function e IBM 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub e IBM 8230 Token Ring Concentrator Model 003 013 213 04A 04P e IBM 8238 Token Ring Stackable Hub IBM 8271 Nways Ethernet LAN Switch e IBM 8272 Nways Token Ring LAN Switch e IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge e IBM 8282 ATM Workgroup Concentrator e IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup Switch Base Unit 8 3 1 2 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM V2 for AIX Nways Campus Manager ATM V2 provides the following functional enhancements in addition to V1 New PSMs support The PSMs views for the following devices are newly supported IBM 8210 MSS Server Release 1 5 IBM 8285 Expansion Unit ATM 4 port 100 Mbps MIC or SC Fiber Module ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module
322. should first attempt to ping the 8281 bridge to prove connectivity before using the 8281 configurator ping 1 2 3 5 If the ping is successful you may then use the 8281 configurator serially attached 1 5 Configuration Utility Program and 0S 2 with TCP IP V3 0 1 You must have the following installed Multi Protocol Transport Services MPTS V2 0 with the Dos Windows Access Kit selected Configure LAN adapter with TCP IP protocol NOTE If you don t have a LAN adapter you must add the following lines to your CONFIG SYS following the line containing DEVICE C MPTN PROTOCOL AFOS2 SYS DEVICE C MPTN PROTOCOL AFINET SYS DEVICE C MPTN PROTOCOL IFNDIS SYS TCP IP V3 0 for 0S 2 2 The serial port and TCP IP SLIP interface must be enabled and configured 1 6 MTU size 1500 VJ compression off IP address 1 2 3 6 destination IP address 1 2 3 5 You may want to create a command file NOTE example shows connection to COM2 Line 1 gt mode com2 19200 n 8 Line 2 gt slip com2 ifconfig 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 5 mtu 1500 speed 19200 After setting these parameters and restarting TCP you should first attempt to ping the 8281 bridge to prove connectivity before using the 8281 configurator ping 1 2 3 5 If the ping is successful you may then use the 8281 configurator serially attached SNMP MIB Browser s Handling of Octet Strings When using some MIB Browsers eg NetView for AIX don t be
323. shows how you can connect the high performance workgroup into the backbone network to access additional high speed resources By implementing a second backbone link connected to a different switch in the backbone you can provide additional bandwidth for your users and enhance the network s availability to your workgroup even if one of the collapse point switches fails Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 47 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 6 Video Distribution Module The Video Distribution Module is a double slot video concentrator module that can be used to provide low cost high quality video distribution to standard TV monitors It has the following characteristics e Eight independently addressable MPEG 2 decoder ports Each port can support an MPEG 2 video stream encoded at data rates of 1 5 15 Mbps simultaneously e Eight separate audio and video output connections Video composite baseband NTSC EIA Standard RS 170A or PAL in Release 1 1 Video Resolutions e SIF 352x240 pixels NTSC HHR or Half D1 352x480 pixels NTSC e CCIR 601 or Broadcast 704x480 pixels NTSC Comparable PAL resolutions Audio stereo balanced or unbalanced e Supports MPEG 2 Main Level Main Profile 4 2 0 video and MPEG 1 audio e Supports MPEG 2 Elementary Stream or MPEG 1 Elementary Stream encapsulated in an MPEG 2 Transport Stream at speeds of up to 15 Mbps e Supports a Single Program Transport Stream that
324. sing bandwidth link aggregation and offering redundancy 6 2 2 Standards Compliances The following section describes additional planning information about the IBM 8285 in accordance with the ATM standards Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 103 104 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 6 2 2 1 Compliance to the Standards The IBM 8285 is compliant to the following standard specifications Physical Interface As to the physical interface refer to section 6 1 3 ATM Ports and Cabling on page 95 UNI User to Network Interface There are three versions of UNI standardized by The ATM Forum V3 0 V3 1 and V4 0 The IBM 8285 supports the following UNI versions V3 0 V3 1 In addition the 8285 switch supports the dynamic interconnection between UNI V3 0 and V3 1 devices as well Both SVC and PVC are supported and they can be defined on the same physical port NNI Network to Network Interface There are two protocols of NNI standardized by The ATM Forum IISP Interim Inter switch Signaling Protocol previously called PNNI Phase 0 and PNNI private network to network interface Phase 1 The IBM 8285 supports the following NNI protocols IISP The IISP protocol is called NNI in the IBM campus ATM Switch terminology LANE LAN Emulation There are two versions of LANE standardized by The ATM Forum V1 0 and V2 0 The IBM 8285 supports the following LANE version and components LANE
325. ss 0200CCCCCCCC Canonical format Associated 39999999999999000099 Use pre defined LES ATM LES or LECS 99010999999999990102 ATM address address NO_LECS_WITH_LES The commands we need are e SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS e SET LAN_EMUL SERVER e SET DEVICE LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT e SET PORT The SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS command causes the ATM subsystem to reset so you have to save the configuration using SAVE ALL command if there are unsaved parameters Figure 44 on page 138 is an annotated transcript of the commands used to configure and test our simple LANE network Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 137 138 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch C Copyright IBM Corp 1996 All rights reserved Password Welcome to system administrator service on 8285 8285 gt set device atm_address Enter ATM address 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09 99 99 99 99 99 This call will reset the ATM subsystem Are you sure Y N Y Press Enter 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch C Copyright IBM Corp 1996 All rights reserved Password Welcome to system administrator service on 8285 8285 gt set device lan_emulation_client Enter lan type eth ip_address 9 100 86 200 subnet_mask ff ff ff c0 Some parameters are missing Client state unchanged 2 8285 gt set device lan_emulation_client Enter lan type eth no_lecs_with_les Enter address 39 99 99 99 99 99 99 00 00 99 99 01 09
326. st match the mask used by the default gateway Default gateway The address to forward packets to to reach other IP networks 7 1 2 Configuring a Simple CIP Network The figures below show a simple CIP network both physically and logically comprised of an IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch and an ARP server Copyright IBM Corp 1996 123 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only OOOO P e camme m f na E n E a EE 8285 Control Point CIP Client ee ARP Server TFTP Server Figure 38 Simple CIP Network Physical View ATM CIP Campus Network oreo P ea 9 OON 8285 Control Point CIP Client ARP Server TFTP Server Figure 39 Simple CIP Network Logical View The parameters we use in our example are listed in Table 32 Because we have only a single switch both the 8285 ATM Control Point and the ARP server are in the same logical ATM network and share the same ATM network prefix cluster number and hub number They are also part of the same IP subnetwork so that they can communicate directly with each other Table 32 Page 1 of 2 Necessary Parameters for 8285 1 Parameter Value Comments IP address 9 100 86 150 Subnet Mask FF FF FF CO Must be entered in dotted hexadecimal Default 9 100 86 130 Gateway ATM prefix 3999999999999900009999 First 11 bytes of address ACN 01 12th byte
327. stallation and Users Guide SA33 0361 Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 7 6 Running and Stored Configuration Parameters When the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module is running there are always the following two sets of parameters stored e Running parameters These are the parameter values that are in use by the operational code e Stored parameters These are the parameter values that exist in FLASH memory and are used only during the startup The stored parameters in the FLASH memory can be changed using the Configuration Utility Program by downloading new values for the configuration parameters This can be done by creating a file of new parameter values called profile and sending this file to the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module To use new parameters as the running parameters you need to restart the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Once the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module is in operational mode you can only view and change the stored parameters using the Configuration Utility Program To view and change the running parameters you must use an SNMP management station 66 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 8 ATM WAN Module The ATM WAN Module is a single slot WAN concentrator module that has the following characteristics e Provides wide area access to campus ATM networks at speeds ranging from E3 34 368 Mbps to O
328. started And the network or the LES congestion may prevent them from the successfully completing the registration process within the allowed period For example PCs using the IBM ATM device driver have retry count limit for the registration request but IBM 8281 and 8285 internal LECs do not 7 2 4 3 Other Considerations When the communication between LECs is unable to be established even though both LECs are registered with the LES the typical reasons are as follows Ethernet type Check to see if the same Ethernet type is configured for both LECs For LECs to communicate with each other they should be configured with the same Ethernet type 802 3 or DIX Ethernet V2 If one of the LECs that is unable to communicate is the IBM 8285 s you can check the Ethernet type from the console using SET DEVICE command as shown in Figure 45 on page 140 IP network number Chapter 7 IBM 8285 Configuration 143 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only If one of the LECs that is unable to communicate is the IBM 8285 s check to see if the IP interfaces CIP Ethernet LEC and token ring LEC have been defined with different subnetworks If the IP interfaces are on the same subnetwork only the CIP interface is used 144 A Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management This chapter describes the SNMP based management functions that are availabl
329. station running this program must be able to access the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module either via the service port or through a LAN or ATM port To use the service port the workstation must be directly attached to the serial EIA 232 port labeled service on the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module see Figure 27 on page 64 and must use the Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP to communicate with the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Therefore make sure that the TCP IP protocol is running in the workstation and that SLIP is correctly set up in the TCP IP configuration Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 63 64 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8281 Module 66 66 66 Null Modem cable Workstation with base TCPIP DOS and Windows Figure 27 The ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Service Port Connection To access the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module via a LAN or ATM port the workstation running the Configuration Utility Program must have IP connectivity through the network either directly or through bridges routers etc to be able to reach the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module s LAN or ATM port In this case the TCP IP stack in the workstation must be configured to provide such a connectivity Note At the initial startup of the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module you must use the direct connection to access the module in order to load a valid configuration After that you may u
330. support interfaceTable new attribute maxBandwidth interfaceTable new attribute frame format interfaceTable new value for interfaceOperState disabled no bandwidth interfaceTable interfaceScrambling becomes read only e tett Version 1 4 support for the 8285 expansion group featureTable moduleTable support for the daughter cards on the atm kit support for the redundant switch support for config filetype and the save revert option Version 1 5 expansion group 25M module support LAN Emulation group integrated MSS server WAN interfaces functionsConfiguration 195 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Hub Chassis chassisAgents conc env modules ocPower ocInventory moduleOperState incompatible level interfaceTable interfaceScrambling becomes read write Version 1 6 3x155M module support chassis traps PVC multicast calltype added PVC multicast Add createAndWait value for atmPvcEpRowStatus ATM SWITCHING NODE MIB DEFINITIONS BEGIN IMPORTS Counter Gauge IpAddress DisplayString enterprises TimeTicks FROM RFC1155 SMI OBJECT TYPE FROM RFC 1212 sysObjectID ifPhysAddress ifIndex FROM RFC1213 MIB ibm OBJECT IDENTIFIER enterprises 2 ibmProd OBJECT IDENTIFIER ibm 6 atmSw OBJECT IDENTIFIER ibmProd 33 Contact JB Schmitt SCHMITT at LGEPROFS DateAndTime OCTET STRING SIZE 8 A date
331. t for the VCs Network Prefix Group This group has information on the network prefix in use on the user side of the UNI and its validity Address Group This group has information on the ATM address in use on the user side of the UNI and its validity ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only e IBM Hub Specific MIB Extensions This MIB is an enterprise specific MIB for the IBM Campus ATM Hubs Following is a brief description of the groups defined in these MIBs Traps Control Group This group allows you to configure what traps are sent Switch Control Group This group determines which slots are controlled by the switch ATM Modules Group This group gives details on the modules such as the maximum number of supported VPs and VCs the number of VPs and VCs in use and the type of module ATM Port Group Information can be found here on the number of ports on a module cable type status and what interfaces it supports UNI NNI or SSI ATM Interface Group This group maps for each ATM port the MIB II interface index and the physical slot port numbers Cross Connect Group Information on the label swapping tables for VPs and VCs is stored here Neighbor Devices Group Here information can be found on the ATM devices connected on ports such as the IP address and description TFTP Group This group controls the parameters for TFTP download function
332. t with its current configuration This state does not apply for UNI port idle internal error The port is enabled and activity from the remote device is detected but an internal error has occurred during the checking of the bandwidth configuration This may be due to a lack of connection ressources in the module where this port is located disabled no bandwidth the enabling of the port is not possible because there is not enough bandwidth to operate the port with its current configuration This state applies only for a SSI port wrap far end no signal the port is in wrap far end mode ie the remote end of the line is ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only wrapped and no signal is detected on the line wrap far end idle the port is in wrap far end mode ie the remote end of the line is wrapped and a valid signal is detected on the line wrap far end failing the port is in wrap far end mode ie the remote end of the line is wrapped and an internal error is detected wrap far end failing line the port is in wrap far end mode ie the remote end of the line is wrapped and an invalid signal is detected on the line When disabled the port may be in only one of the following states unknown disabled failing disabled nosignal or disabled idle disabled no bandwidth interfaceEntry 6 interfaceAtmAccess OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unknown 1
333. th the MAC address of the port that was initially associated with the IP address of the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module This ensures that the ARP table entry in the stations that communicate with the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module via the IP will still be valid regardless of the fact that the port with that MAC address may be down If the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module is reset and the MAC address of another port is associated with the IP address of the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module the ARP table entry in the stations that were communicating with the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module will become invalid Those stations will not be able to communicate with the ATM LAN Bridge module via IP until their ARP table entry is aged out or is deleted by the user to allow the IP station to discover the new MAC address associated with the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Therefore if you have problems communicating with the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module via IP one of the first things that you can do is to delete the ARP entry in your IP workstation to enable it to rediscover the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module via the ARP process 4 7 5 ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module Configuration Utility Program 62 The Configuration Utility Program is a DOS Windows based application that enables a user to modify the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module s configuration parameters to change the operating code and to use minimal mode The following is the list of the functions that can be
334. the PVC is confined to the target switch local switch atmPvcEpEntry 6 atmPvcEpRemIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 251 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The ifindex value used at the remote end to identify the interface where the PVC ends This entry will remain in the notReady state until this attribute is set and the atmPvcRowStatus is set to active atmPvcEpEntry 7 atmPvcEpRemVpi OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65536 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VPI value assigned to this PVC at the destination remote end If left at 65536 default value one value is automatically allocated by the agent DEFVAL 65536 atmPvcEpEntry 8 atmPvcEpRemVci OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 65536 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The VCI value assigned to this PVC at the destination For VP type PVC this value is not applicable and is set to 0 If left at 65536 default value one value is automatically allocated by the agent for VC only DEFVAL 65536 atmPvcEpEntry 9 atmPvcEpLastActive OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DateAndTime ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The date and time of the latest PVC activation atmPvcEpEntry 10 atmPvcEpQ2931Cause OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS
335. the aggregate traffic exceeds the capacity of the LAN traffic over ATM By having a larger buffer size 8 000 cells the A12 MB25 and A3 MB155 modules are able to absorb bursts of traffic of longer duration thereby delaying the trigger of the congestion control mechanism such as Early Packet Discard This improves the overall response time and relieves end systems from extra frame retransmissions PVC Multipoint Support In addition to the existing support of point to multipoint SVCs this introduces the smart PVC point to multipoint function Point to multipoint trees can be defined now with either fixed permanent virtual paths PVPs or fixed permanent virtual channels PVCs You only need to define the parameters VP or VP VC values for the root of the tree and the leaves without any definition for intermediate switches In case of failure on these intermediate switches the connections are automatically re established New 8260 ATM Modules Support In addition to the control point level V1 2 this level supports the new IBM 8260 ATM modules as follows ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module MIB Enhancement MIB 1 6 The IBM private MIB for the IBM 8285 is enhanced corresponding to the other announcements ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 3 4 ATM Backplane Expansion Unit Connection As described in Figure 9 on page 18 there are several ATM buses
336. the console port indicates the status of the last file transfer and has the following meaning Red Transfer failed Blue Download status unknown Green No transfer since startup transfer in progress or transfer successfully completed A blue border around the managed device graphic means that the device is not responding or that communication to the device has encountered problems The status and configuration information presented on the subsystem window represents the status before communication to the device was lost 8 3 4 6 Monitor The ATM monitor panel allows you to display an overview of the traffic rate going through the selected ATM subsystem 8 3 4 7 SLIP Configuration The SLIP Configuration panel allows you to add modify SLIP configuration communicating with the switch 8 3 4 8 Download The Download panel allows you to download the microcode and FPGA picocode to the switch 8 3 4 9 Call Logging The call logging panel shown in Figure 55 on page 166 provides you to display the call log information corresponding to the IBM 8285 ports Chapter 8 IBM 8285 Management 165 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Figure 55 IBM 8285 Node Call Logging Panel 8 3 4 10 LAN Emulation The LAN Emulation panel shown in Figure 56 displays the LANE components information corresponding to the IBM 8285 ports such as the integrated LES BUS internal LEC and external LECS Figure 56 IBM 8285 Node LAN Emulation Pa
337. their configuration console interface but they use a native interface not a Telnet session Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 105 106 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The inband console is attached to the LAN and establishes a Telnet session to the IBM 8285 and uses TFTP to download microcode Like the out of band SLIP mode it uses the TCP IP stack In addition to the configuration console the 8285 switch can be managed via its SNMP interface which allows most console functions to be performed via a user friendly graphical interface For more information about the SNMP management refer to the following chapter 6 3 2 2 Setup Procedure This section describes the setup procedure summary for both normal and SLIP mode The detailed procedure is described in the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and User s Guide SA33 0381 Normal Mode The setup procedure of normal mode console is as follows 1 Connect an ASCII terminal Connect an ASCII terminal pure ASCII terminal or PC RISC workstation which has ASCII emulation function to the IBM 8285 The connection can be directly connecting the terminal to the console port on the front panel of the IBM 8285 base unit or remotely via modems and a telecommunication link 2 Set up the console parameters Check if the console parameters settings of the terminal match the IBM 8285 s and change the values if needed The factory set default settings
338. tility of the LAN Switch modules in conjunction with the 8285 switch For the purposes of the example we could have just as easily moved all of the servers to ATM directly providing 155 Mbps to each server Or we could have connected a shared 100Base Tx segment to the LAN switch module to access resources on that segment and to provide ATM access to the 100Base Tx users Table 11 illustrates the before and after results of our changes Table 11 Page 1 of 2 Bandwidth Improvement with Ethernet LAN Switch Module Device Maximum Bandwidth Available Kbps Bandwidth Server ATM Micro ATM25 a Offload Server segment Offload ation Primary Server 100000 155000 155000 155000 682x Secondary Server 100000 100000 100000 100000 440x Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 79 80 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 11 Page 2 of 2 Bandwidth Improvement with Ethernet LAN Switch Module Device Maximum Bandwidth Available Kbps Bandwidth Server ATM Micro ATM25 MwA Offload Server segment Offload AUS ation Ethernet Desktop 4000 5714 25x ATM Desktop 4000 25000 110x Note Ff In this case assuming an even distribution of three workstations per segment on each of 16 available Ethernet segments H Calculated by dividing the total bandwidth available after the change by the original bandwidth available per device which was calculated by dividing the total bandwidth availabl
339. to download code upgrades in the IBM ATM switches through the network inband Then it allows easy problem fixes or function enhancements on the IBM ATM switches that have the control point code ATM Network Monitoring and Statistics Management The ATM Campus Manager application provides key performance counters Nways Campus Manager ATM allows you to collect statistical information and display it in a more readable graphical format Below is a list of some of the different types of information that it can collect e Logging of calls All calls that is calls in progress and calls that have been cleared ona node can be logged with information such as calling and called number creation time clear time and clear cause e Traffic Statistics on an interface s traffic can be gathered with information such as received and transmit cells discarded cells and invalid cells e Bandwidth Information about the amount of bandwidth that is utilized on a port can be found e Q2931 Status Information on the incoming and outgoing calls in progress can be collected e SAAL Errors Information on the various errors detected by SAAL can be collected The data can be saved in a file as well The availability of performance information from the Nways Campus Manager ATM enhances the ATM network by facilitating network tuning ATM Connection Tracking Connections can be selected and tracked The endpoints and all the intermediate nodes u
340. to ensure that its environment corresponds to the specifications listed in Table 16 Workgroup Switch Table 16 Page 1 of 2 Environmental Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM 33 8 F to 140 F Description IBM 8285 Base Unit Base plus Expansion Operating Temperature 10 C to 40 C 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 122 F 50 F to 122 F Storage Temperature 1eC to 60 C 1eC to 60 C 33 8 F to 140 F Operating Humidity Air Exhaust 8 to 95 non condensing 1 4me min ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch 8 to 95 non condensing 2 8me min This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Description IBM 8285 Base Unit Table 16 Page 2 of 2 Environmental Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base plus Expansion Acoustic 5 8Bel 6 0Bel with Expansion 6 1 2 2 Mechanical Specifications The 8285 switch is designed to be either rack mounted or to rest on a table top Your mount must be able to support at least the following specifications listed in Table 17 with the appropriate safety factors Table 17 Mechanical Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Description IBM 8285 Base Unit Base plus Expansion Width 440 mm 17 3 inches 440 mm 17 3 inches Depth 508 mm 20 0 inches 508 mm 20 0 inches Height 133 3 mm 5 25 in or 3U 133 3 mm 5 25 in or 3U Weight empty 12 8 kg
341. tory DESCRIPTION A value used to uniquely identify a remote end point of a PVC when associated with an interface index and a PVC identifier 250 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only For a point to point PVC this value is always set to 0 atmPvcEpEntry 3 atmPvcEpRowStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER active 1 notInService 2 notReady 3 createAndWait 5 destroy 6 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION States values active the PVC is operational notInService the PVC is failing notReady values are missing to be able to activate this PVC Actions active this requests to re start a failing unicast PVC status was notInService destroy this requests to delete a unicast PVC atmPvcEpEntry 4 atmPvcEpStatusCause OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER noCause 1 underModification 2 missingParameters 3 invalidParameters 4 uncompatibleParameter internalFailure 6 pvcFailure 7 unavailableResource 8 remoteBusy 9 retrying 10 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A detailed cause for the current PVC status atmPvcEpEntry 5 s 5 atmPvcEpRemAddress OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX NetPrefix ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ATM address of the remote ATM switch where the PVC ends If none is specified the ATM address of the target switch local is used and
342. ttaching the Expansion Interface Cable Hardware Architecture of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base Unite s sso eae ae a ee oe be eed ANS ee ee Hardware Architecture of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base and Expansion Unit 0 02020 0000005 Internal Cell Format of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch d ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module Workgroup 8285 Low Cost Configuration Implementation 8285 with ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Modules as an Access Switch 2 222 4 4 64 wise w eed Wa ei hee poe ee d ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module High Performance WOrKQIOUD te gece Goat Ae Be ha ee Be eal ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module with Redundant Backbone Links 2 4224 sie oae oD BRR aA Se a Re ee ATM 100 Mbps MIC SC Fiber Module Workgroup Configuration ATM 100 Mbps MIC SC Fiber Module with Redundant ATM Backbone PKS cP ee a ke Hk ee a ok Bee aa Ui Th i Typical MEPG 2 Picture Sequence Showing Picture Types Video Distribution Module Workgroup Configuration Video Distribution Module for Campus Video Distribution Video Distribution Module with ATM WAN for Enterprise Video Distribution 4 62 dite Oe A ee et bos ol eee aA OAR ARABS Local LAN to ATM Server Bridging 0004 Local LAN Bridging and ATM Server Access Campus LAN Interconnect and ATM Server Access
343. tus Messages and Causes IX Status Message Possible Causes Suggestions IX OK Link is configured None properly and active Attached to non SSI port Remote device is not Disable the remote port configured to support the then enable it for SSI SSI protocol Hub numbers identical Both switches have the Change the ATM address same ATM network of one of the switches so prefix that at least the hub number is different ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Table 34 Page 2 of 2 IX Status Messages and Causes IX Status Message Possible Causes Suggestions ACN mismatch Each switch has a e Change the ATM different ATM cluster address of one of the number switches so that both have the same cluster number Set each end of the link to use NNI protocols if connecting different clusters That is basically all that is required to configure a simple ATM CIP network 7 2 Configuring LAN Emulation The IBM 8285 Control Point can provide the Forum Compliant LAN Emulation server functions LES BUS and the client LEC function To enable these functions on the 8285 ATM Control Point it is necessary to configure and enable LAN Emulation on it 7 2 1 8285 LAN Emulation Functions Overview The IBM 8285 Control Point can provide the Forum Compliant LAN Emulation server functions LES BUS and the client LEC function It sup
344. u have access to some 8285 commands with read only access This allows you to view ATM subsystem status get help clear counters and log off The factory default user password is a null string Administrator Mode When you are logged on as administrator you have access to all the 8285 commands with read write access which allows you to display and modify the ATM switching subsystem in the 8285 The factory default administrator password is 8285 e Maintenance Mode When you are logged on as administrator and enter the MAINTAIN command in administrator mode you have access to maintenance functions such as downloading out of band and clearing the ATM subsystem configuration No password is required to access the maintenance mode from the administrator mode To quit the maintenance mode you have to enter the BOOT command to reset the ATM subsystem Note You can access the maintenance mode only if you logged on with the administrator password from a local ATM control point session via the RS 232 port You cannot access the maintenance mode from a remote session started with the TELNET command There are no user IDs associated with these modes Once you connect to the 8285 you will be prompted to enter a password The password that you enter determines if you get administrator or user A 1 3 How to Change Administrator and User Password After logging in to 8285 for the first time you are strongly advised to change the de
345. ubMfr OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 1 32 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The company name that manufactured this hub An instance for which information is not valid will return invalid EEPROM ocInvHub 4 ocInvHubMfrDate OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 6 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The date in yymmdd format that this unit was manufactured An instance for which information is not valid will return invalid EEPROM ocInvHub 5 ocInvHubNotePad OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 256 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Note pad area reserved for the hub This area contains information pertaining to the hub such as service or hardware upgrade information An instance for which information is not valid will return invalid EEPROM ocInvHub 6 IBM 8260 Modules inventory information Contains information about the hub modules The modules information are organized as a base one matrix That is a module motherboard or daughter card can be located by a pair of primitives Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 271 272 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only slot index and subslot index i e lt slot gt lt subslot gt ocInvModTable ocInvModTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OcInvModEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION
346. ubNetwork Attachment Point An LLC header extension that identifies the protocol type of a frame SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol An IETF Standard protocol that uses MIBs to control and monitor network elements SR Source Routing A bridging protocol for Token Ring LANs SRT Source Routing Transparent A bridging protocol for LANs specified in the IEEE 802 1d Standard SRT bridges support both source route and transparent bridging on the same port SR TB Source Route Transparent Bridge A bridge that connect SR and SRT ports Sublayer A logical sub division of a layer switched connection A connection established by signaling SVC switched virtual circuit A logical not physical connection established between two ATM stations on demand using signalling SVN Switched Virtual Networking The name of IBM s framework for building and managing switch based networks synchronous Literally locked together When two bit streams are said to be synchronous it is meant that they are controlled by the same clock and are in the same phase This soft copy for use by IBM employees only T TB Transparent bridging A bridging protocol for LANs specified in the IEEE 802 1d Standard TLV Type length value A generalized information element that may be present in certain LAN emulation packets telephone twisted pair One or more twisted pairs of copper wire in the unshielded voice grade cable co
347. ulation LANE or IBM LAN Emulation IBMLE This enables traditional LAN users connected to one of the external ports to access transparently devices for instance servers on a high speed ATM ELAN either LANE or IBMLE Note The emulated LAN must be the same type of LAN as the one used on the four LAN ports This means that the ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module cannot be used to connect Ethernet devices to token ring devices across an ATM network However such connectivity can be provided when the ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module is used in conjunction with an ATM router such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server Supports standard source route bridging SRB when the ports are configured to use token ring This enables easy migration from existing token ring backbones to high speed ATM backbones Supports transparent bridging when the ports are configured to use Ethernet Supports 256 virtual circuits VCs over the ATM connection Supports both Generic Flow Control GFC and Operation and Maintenance Flow 5 OAM 5 to throttle traffic in a congestion situation Supports powerful flexible filtering of inbound LAN traffic In the token ring environment filters can be based on Hop count MAC address Ring number Source service access point SAP Subnetwork access protocol SNAP In an Ethernet environment filters can be based on MAC address Source service access point SAP Ethert
348. upported and Maximum Distances UTP Category 3 100 meters unshielded twisted pair UTP Category 4 150 meters UTP Cat 5 100 Ohms 160 meters FTP 100 120 Ohms 150 meters foiled twisted pair SFTP 150 Ohms 150 meters shielded and foiled twisted pair STP 150 Ohms 300 meters shielded twisted pair 155 Mbps Cabling supported and Maximum Distances UTP Cat 5 100 Ohms FTP 100 120 Ohms 100 meters 100 meters foiled twisted pair SFTP 100 120 Ohms STP 150 Ohms 100 meters shielded and foiled twisted pair 100 meters shielded twisted pair The ports comply with the latest ATM Forum specifications concerning pinouts Although the ATM25 cable uses the same number of pins as both Chapter 6 IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 95 96 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only token ring and Ethernet the pinouts are different and incompatible as shown in Table 39 on page 179 Fiber Ports Physical Interface 100 Mbps ports SC or MIC 155 Mbps ports SC Cabling Supported Multimode Fiber I O Cards 100 Mbps 155 Mbps ports 50 125 um micron multimode fiber e 62 5 125 um Single Mode Fiber I O Cards 155Mbps ports e Light Source LASER at 1300 20nm e 9 1 125 um micron single mode fiber It is not necessary for a single type of fiber to be used from one end of a connection to another However doing so will provide you with longer distances between devices and may simplify troublesho
349. v 3 envPSEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX EnvPSEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A list of information for each power supply in the concentrator INDEX envPSIndex envPSTable 1 EnvPSEntry SEQUENCE envPS Index INTEGER envPSAdminState INTEGER envPSOperStatus INTEGER envPSIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION Identifies the power supply for which this entry contains power supply information envPSEntry 1 envPSAdminState OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER activate 1 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current desired state of the power supply activate is the only adminState reported envPSEntry 2 260 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only envPSOperStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER active 1 standby 2 faulty 3 not installed 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The current operational state of the power supply A power supply in standby does not provide power to the concentrator envPSEntry 3 envFanStatus OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER okay 1 faulty 2 not installed 4 unknown 5 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The overall status of the fan s When fan operational status is known this object s value is an aggregate of all fan st
350. vHub OBJECT IDENTIFIER ocInventory 1 ocInvMods OBJECT IDENTIFIER ocInventory 2 agentsMySlot OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The slot id of this agent chassisAgents 1 agentsMasterReset OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER noReset 1 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The agent mastership cannot be reset noReset is always returned chassisAgents 2 agentsTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AgentsEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A table of agents in the concentrator as seen by this agent A master will see all the agents a slave will only see itself chassisAgents 3 agentsEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX AgentsEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION A profile of an agent within the concentrator 256 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only INDEX agentsSlotIndex agentsTable 1 AgentsEntry SEQUENCE agentsSlot Index INTEGER agentsStationAddr OCTET STRING agents IpAddress IpAddress agentsMasterStatus INTEGER agentsMasterPriority INTEGER ocAgentsSubS1ot INTEGER agentsSlotIndex OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The slot number that identifies the referenced agent agentsEntry 1 agentsStationAddr OBJECT TYPE
351. vice to the requesting endstation which caches it in its own ARP table If however the ARP server doesn t have the IP address in its ARP table it returns an ARP_FAILURE to the requesting client The client now forwards the unresolvable address to its default gateway for further handling If the gateway can resolve the address it returns its IP and ATM addresses to the client to be cached If the gateway cannot resolve the address it returns an ARP_FAILURE to the client and the address resolution process terminates CIP Data Forwarding When a device wishes to forward data to another CIP device it must first check to see if it knows the other device s ATM address that is its ARP table contains an entry for the desired destination device If so it merely establishes a direct connection with the other device and forwards data to it If not it must first resolve the address see CIP Address Resolution above then setup a connection and then forward data directly A more complete discussion of Classical IP can be found in BM 8260 As a Campus ATM Switch SG24 5003 and ATM Campus Introduction Planning and Troubleshooting Overview GA27 4089 Chapter 1 Introduction to ATM Networks 7 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 8 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chapter 2 Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch The IBM 8285 Nways
352. was developed at the IBM Research Laboratory in Zurich Switzerland This is the same switch that is used in other IBM ATM switches such as the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub and the IBM Nways 2220 Broadband Network Switch The architecture of the expansion unit is similar to that of the IBM 8260 e Each module contains CAP CAD components to interface to the ATM backplane e The ATM backplane is fully passive and uses female connectors to improve availability e The ATM backplane is point to point wired to connect each module directly to the switch on a chip Note This means that the IBM 8260 ATM CPSW Module is not supported in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis which also means that any CPSW exclusives such as switch redundancy are not supported However the architecture is different in several key ways e The control point is in a separate module the base unit from the switch e The control point shares a set of CAP CAD components with the ATM ports 3 2 Switching Fabric As described above there are two switching mechanisms used in the IBM 8285 depending on whether the base unit is operating with or without an expansion unit The following sections describe in detail the switching mechanism in each case 3 2 1 Switching in the IBM 8285 This section describes the switching mechanism in the IBM 8285 Before going into further details about the switching function of the 8285 switch it is neces
353. west module the ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module which allocates only 12 bits to the VPC VCC portion of the header and which allows the following modes e Mode 0 12 all 12 bits assigned to VCC VPC 0 VCC range is 0 4095 e Mode 2 10 2 bits for VPC 10 bits for VCC VPC range is 0 3 VCC range is 0 1023 e Mode 4 8 4 bits for VPC 8 bits for VCC VPC range is 0 15 VCC range is 0 255 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only For all modules you can define upper limits for VP VC values at the port level to facilitate interoperability with certain ATM devices that have constraints on what values they will accept This is done using the Set PORT command which has a new parameter VPI_VCI bits_vpi bits_vci Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 37 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only 4 3 ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module The ATM 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module is a single slot concentrator module that provides low cost access to a high performance ATM network It is ideal for upgrading your legacy LAN users and for providing higher performance to new users It has the following characteristics e 12 Forum Compliant ATM 25 6 RJ 45 ports capable of supporting shielded and unshielded twisted pair cabling e Supports user to switch server to switch and switch to switch connections in any combination e Supports
354. witch Note that this value is the aggregate throughput of all the ports on several minutes globalThroughputStats 2 receiveTopList OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION 214 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The ifindexes of the five most receiving interfaces The first ifindex given is the one corresponding to the interface which has received the more cells during the last polling interval All ifIndexes are separated by a blank character If there are less than 5 interfaces receiving data there are less than 5 ifindexes listed globalThroughputStats 3 transmitTopList OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The ifindexes of the five most transmitting interfaces The first ifindex given is the one corresponding to the interface which has sent the more cells during the last polling interval All ifIndexes are separated by a blank character If there are less than 5 interfaces transmitting data there are less than 5 ifindexes listed globalThroughputStats 4 globalMaximumCel1Throughput OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The maximal number of cells that can be transmitted through the switch in one second globalThroughputStats 5 ATM optional features optionalFeatureTable OBJECT TYP
355. witchEntry 1 switchAdminState OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER isolate 1 attach 2 ACCESS read write STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The desired state of the slot connection to the switch When a slot is isolated from the switch the switch traffic from this slot to the switch is disabled As a result if an ATM module is plugged in this slot it will not be operational When a slot is attached to the switch the switch is ready to receive ATM traffic from this slot As a result if an ATM module is plugged in this slot it can be used for ATM traffic switchEntry 2 switchOperState OBJECT TYPE Appendix E IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 201 202 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only SYNTAX INTEGER isolated 1 attached 2 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The actual state of the slot connection to the switch When the administrative state is set to ISOLATE the operational state becomes ISOLATED When the operational state is set to ATTACH the operational state may become either ATTACHED or ISOLATED depending on the hardware current status of the slot switchEntry 3 ATM modules moduleTable OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF ModuleEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION This table provides the list of ATM modules in the hub physical 2 moduleEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX ModuleEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS m
356. wo LES BUS are used The LES BUS gives an impact on CP performance when running so that the processor and memory are mainly shared between signaling BUS and routing However it is designed to prevent the CP traffic from the delay and buffer accumulation by assigning lower priority to the broadcast traffic 34 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules This chapter describes the various functions and features that are available on 8285 ATM modules 4 1 Modules Currently Available for the 8285 ATM Subsystem The current ATM modules for the IBM 8285 are Copyright IBM Corp 1996 ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module 1 port ATM 155Mbps Multi mode Fiber I O card 1 port ATM 155 Mbps Single mode Fiber I O card 1 port ATM 155 Mbps UTP STP I O card RJ 45 1 port ATM 155 Mbps STP I O card DB9 ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module 1 port ATM 155Mbps Multi mode Fiber I O card 1 port ATM 155 Mbps Single mode Fiber I O card 1 port ATM 155 Mbps UTP STP I O card RJ 45 1 port ATM 155 Mbps STP I O card DB9 ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module Video Distribution Module ATM 4 Port TR Ethernet Bridge Module ATM WAN Module 1 port E3 I O card 1 port DS3 I O card 1 port OC3 I O card SMF 1 port O
357. xtended to Token Ring IEEE 802 5 Forum Compliant LAN Emulation e Expansion Unit and 8260 ATM Modules Support This level supports the IBM 8285 Expansion Unit and IBM 8260 ATM modules as follows ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module ATM 4 Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module ATM 2 Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module ATM 12 Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module ATM 4 Port Ethernet TR Bridge Module ATM WAN Module Note When this level became available it supported all IBM 8260 ATM media and bridge modules then announced However there are the following modules are currently announced and not supported by the IBM 8285 expansion unit e MSS Module 8271 8272 LAN Switch Modules MIB Enhancement MIB 1 5 The IBM private MIB for the IBM 8285 is enhanced corresponding to the other enhancements 3 3 3 Control Point V1 3 30 The Control Point V1 3 has been available since October 1996 It contains the operational code V1 3 0 and the boot code V1 3 0 No FPGA is included in this level The highlights of new and enhancement functions are as follows e New 8260 ATM Modules Support In addition to the control point level V1 2 this level supports the new IBM 8260 ATM modules as follows ATM 3 Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module e MIB Enhancement MIB 1 6 The IBM private MIB for the IBM 8285 is enhanced corresponding to the other enhancements ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the
358. y 6 atmSvcLogClearCause OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The cause of the clearing of this SVC REFERENCE ATM Forum 93 265R5 Signalling Specification Draft Apr 14 93 atmSvcLogEntry 7 atmSvcLogForwardQOS OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unspecified 0 class A 1 class B 2 class C 3 class D 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The forward Quality Of Service requested for this call atmSvcLogEntry 8 atmSvcLogBackwardQOS OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unspecified 0 class A 1 class B 2 class C 3 class D 4 ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION 238 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only The backward Quality Of Service requested for this call atmSvcLogEntry 9 atmSvcLogForwardBW OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The forward bandwidth requested for this call atmSvcLogEntry 10 atmSvcLogBackwardBW OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION The backward bandwidth requested for this call atmSvcLogEntry 11 SAAL Group This group defines support for the SAAL protocol atmSaal OBJECT IDENTIFIER atmSvc 2 This table defines the SAAL configuration and status atmSaalConfTable OBJECT TYP
359. y occur when isolating a slot disabling a port if the request is received through this specific port module slot 2 22 change TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node VARIABLES moduleSlotIndex ifIndex DESCRIPTION A change trap is sent when one of the following MIB variables or group of variables is changed Date and Time reset System Parameters name contact location changed Interface changed Administrative State enabled disabled Module changed Administrative State isolate attach When one of this variable is changed the lastChange MIB object is also updated with the current date and time When the Date and Time or the System Parameters changed the interface number of the hub virtual interface is returned This trap may be disabled 3 pvcFailure TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node VARIABLES atmPvcIndex atmPvcIdentifier atmPvcEpQ2931Cause 254 ATM Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only DESCRIPTION A PVC failure trap is sent when a PVC becomes inoperational 232 4 node 5 intentionnally left unused callLoggingOverflow TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node DESCRIPTION A callLoggingOverflow trap is sent when the call logging table is about to wrap 6 moduleInstalled TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node VARIABLES moduleSlotIndex DESCRIPTION An ATM module has been detected in the hub 2 7 moduleRemoved TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE node
360. you when the installation is complete 1 3 TCP IP SLIP Connection Setup In order to communicate with the ATM LAN Bridge Module hardware the Configuration Utility uses TCP IP via the winsock d11 The configurator has been thoroughly tested with the IBM versions of TCP IP DOS and 0S 2 However it has been demonstrated to work with the Chameleon TCP IP protocol stack from NetManage and Win95 from Microsoft kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk You will need a NULL modem cable to directly attach to the bridge using the SLIP interface ERR kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk End to end the cable needs the following lines 25 pin 25 pin female PC 8281 cable connector Pin Number Line Line Pin Number 3 RD TD 2 2 TD RD 3 7 COMMON COMMON 7 9 PIN 25 pin female PC gt 8281 cable connector Pin Number Line Line Pin Number 2 RD TD 2 3 TD RD 3 7 COMMON COMMON 7 NULL MODEM CABLES NOTICE The Transmit and Receive line s are reversed on the 9 and 25 connectors on the PC side kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk KAER IMPORTANT NOTE REGARDING UA
361. ype Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 57 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only These filters can be activated and prioritized at both the bridge level and the port level to provide even greater control over your network traffic Comes with an easy to learn easy to use graphical configuration program to simplify the task of configuring and managing the bridge module e Management of the ATM LAN Bridge module is done using SNMP The SNMP agent within the module supports various MIBs m Note _____ The SNMP agent in this module is accessible via IP over any of the ATM or LAN ports Since the ATM port supports only LANE or IBMLE any ATM attached management station must support LANE or IBMLE This implies that ATM attached stations using Classical IP over ATM RFC 1577 cannot communicate with this module directly over ATM However an ATM router such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server can interconnect ELANs running CIP and LANE and provide SNMP access at the IP layer 4 7 1 1 LAN Ports The ATM TR Ethernet Bridge Module has four LAN ports that can be configured via the configuration program to be used either as token ring or as Ethernet ports Ports 1 and 3 on the module are always accessed via an RJ 45 interface for both token ring and Ethernet Ports 2 and 4 can be accessed via the following interfaces e An RJ 45 interface that can be used by token ring or Ethernet e An AUI interface th
362. ype 143 IP network number 143 LANE registration 141 LANE registration sequence 143 maxiumum SDU size 143 physical connection 139 TRS capacity 101 U UNI 38 42 43 46 57 58 67 104 ABR _ 32 89 limitations atmufc performance 76 management interfaces 5x08ih1 source route switching 77 V Variable Video Distribution Module 8 Port configuration process 52 features 48 power requirements 94 sample scenario campus video distribution 55 sample scenario enterprise ATM interconnect sample scenario enterprise video distribution sample scenario workgroup 54 standards supported 48 video resolutions 48 VPD considerations 68 VPC VCCs 298 atm Workgroup Solutions Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch This soft copy for use by IBM employees only This soft copy for use by IBM employees only Printed in U S A G24 4817 S 817 00
363. ype of virtual path connection local_vpi The vp vc value for the local end of the PVC See Table 5 for allowable values remote_vpi The vp vc value for the other end of the PVC See Table 5 for allowable values bw_alloc The bandwidth allocation algorithm to be used BEST_EFFORT RESERVED BANDWIDTH bandwidth The amount of bandwidth to allocate if bw_alloc has been set to RESERVED_BANDWIDTH Table 5 VC Values by Port for VDM Module VP 0 Port First Second Third Fourth Fifth Sixth Seventh Eighth vc 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Value With the following command the video source an IBM 8300 Video Access Node is directly connected to the 155 Mbps port on the base unit pvc 1 13 1 3 2 02 channel 0 33 0 33 best effort Chapter 4 IBM 8285 ATM Modules 53 This soft copy for use by IBM employees only m Reminder Remember that the vpi vci pairs that you specify must match those configured in the devices at each end of the PVC In this case the VDM forces values of 0 32 0 33 etc but your source device must be configured to match the vpi vci values that you configured above 4 6 3 Sample Scenarios 54 The Video Distribution Module is designed to provide cost effective distribution of video and audio programs either real time or from a server to either a workgroup or an ATM network It is ideal for such applications as distance learning online education and real time news updat

IBM SG24-4817-00 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents